Skip to main content Accessibility help
×
Hostname: page-component-78c5997874-j824f Total loading time: 0 Render date: 2024-11-05T04:33:24.883Z Has data issue: false hasContentIssue false

Part II - Case Studies for Areal Linguistics

Published online by Cambridge University Press:  11 May 2017

Raymond Hickey
Affiliation:
Universität Duisburg–Essen
Get access
Type
Chapter
Information
Publisher: Cambridge University Press
Print publication year: 2017

Access options

Get access to the full version of this content by using one of the access options below. (Log in options will check for institutional or personal access. Content may require purchase if you do not have access.)

References

References

Århammer, Nils, 2007. Das Nordfriesische, eine bedrohte Minderheitssprache in zehr Dialekten: Eine Bestandsaufnahme. In Munske, Horst Haider (ed.), Sterben die Dialekte aus? Vorträge am interdisziplinären Zentrum für Dialektforschung an der Friedrich-Alexander-Universität Erlangen-Nürnberg, 22.10 – 10.12 2007. www.dialektforschung.phil.uni-erlangen.de/publikationen/sterben-die-dialekte-aus.shtmlGoogle Scholar
Bandle, Oskar, Braunmüller, Kurt, Jahr, Ernst Håkon, Karker, Allan, Naumann, Hans-Peter and Teleman, Ulf (eds), 2002/2004. The Nordic Languages: An International Handbook of the History of the North Germanic Languages, two volumes. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Barnes, Michael P., 1998. The Norn Language of Orkney and Shetland. Lerwick: The Shetland Times.Google Scholar
Berend, Nina, 1998. Sprachliche Anpassung: Eine sociolinguistische-dialektologische Untersuchung zum Rußlanddeutschen. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Berend, Nina, 2009. Vom Sprachinseldialekt zur Migrantensprache: Anmerkungen zum Sprachwandel der Einwanderungsgeneration. In Liebert, Wolf-Andreas and Schwinn, Horst (eds), Mit Bezug auf Sprache: Festschrift für Rainer Wimmer, pp. 361381. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Berend, Nina and Jedig, Hugo, 1991. Deutsche Mundarten in der Sowjetunion: Geschichte der Forschung und Bibliographie. Marburg: Elwert.Google Scholar
Bergsland, Knut, 1992. Language contacts between Southern Sami and Scandinavian. In Jahr, Ernst Håkon (ed.), Language Contact: Theoretical and Empirical Studies, pp. 515. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bernini, Giuliano and Ramat, Paolo, 1996. Negative Sentences in the Languages of Europe: A Typological Approach. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Biberauer, Teresa, 2009. Afrikaans. In Brown, Keith and Ogilvie, Sarah (eds), Concise Encyclopedia of Languages of the World, pp. 711. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Bidese, Ermenegildo, Dow, James R. and Stolz, Thomas (eds), 2005. Das Zimbrische zwischen Germanisch und Romanisch. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Boas, Hans C., 2009. The Life and Death of Texas German. Durham: Duke University Press.Google Scholar
Boberg, Charles, 2012. English as a minority language in Quebec. World Englishes 31: 493502.Google Scholar
Bomhard, Allan R. and Kerns, John C., 1994. The Nostratic Macrofamily: A Study in Distant Linguistic Relationship. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bowerman, Sean, 2004. White South African English: Morphology and Syntax. In Kortmann, Bernd, Burridge, Kate, Mesthrie, Rajend, Schneider, Edgar W. and Upton, Clive (eds), A Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 2: Morphology and Syntax, pp. 948961. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Brattegard, Olav, 1945. Die mittelniederdeutsche Geschäftssprache des hansischen Kaufmanns zu Bergen, two volumes. Bergen: A. S. John Griegs Boktrykkeri.Google Scholar
Braunmüller, Kurt, 1991. Die skandinavischen Sprachen im Überblick. Stuttgart: UTB.Google Scholar
Braunmüller, Kurt and House, Juliane (eds), 2009. Convergence and Divergence in Language Contact Situations. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, , McMahon, and Vincent, (eds), pp. 131.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Carlie, Johan, 1925. Studium über die mittelniederdeutsche Urkundensprache der dänischen Köningskanzlei von 1330–1430 nebst einer Übersicht über die Kanzleiverhältnisse. Lund: Gleerupska Universitetsbokhandeln.Google Scholar
Colleman, Timothy, 2013. ’n Germaanse toebroodjie: Three cases of English influence on the grammar of Afrikaans. Paper at the Germanic Sandwich conference held at the University of Leuven in January 2013.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 2001. The origin of the Scandinavian languages. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 1, pp. 215235.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 2009. Issues in complexity as a result of language contact. In Braunmüller, and House, (eds), pp. 4152.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), 2001. The Circum-Baltic Languages, two volumes. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dalton-Puffer, Christiane, 1996. The French Influence on Middle English Morphology: A Corpus-based Study of Derivation. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
den Besten, Hans, 1986. Double negation and the genesis of Afrikaans. In Muysken, Pieter and Smith, Norval (eds), Substrata and Universals in Creole Genesis, pp. 185230. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
den Besten, Hans, 1989. From Khoekhoe foreignertalk via hottentot Dutch to Afrikaans: The creation of a novel grammar. In Piitz, Martin and Dirven, René (eds), Wheels within Wheels: Papers of the Duisburg Symposium on Pidgin and Creole Languages, pp. 207250. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Diercks, Willy, 1993. Zur Verwendung prä- und postmodifizierender Morpheme in Mittelniederdeutschen und in den skandinavischen Sprachen. In Braunmüller, Kurt and Diercks, Willy (eds), Niederdeutsch und die skandinavischen Sprachen, vol. I: pp. 161194. Heidelberg: Universitätsverlag C. Winter.Google Scholar
Donaldson, Bruce C., 1991. The Influence of English in Afrikaans: A Case Study of Linguistic Change in a Language Contact Situation. Pretoria: Van Schaik.Google Scholar
Drinka, Bridget, 2013. Sources of auxiliation in the perfects of Europe. Studies in Language 37: 599644.Google Scholar
Durkin, Philip, 2014. Borrowed Words: A History of Loanwords in English. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Eggers, Eckhard, 1998. Sprachwandel und Sprachmischung im Jiddischen. Frankfurt: Lang.Google Scholar
Emonds, Joseph, 2011. English as a North Germanic language: From the Norman Conquest to the present. In Trušnik, Roman, Nemčoková, Katarína and Bell, Gregory Jason (eds), Theories and Practice: Proceedings of the Second International Conference on English and American Studies, pp. 1326. Zlín: Univerzita Tomáše Bati.Google Scholar
Emonds, Joseph Embley and Faarlund, Jan Terje, 2014. English: The Language of the Vikings. Olomouc: Palacký University.Google Scholar
Faatz, Jan Patrick, 2009. Uwer unse Sprak is nich gut un warn klok ut … : Eine Untersuchung zum Gebrauch des Petuhtantendeutsch in der heutigen flensburger Alltagssprache. Norderstedt: Grin.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, 2002. More on the English progressive and the Celtic connection. In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes III: pp. 150168. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Paulasto, Heli, 2008. English and Celtic in Contact. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Pitkänen, Heli (eds), 2002. The Celtic roots of English. Joensuu: Joensuu Yliopistopaino.Google Scholar
Fischer, Olga, 2013. The role of contact in English syntactic change in Old and Middle English periods. In Schreier, and Hundt, (eds), pp. 1840.Google Scholar
Gadeanu, Sorin, 1998. Sprache auf der Suche: Zur Identitätsfrage des Deutschen in Rumänian am Beispiel der Temerwarer Stadtsprache. Regenburg: Roderer.Google Scholar
Gamillscheg, Ernst, 1934–1936. Romania Germanica: Sprach- und Siedlungsgeschichte der Germanen auf dem Boden des alten Römerreichs, three volumes. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gold, David L., 1985. Jewish English. In Fishman, Joshua A. (ed.), Readings in the Sociology of the Jewish Languages, pp. 280298. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Hancock, Ian, 1992. Roots of inequity: Romani cultural rights in their historical and social context. Immigrants and Minorities 2 (1): 320.Google Scholar
Hancock, Ian, 2010. Romani and Angloromani. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 367383.Google Scholar
Hansen, Björn, 2000. The German modal verb müssen and the Slavonic languages: The reconstruction of a success story. Scando-Slavica 46: 7793.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 1998. How young is Standard Average European? Language Sciences 20: 271287.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 2001. The European linguistic area: Standard Average European. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkehard, Oesterreicher, Wolfgang and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Language Typology and Language Universals: An International Handbook / Sprachtypologie und sprachliche Universalien: Ein internationales Handbuch / La typologie des langues et les universaux linguistiques: Manuel international, pp. 14921510. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Haugen, Einar, 1976. The Scandinavian Languages: An Introduction to their History. London: Faber and Faber.Google Scholar
Hawkins, John A., 1987. The Germanic languages. In Comrie, Bernard (ed.), The World’s Major Languages, pp. 6876. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2006. The Changing Languages of Europe. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Helgason, Pétur, Ringen, Catherine and Suomi, Kari, 2013. Swedish quantity: Central Standard Swedish and Fenno-Swedish. Journal of Phonetics 41 (6): 534545.Google Scholar
Hélix, Laurence, 2011. Histoire de la langue française. Paris: Ellipses.Google Scholar
Hesseling, Dirk C., 1923. Het Afrikaans. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 1999. Ireland as a linguistic area. In Mallory, James P. (ed.), Language in Ulster, pp. 3653. Special issue of Ulster Folklife 45. Holywood, Co. Down, Northern Ireland: Ulster Folk and Transport Museum.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2007. Irish English: History and Present-day Forms. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012a. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hilty, G., 1968. Westfränkische Superstrateinflüsse auf die galloromanische Syntax. In Baldinger, K. (ed.), Festschrift W. v. Wartburg zum 80. Geburtstag, vol. 1, pp. 493510. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Hofmann, Dietrich, 1955. Nordisch–englische Lehnbeziehungen der Wikingerzeit. Kopenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar
Ingham, Richard (ed.), 2010. The Anglo-Norman Language and its Contexts. Woodbridge: Boydell.Google Scholar
Ingham, Richard, 2012. The Transmission of Anglo-Norman: Language History and Language Acquisition. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Jacobs, Neil G., 2001. Yiddish in the Baltic region. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 1, pp. 285311.Google Scholar
Jacobs, Neil G., Prince, Ellen F. and van der Auwera, Johan, 1994. Yiddish. In König, Ekkehard and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), The Germanic Languages, pp. 388419. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Jahr, Ernst Håkon, 2004. The special case of Norway in the twentieth century: language conflict and language planning. In Bandle, s et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 16351647.Google Scholar
Jespersen, Otto, 1905. Growth and Structure of the English Language. Leipzig: Teubner.Google Scholar
Jespersen, Otto, 1922. Language: Its Nature, Development and Origin. London: Allen & Unwin.Google Scholar
Jones, Mari C., 2010. Channel Island English. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 3556.Google Scholar
Jones, Morris, 1973. The present condition of the Welsh language. In Stephens, Meic (ed.), The Welsh Language Today, pp. 110126. Llanddysul: Gomer Press.Google Scholar
Jordan, Sabine, 1995. Niederdeutsches im Lettischen: Untersuchungen zu den mittelniederdeutschen Lehnwörter im Lettischen. Bielefeld: Verlag für Regionalgeschichte.Google Scholar
Kaiser, Georg A. and Scholze, Lenka, 2009. Verbstellung im Sprachkontakt: Das Obersorbische und Bündnerromanische im Kontakt mit dem Deutschen. In Scholze, Lenka and Wiemer, Björn (eds), Von Zuständen, Dynamik und Veränderung bei Pygmäen und Giganten: Festschrift für Walter Breu zu seinem 60. Geburtstag, pp. 305330. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Kaufmann, Götz, 2011. Looking for order in chaos: Standard convergence and divergence in Mennonite Low German. In Putnam, (ed.), pp. 189230.Google Scholar
Kiefer, Ferenc, 2010. Areal-typological aspects of word-formation: The case of aktionsart-formation in German, Hungarian, Slavic, Baltic, Romani and Yiddish. In Rainer, Franz, Dressler, Wolfgang Y., Kastovsky, Dieter and Luschützky, Hans Christian (eds), Variation and Change in Morphology: Selected Papers from the 13th International Morphology Meeting, Vienna 2008, pp. 129148. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
King, Ruth, 2000. The Lexical Basis of Grammatical Borrowing: A Prince Edward Island French Case study. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Klemola, Juhani, 2013. English as a contact language in the British Isles. In Schreier, and Hundt, (eds), pp. 7587.Google Scholar
Knipf-Komlósi, Elisabeth, 2006. Sprachliche Muster bei Sprachinselsprechern am Beispiel der Ungarndeutschen. In Berend, Nina and Knipf-Komlósi, Elisabeth (eds), Sprachinselwelten: Entwicklung und Beschreibung der deutschen Sprachinseln am Anfang des 21. Jahrhunderts / The World of Language Islands: The Developmental Stages and the Description of German Languages Islands at the Beginning of the Twenty-First Century, pp. 3956. Frankfurt am Main: Lang.Google Scholar
Koivulehto, Jorma, 2002. Contact with non-Germanic languages II: Relations to the East. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 1, pp. 583594.Google Scholar
Kontzi, Reinhold, 1982. Einleitung. In Kontzi, Reinhold (ed.), Substrate und Superstrate in den romanischen Sprachen, pp. 127. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar
Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria and Wälchli, Bernhard, 2001. The Circum-Baltic languages: An areal-typological approach. In Dahl, and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, (eds), vol. 2, pp. 615750.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd, 1998. Adverbial subordinators in the languages of Europe. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 457561.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), 2011. The Languages and Linguistics of Europe: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Kühl, Karoline H. and Petersen, Hjalmar P., 2009. Converging verbal phrases in related languages: A case study from Faro-Danish and Danish–German language contact situations. In Braunmüller, and House, (eds), pp. 101124.Google Scholar
Lagman, Herbert, 1971. Svensk–Estnisk Språkkontakt: Studier över estniskans inflytande på de estlandssvenska dialekterna. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell.Google Scholar
Lagman, Svante, Ohlsson, Stig Örjan and Voodla, Viivika (eds), 2002. Svenska språkets historia i Östsjöområdet. Tartu: Tartu Ülikooli Kirjastus.Google Scholar
Lamiroy, Béatrice, 2011. Degrés de grammaticalisation à travers les langues de même famille. In L’évolution grammaticale à travers les langues romanes, pp. 167192. Mémoires de la Société de Linguistique de Paris, vol. 19. Peeters.Google Scholar
Lass, Roger and Wright, Susan, 1986. Endogeny vs. contact: ‘Afrikaans influence’ on South African English. English World-Wide 7: 201223.Google Scholar
Le Coultre, Jean-Jules, 1875. De l’ordre des mots dans Crestien de Troyes. In Ziel, Ernst (ed.), XIV. Programm des Vitzhumschen Gymnasiums, als Einladung zu dem 17. 18 und 19. März 1875 stattfindenden öffentlichen Examen und Redeactus, pp. 588. Dresden: Teubner.Google Scholar
Lenz, Alexandra N., Gooskens, Charlotte and Reker, Siemon (eds), 2009. Low Saxon Dialects Across Borders / Niedersächsische Dialekte über Grenze hinweg. Stuttgart: Steiner.Google Scholar
Lindell, Lenny and Thorbjörnsson-Djerf, Kenth, 2008. Ordbok över svensk romani: Resandefolkets språk och sånger. Inledning, grammatik och bearnetning av Gerd Carling. Stockholm: Podium.Google Scholar
Lutz, Angelika, 2002. When did English begin? In Fanego, Teresa, Méndez-Naya, Belén and Seoane, Elena (eds), Sounds, Words, Texts and Change: Selected Papers from 11 ICEHL, Santiago de Compostela, 7–11 September 2000, pp. 145171. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Makhudu, K. Dennis Papi, 2002. An introduction to Flaaitaal (or Tsotsitaal). In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Language in South Africa, pp. 398406. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Manherz, Károly and Wild, Katalin, 1987. Zur Sprache und Volkskultur der Ungarndeutschen. Budapest: Tankönyvkiadó.Google Scholar
Marchello-Nizia, Christiane, 1995. L’évolution du français: Ordre des mots, démonstratifs, accent tonique. Paris: Armand Colin.Google Scholar
Markey, Thomas L., 1969. The Verbs Varda and Bliva in Scandinavian, with Special Emphasis on Swedish. Stockholm: Almqvist & Wiksell.Google Scholar
Markey, Thomas L., 1982. Afrikaans: Creole or non-creole? Zeitschrift für Dialektologie und Linguistik 49: 169207.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 1991. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: Present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20: 469504.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2009. Language Contact. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron and Bakker, Peter (eds), 2003. The Mixed Language Debate: Theoretical and Empirical Advances. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), 2006. Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeannette, 2007. Investigating the mechanisms of pattern replication in language convergence. Studies in Language 31: 829865.Google Scholar
McWhorter, John H., 2002. What happened to English? Diachronica 19: 217272.Google Scholar
McWhorter, John H., 2008. Our Magnificent Bastard Tongue: The Untold Story of English. New York: Gotham Books.Google Scholar
Meister Ferré, Barbara, 1994. Stability and Change in the Pennsylvania German Dialect of an Old Order Amish Community in Lancaster County. Stuttgart: Steiner.Google Scholar
Melchers, Gunnel and Sundkvist, Peter, 2010. Orkney and Shetland. In Schreier, , Trudgill, , Schneider, and Williams, (eds), pp. 1734.Google Scholar
Messner, Dieter, 1997. Einführung in die Geschichte des französischen Wortschatzes. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2002. Endogeny versus contact revisited: Aspectual busy in South African English. Language Sciences 24: 345358.Google Scholar
Miller, D. Gary, 2012. External Influences on English: From its Beginnings to the Renaissance. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Mitterand, Henri, 1968. Les mots français. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Mossé, Fernand, 1952. A Handbook of Middle English. Baltimore, MD: The Johns Hopkins Press.Google Scholar
Moulin, Claudine and Nübling, Damaris (eds), 2006. Perspektiven einer linguistischen Luxemburgistik. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Munske, Horst Haider with Århammer, Nils, Faltings, Volkert F., Hoekstra, Jarich F., Vries, Oebele, Walker, Alastair G. H. and Wilds, Ommo (eds), 2001. Handbuch des Friesischen / Handbook of Frisian Studies. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Murelli, Adriano and Kortmann, Bernd, 2011. Non-standard varieties in the areal typology of Europe. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 525544.Google Scholar
Nielsen, Hans Frede, 1985. Old English and the Continental Germanic Languages. Innsbruck: Innsbruck University Press.Google Scholar
Ohlsson, Stig Örjan, 2004. Language contact in the sixteenth, seventeenth and eighteenth centuries: The Kingdom of Sweden. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 13611368.Google Scholar
O’Neil, Wayne, 1978. The evolution of the Germanic inflectional systems: A study in the causes of language change. Orbis 28: 248286.Google Scholar
Östman, Jan-Ola, 2011. Language contact in the North of Europe. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 359380.Google Scholar
Otheguy, Ricardo and Zentella, Ana Celia, 2012. Spanish in New York: Language Contact, Dialect Leveling, and Structural Contiguity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Pawischitz, Sabine, 2009. Deutsche Lehnwörter in der burgenlandkroatischen Umgangssprache. In Scholze, Lenka and Wiemer, Björn (eds), Von Zuständen, Dynamik und Veränderung bei Pygmäen und Giganten: Festschrift für Walter Breu zu seinem 60. Geburtstag, pp. 331346. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Pedersen, Karen Margrethe, 2000. German as first language and minority second language in Denmark. In Hogan-Brun, Gabrielle (ed.), National Varieties of German outside Germany: A European Perspective, pp. 195220. Oxford: Lang.Google Scholar
Pedersen, Karen Margrethe, 2009. South Schleswig Danish: A border-regional minority language. In Lenz, , Gooskens, and Reker, (eds), pp. 297316.Google Scholar
Picoche, Jacqueline and Marchello-Nizia, Christiane, 1994. Histoire de la langue française. Paris: Nathan.Google Scholar
Polanska, Ineta, 2002. Zum Einfluss des Lettischen auf das Deutsche im Baltikum. Inaugural dissertation, Otto-Friedrich-Universität, Bamberg.Google Scholar
Polomé, Edgar C., 1972. Germanic and the other Indo-European languages. In Van Coetsem, Frans and Kufner, Herbert L. (eds), Toward a Grammar of Proto-Germanic, pp. 4369. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Poplack, Shana, 2008. Quebec English. Anglistik 19: 189200.Google Scholar
Putnam, Michael T. (ed.), 2011. Studies on German-Language Islands. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Raidt, Edith H., 1983. Einführung in Geschichte und Struktur des Afrikaans. Darmstadt: Wissenschaftliche Buchgesellschaft.Google Scholar
Rainsford, T. M., Guillot, Céline, Lavrentiev, Alexei and Prévost, Sophie, 2012. La zone préverbale en ancien français: apport des corpus annotés. In Neveu, Franck, Toke, Valelia Muni, Bluenthal, Peter et al. (eds), Congrès mondial de linguistique française, pp. 159176. www.shs-conferences.org/articles/shsconf/abs/2012/01/shsconf_cmlf12_000246/shsconf_cmlf12_000246.htmlGoogle Scholar
Reershemius, Gertrud, 2007. Reste des Westjiddischen in niederdeutschen Sprachgebiet. In Fandrych, Christian and Salverda, Reinier (eds), Standard, Variation und Sprachwandel in germanischen Sprachen, pp. 241264. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Roberge, Paul, 2010. Contact and the history of Germanic languages. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 406431. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Roca, Ana and Lipski, John M. (eds), 1993. Spanish in the United States: Linguistic Contact and Diversity. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Scheler, Manfred, 1977. Der englische Wortschatz. Berlin: Schmidt.Google Scholar
Scholze, Lenka, 2008. Das grammatische System der obersorbischen Umgangssprache im Sprachkontakt. Bautzen: Sorbisches Institut.Google Scholar
Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), 2013. English as a Contact Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schreier, Daniel, Trudgill, Peter, Schneider, Edgard W. and Williams, Jeffrey P. (eds), 2010. The Lesser-known Varieties of English: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Seip, Didrik Arup, 1931. Hvad norsk språk gav, og hvad det fikk i middelalderen. In Norge og Europa i middelalderen, pp. 88103. Oslo: Ashehaug.Google Scholar
Smith, Johannes J., 1952. Theories about the Origin of Afrikaans. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar
Smits, Ton F. H., 2009. Prinzipien der Dialektresistenz: Zur Bestimmung einer dialektalen Abbauhierarchie. In Lenz, , Gooskens, and Reker, (eds), pp. 297338.Google Scholar
Spence, N. C. W., 1984. Channel Island French. In Trudgill (ed.), pp. 345351.Google Scholar
Stenson, Nancy, 1993. English influence on Irish: The last 100 years. Journal of Celtic Linguistics 2: 107128.Google Scholar
Stolz, Thomas, 2006. All or nothing. In Matras, , McMahon, and Vincent, (eds), pp. 3250.Google Scholar
Talmy, Leonard, 1972. Yiddish verb prefixes between Germanic and Slavic. In Proceedings of the Eighth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 231250.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Townend, Matthew, 2012. Contacts and conflicts: Latin, Norse and French. In Mugglestone, Lynda (ed.), The Oxford History of English, updated edition, pp. 75105. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 1999. How Celtic is Standard English? St Petersburg: Russian Academy of Sciences.Google Scholar
Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 2002. Attrition of inflections in English and Welsh. In Filppula, , Klemola, and Pitkänen, (eds), pp. 111149.Google Scholar
Trubetzkoy, Nicolai S., 1930. Proposition 16. In Actes du premier congrès international des linguistes à la Haye, du 10–15 avril 1928, pp. 1718. Leiden: A.W. Sijthoff.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter (ed.), 1984. Languages in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
van Bree, Cor and Versloot, Arjen P. with Bremmer, Rolf H. Jr, 2008. Oorsprongen van het Stadsfries: With an extensive summary. Ljouwert: Fryske Akademy.Google Scholar
Van Coetsem, Frans, 1988. Loan Phonology and the Two Transfer Types in Language Contact. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan, 1998a. Phasal adverbials in the languages of Europe. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 25145.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan, 1998b. Conclusion. In van der Auwera, (ed.), pp. 813836.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan (ed.) with Ó Baoill, Dónall P. (ed.), 1998c. Adverbial Constructions in the Languages of Europe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan, 2011. Standard Average European. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 291306.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan and Genee, Inge, 2002. English do: On the convergence of languages and linguists. English Language and Linguistics 6: 283307.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan, Schalley, Ewa and Nuyts, Jan, 2005. Epistemic possibility in a Slavonic parallel corpus: A pilot study. In Hansen, Björn and Karlík, Petr (eds), Modality in Slavonic Languages, pp. 201217. Munich: Otto Sagner.Google Scholar
Van Ness, Silke, 1990. Changes in an Obsolescing Language: Pennsylvania German in West Virginia. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
van Rensburg, M. C. J., 1983. Nie-standaardvorme, variasiepatrone en Afrikaans uit de vorige eeu. In Claassen, G. N. and van Rensburg, M. C. J. (eds), Taalverskeidenheid: ’n Blik op die Spektrum van taalvariasie in Afrikaans, pp. 134161. Pretoria: Academica.Google Scholar
van Rensburg, Christo, 2012. So Kry Ons Afrikaans. Pretoria: Lapa.Google Scholar
Vennemann, Theo, gen. Nierfeld, 2003. Europa Vasconica – Europa Semitica, edited by Hanna, Patrizia Noel Aziz. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Vennemann, Theo, gen. Nierfeld, 2012. Germania Semitica, edited by Hanna, Patrizia Noel Aziz. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
von Wartburg, Walther, 1946. Problèmes et méthodes de la linguistique. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar
von Wartburg, Walther, 1967. La fragmentation linguistique de la Romania. Paris: Klincksieck. Translation of 1950, Die Ausgliederung der Romanischen Sprachräume, Bern: Francke.Google Scholar
Wälchli, Bernhard, 2011. The Circum-Baltic languages. In Kortmann, and van der Auwera, (eds), pp. 325340.Google Scholar
Walker, Alistair H., 2001. Extent and position of North Frisian. In Munske, (ed.), pp. 263284.Google Scholar
Walter, Henriette, 1994. L’Aventure des langues en Occident: Leur origine, leur histoire, leur géographie. Paris: Laffont.Google Scholar
Weerman, Fred, 2006. It’s the economy, stupid! Een vergelijkende blik op men en man. In Hüning, Matthias, Vogel, Ulrike, van der Wouden, Ton and Verhagen, Arie (eds), Nederlands tussen Duits en Engels, pp. 1947. Leiden: Stichting Neerlandistiek Leiden.Google Scholar
Wehr, Barbara, 2001. Ein west-atlantischer Sprachbund: Irish, Französisch, Portugiesisch. In Eichner, Heiner, Mumm, Peter-Arnold, Panagl, Oswald and Winkler, Eberhard (eds), Fremd und Eigen: Untersuchungen zu Grammatik und Wortschatz des Uralischen und Indogermanischen in memoriam Hartmut Katz, pp. 253278. Vienna: Edition Praesens.Google Scholar
Weinreich, Uriel, 1958a. Yiddish and colonial German in Eastern Europe: The differential impact of Slavic. In American Contributions to the Fourth International Congress of Slavicists, Moscow, September 1958, pp. 369421. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Weinreich, U., 1958b. On the compatibility of genetic relationship and convergent development. Word 14: 374379.Google Scholar
Wessén, Elias, 1929. Om det tyska inflytandet på svenskt språk under medeltiden. Nordisk tidskrift för vetenskap, konst och industri utgiven af Letterstedtska föreningen 5: 265280.Google Scholar
Wexler, Paul, 2002. Two-tiered Relexification in Yiddish. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
White, David L., 2002. Explaining the innovations of Middle English: What, where and why. In Filppula, , Klemola, and Pitkänen, (eds), pp. 153174.Google Scholar
Wiik, Kalevi, 1997. The Uralic and Finno-Ugric phonetic substratum in Proto-Germanic. Linguistica Uralica 33: 258280.Google Scholar
Wogan-Browne, Jocelyn with Collette, Carolyn, Kowalski, Maryanne, Mooney, Linne, Putter, Ann and Trotter, David (eds), 2009. Language and Culture in Medieval Britain: The French of England c. 1100 – c. 1500. Woodbridge, UK: York Medieval Press and Boydell Press.Google Scholar
Worren, Dagfinn, 2004. Interscandinavian language contact II: Linguistic influence. In Bandle, et al. (eds), vol. 2, pp. 20322048.Google Scholar

References

Adger, David, 2010. Gaelic syntax. In Watson, Moray and Macleod, Michelle (eds), The Edinburgh Companion to the Gaelic Language, pp. 304351. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Ahlqvist, Anders, 2010. Early Celtic and English. Australian Celtic Journal 9: 4373.Google Scholar
Aitken, A. J., 1981. The Scottish vowel-length rule. In Benskin, Michael and Samuels, Michael (eds), So Meny People, Longages and Tonges: Philological Essays in Scots and Medieval English Presented to Angus McIntosh, pp. 131157. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2002. Negation in Non-standard British English: Gaps, Regularizations and Asymmetries. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2009. The Morphology of English Dialects: Verb-formation in Non-standard English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan and Genee, Inge, 2002. English do: On the convergence of languages and linguists. English Language and Linguistics 6: 283307.Google Scholar
Beal, Joan C., 1993. The grammar of Tyneside and Northumbrian English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 187213.Google Scholar
Beal, Joan C., 2008. English dialects in the North of England: Phonology. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 122144.Google Scholar
Bliss, Alan J., 1972. Languages in contact: Some problems of Hiberno-English. Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy, Section C, 72: 6382.Google Scholar
Braaten, Björn, 1967. Notes on continuous tenses in English. Norsk Tidskrift for Sprogvidenskap 21: 167180.Google Scholar
Britain, David, 2012. English in England. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 2352.Google Scholar
Buchstaller, Isabelle, Corrigan, Karen, Holmberg, Anders, Honeybone, Patrick and Maguire, Warren, 2013. T-to-R and the Northern Subject Rule: Questionnaire-based spatial, social and structural linguistics. English Language and Linguistics 17 (1): 85128.Google Scholar
Burchfield, Robert W., 1994a. Introduction. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 119.Google Scholar
Burchfield, Robert W. (ed.), 1994b. English in Britain and Overseas: Origins and Development. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 5. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Butters, Ronald R., 2001. Grammatical structure. In Algeo, John (ed.), English in North America, pp. 325339. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 6. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Campbell, Alistair, 1959. Old English Grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Chadwick, Nora, 1963. The British or Celtic part in the population of England. In Angles and Britons (The O’Donnell Lectures), pp. 111147. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar
Claridge, Claudia and Kytö, Merja, 2010. Non-standard language in earlier English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Varieties of English in Writing: The Written Word as Linguistic Evidence, pp. 1542. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Clarke, Sandra, 2004. The legacy of British and Irish English in Newfoundland. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Legacies of Colonial English: Studies in Transported Dialects, pp. 242261. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dal, Ingerid, 1952. Zur Entstehung des Englischen Participium Praesentis auf -ing. Norsk Tidskrift for Sprogvidenskap 16: 5116.Google Scholar
Davies, Norman, 1999. The Isles: A History. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Denison, David, 1985. The origins of periphrastic do: Ellegård and Visser reconsidered. In Eaton, Roger et al. (eds), Papers from the 4th International Conference of English Historical Linguistics, pp. 4460. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dobson, E. J., 1968. English Pronunciation 1500–1700, vol. 1: Survey of the Sources, vol. 2: Phonology, second edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Edwards, Viv, 1993. The grammar of Southern British English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 214238.Google Scholar
Ekwall, Eilert, 1975. A History of Modern English Sounds and Morphology, translated by Ward, A.. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Ellegård, Alvar, 1953. The Auxiliary Do: The Establishment and Regulation of its Use in English. Gothenburg Studies in English, vol. 2. Stockholm: Almqvist and Wiksell.Google Scholar
Evans, D. Simon, 1976. A Grammar of Middle Welsh. Dublin: Dublin Institute for Advanced Studies.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, 1997. Cross-dialectal parallels and language contacts: Evidence from Celtic Englishes. In Hickey, Raymond and Puppel, Stanisław (eds), Language History and Linguistic Modelling: A Festschrift for Jacek Fisiak on his 60th Birthday, pp. 943957. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, 1999. The Grammar of Irish English: Language in Hibernian Style. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani (eds), 2009. Re-evaluating the Celtic Hypothesis. Special issue of English Language and Linguistics 13 (2).Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani, 2012. Celtic and Celtic Englishes. In Bergs, Alexander and Brinton, Laurel (eds), English Historical Linguistics: An International Handbook, pp. 16871703. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Paulasto, Heli, 2008. English and Celtic in Contact. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Foulkes, Paul and Docherty, Gerry (eds), 1999. Urban voices: Overview. In Foulkes, Paul and Docherty, Gerry (eds), Urban Voices, pp. 124. London: Edward Arnold.Google Scholar
Garrett, Andrew, 1998. On the origin of auxiliary do. English Language and Linguistics 2: 283330.Google Scholar
Genee, Inge, 2005. Latin influence on Old Irish? Contact linguistics and the study of medieval language contact. Journal of Celtic Linguistics 9: 3372.Google Scholar
Goose, Nigel et al. (eds), 2005. Immigrants in Tudor and Early Stuart England. Brighton: Sussex Academic Press.Google Scholar
Harris, John, 1984. English in the North of Ireland. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 115134.Google Scholar
Harris, John, 1993. The grammar of Irish English. In Milroy, and Milroy, (eds), pp. 139186.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 1999. External possession in a European areal perspective. In Wayne, Doris and Barshi, Immanuel (eds), External Possession, pp. 109135. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hernández, Nuria, Kolbe, Daniela and Schulz, Monika Edith, 2011. A Comparative Grammar of British English Dialects, vol. 2: Modals, Pronouns and Complement Clauses. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 1984a. On the nature of labial velar shift. Journal of Phonetics 12: 345354.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 1984b. Syllable onsets in Irish English. Word 35: 6774.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 1995. Early contact and parallels between English and Celtic. Vienna English Working Papers 4 (2): 87119.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 1997. Arguments for creolisation in Irish English. In Hickey, Raymond and Puppel, Stanisław (eds), Language History and Linguistic Modelling: A Festschrift for Jacek Fisiak on his 60th Birthday, pp. 9691038. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2003. Rectifying a standard deficiency: Pronominal distinctions in varieties of English. In Taavitsainen, Irma and Jucker, Andreas H. (eds), Diachronic Perspectives on Address Term Systems, pp. 345374. Pragmatics and Beyond, New Series, vol. 107. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2004. A Sound Atlas of Irish English. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2005. Dublin English: Evolution and Change. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2007. Irish English: History and Present-day Forms. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2008. Feature loss in 19th century Irish English. In Nevalainen, Terttu, Taavitsainen, Irma, Pahta, Päivi and Korhonen, Minna (eds), The Dynamics of Linguistic Variation: Corpus Evidence on English Past and Present, pp. 229243. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2009. Weak segments in Irish English. In Minkova, Donka (ed.), Phonological Weakness in English: From Old to Present-day English, pp. 116129. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Attitudes and concerns in eighteenth-century English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Eighteenth-century English: Ideology and Change, pp. 120. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2011. The Dialects of Irish, Study of a Changing Landscape. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012a. English in Ireland. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 79107. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 401421. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012c. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012d. Assessing the role of contact in the history of English. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 485496. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012e. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012f. Standards of English: Codified Varieties around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2013a. Supraregionalisation and dissociation. In Chambers, J. K. and Schilling, Natalie (eds), The Handbook of Language Variation and Change, second edition, pp. 537554. Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2013b. English as a contact language in Ireland and Scotland. In Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), English as a Contact Language, pp. 88105. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2014. A Dictionary of Varieties of English. Malden, MA: Wiley- Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2015. The North of England and Northern English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Researching Northern English, pp. 124. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Holthausen, Friedrich, 1974. Altenglisches etymologisches Wörterbuch, second edition. Heidelberg: Winter.Google Scholar
Honeybone, Patrick, 2007. New-dialect formation in nineteenth century Liverpool: A brief history of Scouse. In Grant, Anthony and Grey, Clive (eds), The Mersey Sound: Liverpool’s Language, People and Places, pp. 106140. Liverpool: Open House Press.Google Scholar
Ihalainen, Ossi, 1994. The dialects of England since 1776. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 197274.Google Scholar
Jespersen, Otto, 1940 [1909]. A Modern English Grammar on Historical Principles. 6 vols. Copenhagen: Munksgaard.Google Scholar
Jones, Mark J., 2002. The origin of Definite Article Reduction in northern English dialects: Evidence from dialect allomorphy. English Language and Linguistics 6: 325345.Google Scholar
Jones, Morris and Thomas, Alan R., 1977. The Welsh Language: Studies in its Syntax and Semantics. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar
Keller, Wolfgang, 1925. Keltisches im englischen Verbum. In Anglica: Untersuchungen zur englischen Philologie, vol. 1: Sprache und Kulturgeschichte. Leipzig: Mayer und Müller, pp. 5566.Google Scholar
King, Gareth, 1993. Modern Welsh: A comprehensive grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Klemola, Juhani, 2000. The origins of the Northern Subject Rule: A case of early contact? In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes II, pp. 329346. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.Google Scholar
Klemola, Juhani, 2002. Periphrastic DO: Dialectal distributions and origins. In Filppula, Markku, Klemola, Juhani and Pitkänen, Heli (eds), The Celtic Roots of English, pp. 199210. Joensuu: University of Joensuu: Faculty of Humanities.Google Scholar
Klemola, Juhani, 2013. English as a contact language in the British Isles. In Schreier, Daniel and Hundt, Marianne (eds), English as a Contact Language, pp. 7587. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Klemola, Juhani and Filppula, Markku, 1992. Subordinating uses of ‘and’ in the history of English. In Rissaneni, Matti, Ihalainen, Ossi and Taavitsainen, Irma (eds), History of Englishes: New Methods and Interpretations in Historical Linguistics, pp. 310318. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin (eds), 2012. The Mouton Atlas of Variation in English. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd, Herrmann, Tanja, Pietsch, Lukas and Wagner, Susanne, 2005. A Comparative Grammar of British English Dialects, vol. 1: Agreement, Gender, Relative Clauses. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and Upton, Clive (eds), 2008. Varieties of English, vol. 1: The British Isles. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Lass, Roger, 1987. The Shape of English: Structure and History. London: Dent.Google Scholar
Leech, Geoffrey, Hundt, Marianne, Mair, Christian and Smith, Nicholas, 2009. Change in Contemporary English: A Grammatical Study. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lutz, Angelika, 2009. Celtic influence on Old English and West Germanic. In Filppula, and Klemola, (eds), pp. 227249.Google Scholar
Maguire, Warren, 2012. English and Scots in Scotland. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 5377.Google Scholar
Matasović, Ratko, 2007. Insular Celtic as a language area. In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Languages in Contact, pp. 93112. Potsdam: Potsdam University Press.Google Scholar
McClure, J. Derrick, 1994. English in Scotland. In Burchfield, (ed.), pp. 2393.Google Scholar
McWhorter, John H., 2009. What else happened to English? A brief for the Celtic hypothesis. In Filppula, and Klemola, (eds), pp. 163191.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 1992. English in Language Shift: The History, Structure and Sociolinguistics of South African Indian English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Milroy, James and Milroy, Lesley (eds), 1993. Real English: The Grammar of the English Dialects in the British Isles. London: Longman.Google Scholar
Mitchell, Bruce and Robinson, Fred, 2007. A Guide to Old English, seventh edition. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Mittendorf, Ingo and Poppe, Erich, 2000. Celtic contacts of the English progressive? In Tristram, Hildegard L. C. (ed.), The Celtic Englishes II, pp. 117145. Heidelberg: Carl Winter.Google Scholar
Montgomery, Michael, 2001. British and Irish antecedents. In Algeo, John (ed.), English in North America, pp. 86153. The Cambridge History of the English Language, vol. 6. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Montgomery, Michael and Gregg, Robert, 1997. The Scots language in Ulster. In Jones, Charles (ed.), The Edinburgh History of the Scots Language, pp. 569622. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Mossé, Ferdinand, 1938. Histoire de la Forme Périphrastique Être + Participe Présent en Germanique, part 2: Moyen-Anglais et Anglais Moderne. Paris: Librairie C. Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Penhallurick, Robert, 2008a. Welsh English: Phonology. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 105121.Google Scholar
Penhallurick, Robert, 2008b. Welsh English: Morphology and syntax. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 360372.Google Scholar
Poplack, Shana and Tagliamonte, Sali, 2001. African American English in the Diaspora. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Poussa, Patricia, 1990. A contact-universals origin for periphrastic do, with special consideration of OE–Celtic contact. In Adamson, Sylvia, Law, Vivien, Vincent, Nigel and Wright, Susan (eds), Papers from the Fifth International Conference on English Historical Linguistics, pp. 407434. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Preußler, Walter, 1938. Keltischer Einfluß im Englischen. Indogermanische Forschungen 56: 178191.Google Scholar
Raumolin-Brunberg, Helena, 2005. The diffusion of subject YOU: A case study in historical sociolinguistics. Language Variation and Change 17: 5573.Google Scholar
Rockel, Martin, 1989. Grundzüge einer Geschichte der irischen Sprache [Outline of a History of the Irish Language]. Vienna: Verlag der Österreichischen Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Rosenthal, Bernard et al. (eds), 2009. Records of the Salem Witch-Hunt. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Rupp, Laura and Page-Verhoeff, Hanne, 2005. Pragmatic and historical aspects of Definite Article Reduction in northern English dialects. English World-Wide 26 (3): 325346.Google Scholar
Sabban, Annette, 1982. Gälisch–Englischer Sprachkontakt [Gaelic–English Language Contact]. Heidelberg: Groos.Google Scholar
Sabban, Annette, 1985. On the variability of Hebridean English syntax: The verbal group. In Görlach, Manfred (ed.), Focus on Scotland, pp. 125144. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Schreier, Daniel, 2005. Consonant Change in English Worldwide: Synchrony Meets Diachrony. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Shuken, Cynthia, 1984. Highland and Island English. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 152166.Google Scholar
Singler, John (ed.), 1990. Pidgin and Creole Tense-Mood-Aspect Systems. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt, 2012. Typological profile: L1 varieties. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 827842.Google Scholar
Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt and Kortmann, Bernd, 2008. Vernacular universals and Angloversals in a typological perspective. In Filppula, Markku and Klemola, Juhani (eds), Vernacular Universals and Language Contacts, pp. 3353. New York and London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Thomas, Erik, 2008. Rural southern white accents. In Schneider, Edgar W. (eds), Varieties of English, vol. 2: The Americas and the Caribbean, pp. 87114. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Tolkien, John R. R., 1963. English and Welsh. In Angles and Britons (The O’Donnell Lectures), pp. 141. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar
Tristram, Hildegard L. C., 1997. Do-periphrasis in contact? In Ramisch, Heinrich and Wynne, Kenneth J. (eds), Language in Time and Space: Studies in Honour of Wolfgang Viereck on the Occasion of his 60th Birthday, pp. 401417. Stuttgart: Franz Steiner.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter (ed.), 1984. Language in the British Isles. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 1998. Third-person singular zero: African American Vernacular English, East Anglian dialects and Spanish persecution in the Low Countries. Folia Linguistica Historica 18 (1/2): 139148.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2002. Sociolinguistic Variation and Change. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2008. The dialect of East Anglia. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 178193.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2009. Sociolinguistic typology and complexification. In Sampson, Geoffrey, Gil, David and Trudgill, Peter (eds), Language Complexity as an Evolving Variable, pp. 98109. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2010. What really happened to Old English? In Trudgill, Peter, Investigations in Sociohistorical Linguistics: Stories of Colonisation and Contact, pp. 135. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Upton, Clive and Widdowson, John D. A., 2006. An Atlas of English Dialects, second edition. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Vennemann, Theo, 2002. On the rise of ‘Celtic’ syntax in Middle English. In Lucas, Peter and Lucas, Angela (eds), From Tongue to Text: Papers from the Third International Conference on Middle English: University College Dublin, 1–4 July 1999, pp. 203234. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Visser, Federicus T., 1963–1973. An Historical Syntax of the English Language, four volumes. Leiden: E. J. Brill.Google Scholar
Wagner, Heinrich, 1959. Das Verbum in den Sprachen der britischen Inseln [The Verb in the Languages of the British Isles]. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Wagner, Susanne, 2008. English dialects in the South-West: Morphology and syntax. In Kortmann, and Upton, (eds), pp. 417439.Google Scholar
Wagner, Susanne, 2012. Pronominal systems. In Hickey, (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 379408.Google Scholar
Wakelin, Martyn, 1984. Rural dialects in England. In Trudgill, (ed.), pp. 7093.Google Scholar
Wakelin, Martyn, 1986. The Southwest of England. Varieties of English Around the World, Text Series, vol. 5. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Wakelin, Martyn, 1988. The phonology of South-Western English 1500–1700. In Fisiak, Jacek (ed.), Historical Dialectology: Regional and Social, pp. 609644. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Watson, Kevin and Clark, Lynn, 2016. The origins of Liverpool English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Listening to the Past: Audio Records of Accents of English, pp. 113141. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Williams, Stephen, 1980. A Welsh Grammar. Cardiff: University of Wales Press.Google Scholar
Winford, Donald, 2005. Contact-induced changes: Classification and processes. Diachronica 22 (2): 373427.Google Scholar

References

Anderwald, Lieselotte, 2012. Negation in varieties of English. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 299328.Google Scholar
Brato, Thorsten and Huber, Magnus, 2012. Areal features of English in Africa. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 161185.Google Scholar
Eberle, Nicole and Schreier, Daniel, 2013. African Bermudian English and the Caribbean connection. English World-Wide 34: 279304.Google Scholar
Faraclas, Nicholas, 2012. Nigerian Pidgin. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 407432.Google Scholar
Hackert, Stephanie, 2012. The Caribbean. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 704732.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012a. Introduction: Areal features of the anglophone world. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 119.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond (ed.), 2012b. Areal Features of the Anglophone World. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Huber, Magnus, 2012. Africa. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 806823.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd, 2012. The British Isles. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 679702.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd, 2013. How powerful is geography as an explanatory factor of variation? Areal features in the Anglophone world. In Auer, Peter, Hilpert, Martin, Stukenbrock, Anja and Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt (eds), Space in Language and Linguistics: Geographical, Interactional, and Cognitive Perspectives, pp. 165194. Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin (eds), 2012a. The Mouton World Atlas of Variation in English. Berlin and Boston: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and Lunkenheimer, Kerstin, 2012b. Introduction. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 111.Google Scholar
Kortmann, Bernd and Wolk, Christoph, 2012. Morphosyntactic variation in the anglophone world: A global perspective. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 906936.Google Scholar
Lunkenheimer, Kerstin, 2012. Tense and aspect. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 329353.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2012. Asia. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 784805.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend and Bhatt, Rakesh M., 2008. World Englishes: The Study of New Linguistic Varieties. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Montgomery, Michael B., 2008. Appalachian English: Morphology and syntax. In Schneider, Edgar (ed.), Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 2: The Americas and the Caribbean, pp. 428467. Berlin and Boston: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Schneider, Edgar, 2007. Postcolonial English: Varieties around the World. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Schneider, Edgar W., 2012. North America. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 734762.Google Scholar
Siegel, Jeff, 2012. Australia Pacific region. In Kortmann, and Lunkenheimer, (eds), pp. 764782.Google Scholar
Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt, 2013. Grammatical Variation in British English Dialects: A Study in Corpus-Based Dialectometry. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Wagner, Susanne, 2012. Pronominal systems. In Hickey, (ed.), pp. 379408.Google Scholar
Wolk, Christoph, 2013. Integrating Aggregational and Probabilistic Approaches to Dialectology and Language Variation. PhD thesis, University of Freiburg, Germany.Google Scholar

References

Abondolo, Daniel (ed.), 1997a. The Uralic Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Abondolo, Daniel, 1997b. Introduction. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 142.Google Scholar
Alexiou, Margaret, 2002. After Antiquity: Greek Language, Myth, and Metaphor. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar
Andersen, Henning, 1996. Reconstructing Prehistorical Dialects: Initial Vowels in Slavic and Baltic. Trends in Linguistics, vol. 91. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Anthony, David, 1990. Migration in archeology: The baby and the bathwater. American Anthropologist 92: 895914.Google Scholar
Barford, P. M., 2001. The Early Slavs: Culture and Society in Early Medieval Eastern Europe. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University Press.Google Scholar
Baxter, William H., 1992. A Handbook of Old Chinese Phonology. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Berger, Tilman, 2014. The convergence of Czech and German between the years 900 and 1500. In Besters-Dilger, et al. (eds), pp. 189198.Google Scholar
Besters-Dilger, Juliane, Dermarkar, Cynthia, Pfänder, Stefan and Rabus, Achim (eds), 2014. Congruence in Contact-induced Language Change: Language Families, Typological Resemblance, and Perceived Similarity. Freiburg Institute for Advanced Studies, School of Language and Literature, Linguae & Litterae, vol. 27. Berlin and Boston: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bickell, Balthasar and Nichols, Johanna, 2006. Oceania, the Pacific Rim, and the theory of linguistic areas. In Proceedings of the Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, vol. 32. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
de Boel, Gunnar, 2008. The genesis of clitic doubling from Ancient to Medieval Greek. In Kallulli, and Tasmowski, (eds), pp. 89103.Google Scholar
Brüske, Wolfgang, 1955. Untersuchungen zur Geschichte des Lutizenbundes: Deutsch-wendische Beziehungen des 10.–12. Jahrhunderts. Mitteldeutsche Forschungen, vol. 3. Münster: Böhlau.Google Scholar
Butt, John and Benjamin, Carmen, 2004. A New Reference Grammar of Modern Spanish, fourth edition. New York: McGraw Hill.Google Scholar
Curta, Florin, 2011. The Edinburgh History of the Greeks, c. 500 to 1050: the Early Middle Ages. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 2001. The origin of the Scandinavian languages. In Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), The Circum-Baltic Languages, vol. 1: Past and Present: Typology and Contact, pp. 215236. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Damme, Robert, 1987. Westslavische Reliktwörter in Stralsunder Vokabular. In Ureland, P. Sture (ed.), Sprachkontakt in der Hanse: Aspekte des Sprachausgleichs im Ostsee- und Nordseeraum. Akten der 7. Internationalen Symposions über Sprachkontakt in Europa, Lübeck 1986, pp. 163178. Tübingen: Niemeyer.Google Scholar
Eliot, C. N. E., 1890. A Finnish Grammar. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Emeneau, M. B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 316.Google Scholar
Endzelin, J., 1901. Ursprung und Gebrauch des lettischen Debitivs. Beiträge zur Kunde der indogermanischen Sprachen (Bezzenbergers Beiträge) 26: 6674.Google Scholar
Feldbrugge, F. J. M., 2009. Law in Medieval Russia. Leiden and Boston: M. Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Friedman, Victor, 2008. Balkan object reduplication in areal and dialectological perspective. In Kallulli, and Tasmowski, (eds), pp. 3364.Google Scholar
Gebauer, Jan, 1929. Historická mluvnice českého jazyka, vol. 4: Skladba [Historical Grammar of Czech: Syntax]. Prague: Česká Akademie Vĕd a Umĕní.Google Scholar
Gimbutas, Marija, 1971. The Slavs. New York: Praeger.Google Scholar
Gippius, A. A., 1996. ‘Russkaja Pravda’ i ‘Voprošanie Kirika’ v Novgorodskoj Kormčej 1282 g. (k xarakteristike jazykovoj situacii drevnego Novgoroda) [‘Russian Law Code’ and ‘Kirik’s Questions’ in the Novgorod Nomocanon of 1282 (toward a characterization of the language situation of Old Novgorod)]. Slavjanovedenie 1996.1: 4862.Google Scholar
Hill, Jane, 2001. Languages on the ground: Toward an anthropological dialectology. In Terrell, John Edward (ed.), Archeology, Language, and History: Essays on Culture and Ethnicity, pp. 257282. Westport, CT and London: Bergin & Garvey.Google Scholar
Hopper, Paul and Thompson, Sandra A., 1980. Transitivity in grammar and discourse. Language 56 (2): 251299.Google Scholar
Jablonskis, Jonas, 1922. Lietuvių kalbos gramatika. Etimologija: Vidurinėms mokslo įstaigoms [Grammar of Lithuanian Etymology: For Institutions of Secondary Education], second edition. Kaunas: Švyturio bendrovės leidinys.Google Scholar
Jakobson, Roman, 1931. K xarakteristike evrazijskogo jazykovogo sojuza [Toward the Characterization of the Eurasian Linguistic Area]. Paris: Izd. Evraziitsev. Reprinted in 1962, Selected Writings, vol. 1: Phonological Studies, pp. 144201, The Hague and Paris: Mouton.Google Scholar
Johansen, Paul and von zur Mühlen, Heinz, 1973. Deutsch und Undeutsch im mittelalterlichen und frühneuzeitlichen Reval. Ostmitteleuropa in Vergangenheit und Gegenwart, vol. 15. Köln: Böhlau, 1973.Google Scholar
Joseph, Brian D., 1983. The Synchrony and Diachrony of the Balkan Infinitive: A Study in Areal, General, and Historical Linguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Joseph, Brian D., 2010. Language contact in the Balkans. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 619633. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Kallulli, Dalina and Tasmowski, Liliane, 2008. Clitic Doubling in the Balkan Languages. Linguistik aktuell, vol. 130. Amsterdam; Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kantzow, Thomas, 1816. Pomerania, oder, Ursprunck, Altheit und Geschicht der Völcker und Lande Pomern, Cassuben, Wenden, Stettin, Rhügen in vierzehn Büchern, edited by Rosengarten, Hans Gottfried Ludwig, vol. 1. Greifswald: Mauritins.Google Scholar
Koškins, Igors, 1996. Deutsches Lehngut in den altrussischen Novgoroder Urkunden. In Brandt, Gisela (ed.), Beiträge zur Geschichte der deutschen Sprache im Baltikum, pp. 8798. Stuttgart: Hans Dieter Heinz.Google Scholar
Kuz´mina, I. B. and Nemčenko, E. V., 1971. Sintaksis pričastnyx form v russkix govorax [The Syntax of Participial Forms in Russian Dialects]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar
Laca, Brenda, 2006. El objeto directo: La marcación preposicional [The direct object: Prepositional marking]. In Company, Concepción Company (ed.), Sintaxis histórica de la lengua española, part 1: La frase verbal [Historical Syntax of Spanish: The Verb Phrase], pp. 423478. México: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México.Google Scholar
Lorentz, Friedrich, 1903. Slovinzische Grammatik. St Petersburg: Vtoroe Otdelenie Imperatorskoj Akademii Nauk.Google Scholar
Lübben, August, 1888. Mittelniederdeutsches Handwörterbuch. Nach dem Tode des Verfassers vollendet von Christoph Walther. Norden: D. Soltau.Google Scholar
McAnallen, Julia, 2011. The History of Predicative Possession in Slavic: Internal Development vs. Language Contact. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Merrill, Jessica, 2012. The Role of Folklore Study in the Rise of Russian Formalist and Czech Structuralist Literary Theory. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Obolensky, Dimitri, 1971. The Byzantine Commonwealth: Eastern Europe, 500–1453. New York: Praeger.Google Scholar
Orzechowska, Hanna, 1973. Podwajanie dopełnień w historii bułgarskiego języka literackiego [Object doubling in the history of the Bulgarian literary language]. Warsaw: Państwowe Wydawnictwo Naukowe.Google Scholar
Otsmaa, Lilia, 1975. O russkix zaimstvovanijax v baltijskom nižnenemeckom jazyke [On Russian borrowings in Baltic Low German]. Linguistica 6: 86113.Google Scholar
Schick, Ivanka, 2000. Clitic doubling constructions in Balkan–Slavic languages. In Beukema, Frits and den Dikken, Marcel (eds), Clitic Phenomena in European Languages, pp. 259292. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Stoianovich, Traian, 1960. The conquering Balkan Orthodox merchant. The Journal of Economic History 20: 234313.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, Tsendina, Anna, Karlsson, Anastasia and Franzén, Vivan, 2005. The Phonology of Mongolian. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Timberlake, Alan, 1974. The Nominative Object in Slavic, Baltic, and West Finnic. Munich: Otto Sagner.Google Scholar
Tomić, Olga, 2004. The Balkan Sprachbund: Introduction. In Tomić, Olga (ed.), Balkan Syntax and Semantics, pp. 155. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Toporov, V. N. and Trubačev, O. N., 1962. Lingvističeskij analiz gidronimov Verxnego Podneprov´ja [Linguistic Analysis of Hydronyms of the Upper Dnepr Region]. Moscow: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar
Vasmer, Max, 1941. Die Slaven in Griechenland. Berlin: Akademie der Wissenschaften.Google Scholar
Văžarova, Živka N., 1965. Slavjanski i slavjanobălgarski selišta v bălgarskite zemi VI–XI vek [Slavic and Slavobulgarian Settlements on Bulgarian Territory from the Sixth through the Eleventh Century]. Sofia: Bălgarska Akademija na Naukite.Google Scholar
Veenker, Wolfgang, 1967. Die Frage des finnougrischen Substrats in der russischen Sprache. Indiana University Publications, Uralic and Altaic Series, vol. 82. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Viitso, Tiit-Rein, 1997. Estonian. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 115148.Google Scholar
VoprKir, 1888. Voprosy Kirika, Savvy i Il´i, s otvetami Nifonta, episkopa Novgorodskogo, i drugix ierarxičeskix lic, no. 2: Pamjatniki drevne-russkogo kanoničeskogo prava, pt. 1. Russkaja istoričeskaja biblioteka, izdavaemaja Arxeografičeskoj Kommissiej, vol. 6. [The Questions of Kirik, Savva, and Ilja, with Answers of Nifont, Bishop of Novgorod, and of Other Clerics. Monuments of Old Russian Canon Law. Russian Historical Library, published by the Archaeographic Commission]. St Petersburg.Google Scholar
Vryonis, Spiros, 1981. The evolution of Slavic society and the Slavic invasions in Greece: The first major Slavic attack on Thessaloniki, A.D. 597. Hesperia 50: 378390.Google Scholar
Wiemer, Björn, Seržant, Ilja and Erker, Aksana, 2014. Convergence in the Baltic–Slavic contact zone: Triangulation approach. In Besters-Dilger, et al. (eds), pp. 1542.Google Scholar
Willis, David, 2013. Negation in the history of the Slavonic languages. In Willis, David, Lucas, Christopher and Breitbarth, Anne (eds), The History of Negation in the Languages of Europe and the Mediterranean, vol. 1: Case Studies, pp. 341398. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Witte, Hans, 1906. Wendische Zu- und Familiennamen aus mecklenburgischen Urkunden und Akten gesammelt und mit Unterstützung des Herrn Prof. Dr. Ernst Mucke zu Freiberg (Sachsen) bearbeitet. Mecklenburgischer Jahrbücher, Verein für Mecklenburgische Geschichte und Altertumskunde 71: 153290.Google Scholar
Zaicz, Gábor, 1997. Mordva. In Abondolo, (ed.), pp. 184218.Google Scholar
Zaliznjak, Andrej A., 2004. Drevnenovgorodskij dialekt, 2-e izd., pererabotannoe s učetom materiala naxodok 1995–2003 gg. [Old Novgorod Dialect, second edition, revised with consideration of finds 1995–2003]. Moscow: Jazyki russkoj kul′tury.Google Scholar

References

Aikhenvald, Alexandra and Dixon, Robert M. W., 2001. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Alekseev, Mikhail E., 1994a. Budukh. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 259296.Google Scholar
Alekseev, Mikhail E., 1994b. Rutul. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 213258.Google Scholar
Alekseev, Mikhail E., Klimov, Georgij A., Starostin, Sergei A. and Testelets, Yakov G. (eds), 1999. Jazyki Mira: Kavkazskie Jazyki [Languages of the World: Caucasian Languages]. Moscow: Academia.Google Scholar
Alekseev, Mikhail E. and Radjabov, Ramazan, 2004. Tsez. In Job, (ed.), pp. 115163.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory, 1997. Lak phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 973997.Google Scholar
Authier, Gilles, 2012. Grammaire juhuri, ou judeo-tat, langue iranienne des Juifs du Caucase de l’est. Beiträge zur Iranistik, vol. 36. Wiesbaden: Reichert.Google Scholar
Babel, Molly E., 2009. Phonetic and Social Selectivity in Speech Accommodation. PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Balanovsky, Oleg, et al. and The Genographic Consortium, 2011. Parallel evolution of genes and languages in the Caucasus region. Molecular Biology and Evolution 28 (10): 29052920.Google Scholar
Baudouin de Courtenay, Jan Ignacy Niecisław, 1963. Izbrannyye trudy po obshchemu yazykoznaniyu [Selected Works on General Linguistics], vol. 2. Moscow: Izdatel’stvo Akademii Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar
van den Berg, Helma, 1995. A Grammar of Hunzib. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
van den Berg, Helma, 2005. The East Caucasian language family. Lingua 115 (1): 147190.Google Scholar
Berta, Árpád, 1998. West Kipchak languages. In Johanson, and Csató, (eds), pp. 301317.Google Scholar
Bickel, Baltasar, 2008. A general method for the statistical evaluation of typological distributions. Manuscript, University of Leipzig. www.uni-leipzig.de/~bickel/research/projects/publ.htmlGoogle Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 2004. Dialectology and typology: An integrative perspective. In Kortmann, Bernd (ed.), Dialectology Meets Typology: Dialect Grammar from a Cross-linguistic Perspective, pp. 1146. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Bläsing, Uwe, 2003. Kalmuck. In Janhunen, Juha (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, pp. 229247. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Blevins, Juliette, 2006. A theoretical synopsis of Evolutionary Phonology. Theoretical Linguistics 32 (2): 117166.Google Scholar
Blevins, Juliette and Wedel, Andrew, 2009. Inhibited sound change: An evolutionary approach to lexical competition. Diachronica 26 (2): 143183.Google Scholar
Boeder, Winfried, 2005. The South Caucasian languages. Lingua 115 (1): 589.Google Scholar
Brown, Cecil, Holman, Eric and Wichmann, Søren, 2013. Sound correspondences in the world’s languages. Language 89 (1): 429.Google Scholar
Bybee, Joan, 2003. Word frequency and context of use in the lexical diffusion of phonetically conditioned sound change. Language Variation and Change 14 (3): 261290.Google Scholar
Catford, John C., 1977. Mountain of tongues: The languages of the Caucasus. Annual Review of Anthropology, 6: 283314.Google Scholar
Catford, John C., 1983. Pharyngeal and laryngeal sounds in Caucasian languages. In Bless, Diane and Abbs, James (eds), Vocal Fold Physiology: Contemporary Research and Clinical Issues, pp. 344350. San Diego: College-Hill.Google Scholar
Catford, John C., 1992. Caucasian phonetics and general phonetics. In Paris, Catherine (ed.), Caucasologie et mythologie comparée: Actes du Colloque International CNRS IVe Colloque de Caucasologie, pp. 193216, Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar
Catford, John C., 1994. Vowel systems of Caucasian languages. In Aronson, Howard Isaac (ed.), Non-Slavic Languages of the USSR: Papers from the Fourth Conference, pp. 4460. Bloomington, IN: Slavica Publishers.Google Scholar
C’ereteli, Grigol, 1976. K voprosu o klassifikacii novoaramejskix dialektov [On the question of classification of Neo-Aramaic dialects]. In Philologia Orientalis, vol. IV, Tbilisi: Mecniereba, pp. 224232.Google Scholar
Chirikba, Viacheslav, 2008a. The problem of the Caucasian Sprachbund. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 2593. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 25. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Chirikba, Viacheslav, 2008b. Armenians and their dialects in Abkhazia. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Balto-Slavic and Indo-European Linguistics, pp. 5167. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Chitoran, Ioana, 2002. Georgian harmonic clusters: Phonetic cues to phonological representation. Phonology 15 (2): 121141.Google Scholar
Cho, Taehong and Ladefoged, Peter, 1999. Variation and universals in VOT: evidence from 18 languages. Journal of Phonetics 27 (2): 207229.Google Scholar
Coene, Frederik, 2009. The Caucasus: An Introduction. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Colarusso, John, 1988. The Northwest Caucasian Languages: A Phonological Survey. New York and London: Garland Publishing.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard (ed.), 1981. The Languages of the Soviet Union. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard, 2003. A note on pharyngealization and umlaut in two Tsezic languages. In Boeder, Winfried (ed.), Kaukasische Sprachprobleme: Beiträge zu den Kaukasistentagungen in Oldenburg 1995–2001, pp. 105109. Bibliotheks- und Informationssystem der Universität Oldenburg.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard, 2008. Linguistic diversity in the Caucasus. Annual Review of Anthropology 37 (1): 131143.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard and Khalilov, Madzhid, 2010. The Dictionary of Languages and Dialects of the Peoples of the Northern Caucasus: Comparison of the Basic Lexicon; Languages and Dialects of the Peoples of Republic of Daghestan, Ingush Republic, Republic of North Ossetia-Alania, Chechen Republic and of the Nakh-Daghestanian Peoples of Azerbaijan and Georgia. Makhachkala, and Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology.Google Scholar
Daniel, Mikhail, Dobrushina, Nina and Knyazev, Sergey, 2011. Highlanders’ Russian: Case study in bilingualism and language interference in central Daghestan. In Mustajoki, Arto, Protassova, Ekaterina and Vakhtin, Nikolai (eds), Instrumentarium of Linguistics: Sociolinguistic Approach to Non-Standard Russian, pp. 6593. Slavica Helsingiensia, vol. 40. University of Helsinki.Google Scholar
Dirr, Adolf, 1928. Einführung in das Studium der kaukasischen Sprachen: mit einer Sprachenkarte. Leipzig: Asia Major.Google Scholar
Dobrushina, Nina, 2013. How to study multilingualism of the past: Investigating traditional contact situations in Daghestan. Journal of Sociolinguistics 17 (3): 376393.Google Scholar
Dzhidalaev, Nurislam S., 2010. Tjurksko-dagestanskie jazykovye kontakty (na primere lakskogo jazyka) [Turkic-Dagestanian language contacts (on the example of Lak)]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of Science in Dagestan.Google Scholar
Fallon, Paul D., 2001. The Synchronic and Diachronic Phonology of Ejectives. New York and London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Flege, James E., Schirru, Carlo and MacKay, Ian R. A., 2003. Interaction between the native and second language phonetic subsystems. Speech Communication, 40: 467491.Google Scholar
Flege, James E. and Port, Robert, 1981. Cross-language phonetic interference: Arabic to English. Language and Speech, 24: 125146.Google Scholar
Forker, Diana, 2013. A Grammar of Hinuq. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Friedman, Victor A., 2009. Sociolinguistics in the Caucasus. In Ball, Martin J. (ed.), The Routledge Handbook of Sociolinguistics Around the World, pp. 127138. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Gilles, Peter and Siebenhaar, Beat, 2010. Areal variation in segmental phonetics and phonology. In Auer, Peter and Schmidt, Jürgen Erich (eds), Language and Space, pp. 760786. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Gippert, Jost, 2008. Endangered Caucasian languages in Georgia: Linguistic parameters of language endangerment. In Harrison, K. David, Rood, David S. and Dwyer, Arienne (eds), Lessons from Documented Endangered Languages, pp. 159193. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Gordon, Matthew and Applebaum, Ayla, 2006. Turkish Kabardian. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 36 (2): 255264.Google Scholar
Grawunder, Sven, 2013. Intensity slopes as robust measure for distinguishing glottalic vs pulmonic stop initiation. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 134 (5): 4069.Google Scholar
Grawunder, Sven, 2015. Foneticheskie kharakteristiki (nenazalizovannykh) glaznykh v bezhtinskom yazyke [Phonetic characteristics of (non-nasalized) vowels in Bezhta]. In Comrie, Bernard (ed.), Grammatika bezhtinskogo yazyka [A Grammar of Bezhta], pp. 5262. Leipzig and Makhachkala: ALEPH.Google Scholar
Grawunder, Sven, Simpson, Adrian P. and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2010. Phonetic characteristics of ejectives: Samples from Caucasian languages. In Fuchs, Susanne, Toda, Martine and Żygis, Marzena (eds), Turbulent Sounds: An Interdisciplinary Guide, pp. 209244. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gudava, Togo E., 1964. Konsonantizm andijxskix yazykov [The Consonantism of the Andic Languages]. Tbilisi: Izdatel’stvo Akademii Nauk Gruzinskoj SSR.Google Scholar
Harris, Alice C., 1991. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. I: The Kartvelian Languages. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 1993. A Grammar of Lezgian. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 2006. Against markedness (and what to replace it with). Journal of Linguistics 42 (1): 2570.Google Scholar
Hewitt, B. George, 1981. Caucasian languages. In Comrie, (ed.), pp. 196237.Google Scholar
Hewitt, B. George, 1989. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 2: The North West Caucasian Languages. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar
Hewitt, B. George, 2004. Introduction to the Study of the Languages of the Caucasus. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Hewitt, B. George, 2005. North West Caucasian. Lingua 115 (1): 91145.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012a Areal features of the Anglophone world. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Areal Features of the Anglophone World, pp. 119. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012b. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 387407. Malden, MA: Wiley.Google Scholar
Höhlig, Monika, 1997. Kontaktbedingter Sprachwandel in der adygeischen Umgangssprache im Kaukasus und in der Türkei: Vergleichende Analyse des russischen und türkischen Einflusses in mündlichen adygeischen Texten. LINCOM Studies in Caucasian Linguistics, vol. 3. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Holisky, Dee Ann, 1991. Laz. In Harris, (ed.), pp. 395472.Google Scholar
Holisky, Dee Ann and Gagua, Rasudan, 1994. Tsova-Tush (Batsbi). In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 147212.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2009. How (not) to do phonological typology: The case of pitch-accent. Language Sciences 31 (2): 213238.Google Scholar
Isakov, Isak Abdulvakhidovich and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2004. Hinukh. In Job, (ed.), pp. 167214.Google Scholar
Isakov, Isak Abdulvakhidovich and Khalilov, Madzhid S., 2012. Gunzibskij jazyk (Fonetika Morfologija. Slovoobrazovanie. Leksika. Teksty) [The Hunzib Language]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar
Jastrow, Otto, 1977. Zur Phonologie des Kurdischen in der Türkei. Studien zur Indologie und Iranistik, 3: 84106.Google Scholar
Job, Michael (ed.), 2004. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 3: The North East Caucasian Languages, part 1. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar
Johanson, Lars, 2006. On the roles of Turkic in the Caucasus area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas, pp. 160181. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Johanson, Lars and Csató, Éva (eds), 1998. The Turkic Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Kaye, Alan S. and Daniels, Peter T. (eds), 1997. Phonologies of Asia and Africa (including the Caucasus), vol. 1. Winona Lake, IN: Eisenbrauns.Google Scholar
Keskin, Mesut, 2008. Zur dialektalen Gliederung des Zazaki. Unpublished MA thesis, Johann-Wolfgang-von-Goethe-Universität Frankfurt, Institut für Vergleichende indogermanische Sprachwissenschaft.Google Scholar
Khalidova, Rasidat Sachrudinovna, 2006. Avarsko-andijskie jazykovye kontakty [Avar-Andic Language Contacts]. Makhachkala: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar
Khalilov, Madzhid Sharipovic, 2004. Gruzinsko-dagestanskie jazykovye kontakty [Georgian–Dagestanian Language Contacts]. Moskva: Nauka.Google Scholar
Khalilova, Zaira, 2009. A Grammar of Kwarshi. PhD thesis, University of Leiden.Google Scholar
Khan, Geoffrey, 2008. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar. Handbook of Oriental Studies, Section 1: The Near and Middle East, vol. 96. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Kibrik, Alexander E., 2001. Bagvalinskij jazyk: Grammatika, teksty, slovari [The Bagvalal Language: Grammar, Texts, Dictionary]. Moscow: Russian Academy of the Sciences.Google Scholar
Kibrik, Alexander E. and Kodzasov, Sandro V., 1990. Sopostavitel’noe izucenie dagestanskix jazykov: Imja, Fonetika [A Comparative Study of Dagestanian Languages: Nouns, Phonetics]. Moscow: Izdatel’stvo Moskovskogo Universitet.Google Scholar
Kibrik, Alexander E. and Testelec, Yakuv G. (eds), 1999. Elementy tsakhurskogo yazyka v tipologicheskom osveshchenii [Elements of the Tsakhur Language in a typological light]. Moscow: Nasledie.Google Scholar
Kingston, John and Nichols, Johanna, 1986. Pharyngealization in Chechen. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 80: 62.Google Scholar
Klimov, Georgij A., 1994. Einführung in die kaukasische Sprachwissenschaft, translated and revised by Gippert, Jost. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar
Kodzasov, Sandro V., 1999. Caucasian: Daghestanian languages. In van der Hulst, Harry (ed.), Word Prosodic Systems in the Languages of Europe, pp. 9951020. Berlin and New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Kornfilt, Jaklin, 1997. Turkish. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Koryakov, Yuri B., 2006. Atlas kavkazkikh yazykov [Atlas of the Caucasian Languages]. Moscow: RAN.Google Scholar
Lacroix, René, 2009. Description du Dialecte Laze d’Arhavi (Caucasique du Sud, Turquie): Grammaire et Textes. PhD thesis, Université Lumière Lyon 2, Lyon.Google Scholar
Ladd, D. Robert, 2014. Simultaneous Structure in Phonology. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Blackwell.Google Scholar
Lancia, Leonardo and Grawunder, Sven, 2014. Tongue–larynx interactions in the production of word initial laryngealization over different prosodic contexts: a repeated speech experiment. In Fuchs, Susanne et al. (eds), Proceedings of the 10th International Seminar on Speech Production (ISSP), Cologne, pp. 245248.Google Scholar
Lindblom, Björn, 1990. Explaining phonetic variation: A sketch of the H&H theory. In Hardcastle, William and Marchal, Alain (eds), Speech Production and Speech Modeling, pp. 403439. Dordrecht: Kluwer.Google Scholar
Lisker, Leigh and Abramson, Arthur, 1964. A cross-language study of voicing in initial stops: Acoustical measurements. Word 20 (3): 384422.Google Scholar
Lupyan, Gary and Dale, Rick, 2010. Language structure is partly determined by social structure. PLoS ONE 5 (1): e8559.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 1984. Patterns of Sounds. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, Rajabov, Ramasan and Sonnenschein, Aaron, 1996. The main features of Tsez phonetics. UCLA Working Papers In Phonetics: 94110.Google Scholar
Magomedova, Patimat, 2004. Chamalal. In Job, (ed.), pp. 565.Google Scholar
McMahon, April M. S., 1994. Understanding Language Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Mejlanova, Udeizat A., 1970. Gjunejskij dialekt: osnova lezginskogo literaturnogo jazyka [The Gunei Dialect: Basis of the Lezgian Literary Language]. Makhachkala: Inst. Istorii, Yazyka i Literatury im. G Cadasy.Google Scholar
Nasidze, Ivan et al., 2004. Mitochondrial DNA and Y-chromosome variation in the Caucasus. Annals of Human Genetics 68 (3): 205221.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1994. Chechen. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 178.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Chechen phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 941971.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 2011. Ingush Grammar. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 2013. The vertical archipelago: Adding the third dimension to linguistic geography. In Auer, Peter, Hilpert, Martin, Stukenbrock, Anja and Szmrecsanyi, Benedikt (eds), Space in Language and Linguistics: Geographical, Interactional, and Cognitive Perspectives, pp. 3860. Berlin: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Ohala, John J., 1990. There is no interface between phonology and phonetics: A personal view. Journal of Phonetics, 18: 153171.Google Scholar
Rogava, Georgij Vissarionovic and Kerasheva, Zajnab Ibragimovna, 1966. Adygabzem igrammatik – Grammatika adygejskogo jazyka [Grammar of the Adyghe Language]. Maykop, Krasnodar: Krasnodarske Thylq Tedzapi [Krasnodar Publishing House].Google Scholar
Schönig, Claus, 1998. Azerbaijanian. In Johanson, and Csató, (eds), pp. 248260.Google Scholar
Schulze, Wolfgang, 2005. Towards a history of Udi. International Journal of Diachronic Linguistics, 1: 5591.Google Scholar
Schulze-Fürhoff, Wolfgang, 1994. Udi. In Smeets, (ed.), pp. 447514.Google Scholar
Smeets, Rieks (ed.), 1994. The Indigenous Languages of the Caucasus, vol. 4: North East Caucasian Languages, part 2. Delmar, NY: Caravan Books.Google Scholar
Stilo, Donald L., 1994. Phonological systems in contact in Iran and Transcaucasia. In Marashi, Mehdi (ed.), Persian Studies in North America: Studies in Honor of Mohammad Ali Jazayery, pp. 7594. Bethesda, MD: Iranbooks.Google Scholar
Stilo, Donald L., 2004. Iranian as buffer zone between the universal typologies of Turkic and Semitic. In Csató, Éva Ágnes, Isaksson, Bo and Jahani, Carina (eds), Linguistic Convergence and Areal Diffusion: Case Studies from Iranian, Semitic and Turkic, pp. 3563. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Stilo, Donald L., 2006. Circumpositions as an areal response: The case study of the Iranian zone. In Johanson, Lars and Bulut, Christiane (eds), Turkic–Iranian Contact-Areas, pp. 310333. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Sumbatova, Nina R. and Mutalov, Rasul O., 2003. A Grammar of Icari Dargwa. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Talibov, Bukar B., 2004. Tsakhur. In Job, (ed.), pp. 347419.Google Scholar
Testen, David, 1997. Ossetic phonology. In Kaye, and Daniels, (eds), pp. 707731.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Tolstoj, Nikita I., 1997. Tyurkskie Yazyki [Turkic Languages]. Yazyki Mira, Moscow: Indrik, RAN.Google Scholar
Trubetzkoy, Nikolai Sergeevich, 1958 [1939]. Grundzüge der Phonologie, seventh edition. Göttingen: Vandenhoeck & Ruprecht.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 1996. Dialect typology: Isolation, social network and phonological structure. In Guy, Gregory R., Feagin, Crawford, Schiffrin, Deborah and Baugh, John (eds), Towards a Social Science of Language: Papers in Honour of William Labov, vol. 1, pp. 321. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2004. Linguistic and social typology: The Austronesian migrations and phoneme inventories. Linguistic Typology 8 (3): 305320.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Tuite, Kevin, 1999. The myth of the Caucasian Sprachbund: The case of ergativity. Lingua 108 (1): 129.Google Scholar
Tuite, Kevin, 2008. The rise and fall and revival of the Ibero-Caucasian hypothesis. Historiographia Linguistica 35 (1–2): 2382.Google Scholar
Vadzhibov, Malik, 2012. Fonetika tabasaranskogo jazyka – sravitel’noe opisanie zvukovykh sistem literaturnogo jazyka i mezhgiul’skogo govora [Phonetics of the Tabasaran Language]. Saarbrücken: Lambert Academic Publishing.Google Scholar
Vaux, Bert, 1998. The Phonology of Armenian. Oxford: Clarendon Press.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Vicenik, Chad, 2010. An acoustic study of Georgian stop consonants. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 40 (1): 5992.Google Scholar
Warner, Natasha, 1996. Acoustic characteristics of ejectives in Ingush. In Proceedings of the Fourth International Conference on Spoken Language Processing, ICSLP 96, 3, Philadelphia, PA.Google Scholar
Wixman, Ronald, 1980. Language Aspects of Ethnic Patterns and Processes in the North Caucasus. Chicago: University of Chicago, Department of Geography.Google Scholar
Yunusbayev, Bayazit, et al., 2012. The Caucasus as an asymmetric semipermeable barrier to ancient human migrations. Molecular Biology and Evolution 29 (1): 359365.Google Scholar
Zabitov, S. M. and Efendiev, I. I., 2001. Slovar’ arabskikh i persidskikh leksicheskikh zaimstvovanij v lezginskom jazyke [Dictionary of Arab and Persian Lexical Loans in the Lezgian Language]. Makhachkala: Dagestan State University.Google Scholar

References

Blau, Joyce, 1975. Le Kurde de ’Amādiya et de Djabal Sindjār: Analyse Linguistique, Textes Folkloriques, Glossaires. Paris: Klincksieck.Google Scholar
Borghero, Roberta, 2005. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Ashitha. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Cambridge.Google Scholar
Brustad, Kristen, 2000. The Syntax of Spoken Arabic: A Comparative Study of Moroccan, Egyptian, Syrian, and Kuwaiti Dialects. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Bulut, Christiane, 2002. Evliya Çelebi as a linguist and dialectologist: Seventeenth century East Anatolian and Azeri Turkic dialects. In Tezcan, Nuran and Atlansoy, Kadir (eds), Evliya Çelebi ve Seyahatname, pp. 4964. Doğu Akdeniz Üniversitesi Yayınları.Google Scholar
Bulut, Christiane, 2006. Turkish elements in spoken Kurmanji. In Boeschoten, Hans and Johanson, Lars (eds), Turkic Languages in Contact: Proceedings of the Wassenaar Meeting, Feb. 1996, pp. 95121. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Bulut, Christiane, 2007. Iraqi Turkman. In Postgate, John (ed.), Languages of Iraq, Ancient and Modern, pp. 159187. Cambridge: British School of Archaeology in Iraq.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 131. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Djelil, Ordixane and Djelil, Celile, 1978. Zargotina K’urda [The Oral Tradition of the Kurds]. Moscow: Nauk.Google Scholar
Dum-Tragut, Jasmine, 2009. Armenian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Fox, Samuel Ethan, 2009. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Bohtan. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar
Gemalmaz, Efrasiyap, 1995. Erzurum ili Ağızları: Inceleme, Metinler, Sözlük ve Dizinler [The Spoken Varieties (of Turkish) in Erzurum: Analysis, Texts, Lexicon, Glossaries]. Ankara: Türk Dil Kurumu.Google Scholar
Gippert, Jost, 2007/2008. Zur dialektalen Stellung des Zazaki. Die Sprache 47 (1): 77107.Google Scholar
Göksel, Aslı and Kerslake, Celia, 2005. Turkish: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Grawunder, Sven, Geumann, Anja, Haig, Geoffrey, Celebi, Cemile and Stilo, Donald, 2013. Stop contrasts in Kurmanji Kurdish: Testing the ejectives hypothesis. Paper held at the Fifth International Conference on Iranian Linguistics (ICIL5), University of Bamberg, August 2013.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2001. Linguistic diffusion in present-day east Anatolia: From top to bottom. In Dixon, Robert and Aikhenvald, Alexandra (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 195224. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2004. The invisibilization of Kurdish. The other side of language planning in Turkey. In Conermann, Stephan and Haig, Geoffrey (eds), Die Kurden: Studien zu ihrer Sprache, Geschichte und Kultur, pp. 121150. Hamburg: Schenefeld.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2006. Turkish influence on Kurmanji: Evidence from the Tunceli dialect. In Johanson, Lars and Bulut, Christiane (eds), Turkic–Iranian Contact Areas: Historical and Linguistic Aspects, pp. 283299. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2011. Linker, relativizer, nominalizer, tense-particle: On the Ezafe in West Iranian. In Yap, Foong Ha, Grunow-Hårsta, Karen and Wrona, Janick (eds), Nominalization in Asian Languages: Diachronic and Typological Perspectives, vol. 1: Sino-Tibetan and Iranian Languages, pp. 363390. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2014a. East Anatolia as a linguistic area? Conceptual and empirical issues. In Behzadi, Lale et al. (eds), Bamberger Orientstudien, pp. 1335. Bamberg: Bamberg University Press.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2014b. Verb-goal (VG) word order in Kurdish and Neo-Aramaic: Typological and areal considerations. In Khan, Geoffrey and Napiorkowska, Lidia (eds), Neo-Aramaic and its Linguistic Context, pp. 407425. New York: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey and Öpengin, Ergin, 2014. Kurdish: A critical research overview. Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 99122.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey and Thiele, Hannah, 2014. Post-predicate goals in Northern Kurdish and neighbouring languages: A pilot study in quantitative areal linguistics. Paper held at the Second International Conference on Variation and Change in Kurdish, Mardin Artuklu University, 8–9 October 2014.Google Scholar
Hawkins, J. A., 2008. An asymmetry between VO and OV languages: The ordering of obliques. In Corbett, Greville and Noonan, Michael (eds), Case and Grammatical Relations: Essays in Honour of Bernard Comrie, pp. 167190. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Herin, Bruno, 2012. The Domari language of Aleppo (Syria). Linguistic Discovery 10: 152.Google Scholar
Holes, Clive, 1992. Colloquial Arabic of the Gulf and Saudi Arabia. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Jastrow, Otto, 1980. Das mesopotamische Arabische. In Fischer, Wolfdietrich and Jastrow, Otto (eds), Handbuch der Arabischen Dialekte, pp. 140154. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Jastrow, Otto, 1988. Der Neuaramäische Dialekt von Hertevin (Provinz Siirt). Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Jastrow, Otto, 1992. Lehrbuch der Ṭuroyo-Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Kahn, Margaret, 1976. Borrowing and Regional Variation in a Phonological Description of Kurdish. Ann Arbor, MI: Phonetics Laboratory of the University of Michigan.Google Scholar
Kapeliuk, Olga, 2011. Language contact between Aramaic dialects and Iranian. In Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook, pp. 738747. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Khan, Geoffrey, 2004. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Sulemaniyya and Ḥalabja. Brill: Leiden.Google Scholar
Khan, Geoffrey, 2008a. Arabic Documents from Early Islamic Khurasan. London: Nour Foundation.Google Scholar
Khan, Geoffrey, 2008b. The Jewish Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Urmi. Piscataway, NJ: Gorgias Press.Google Scholar
Khan, Geoffrey, 2008c. The Neo-Aramaic Dialect of Barwar, vol. 1: Grammar. Brill: Leiden.Google Scholar
Kıral, Filiz, 2001. Das gesprochene Aserbaidschanisch von Iran: Eine Studie zu den syntaktischen Einflüssen des Persischen. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria and Wälchli, Bernhard, 2001. The Circum-Baltic languages: An areal-typological approach. In Dahl, Östen and Koptjevskaja-Tamm, Maria (eds), Circum-Baltic Languages: Typology and Contact, pp. 615750. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Lacroix, René, 2009. Description du Dialecte Laze d’Arhavi (Caucasique du Sud, Turquie): Grammaire et Textes. Unpublished PhD thesis, Université Lumière Lyon 2.Google Scholar
Lewendî, Mahmûd, 1997. Kurdên Şêxbizinî [The Şêxbizinî Kurds]. Bîrnebûn 3: 7898.Google Scholar
MacKenzie, David, 1961. Kurdish Dialect Studies, vol. 1. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
MacKenzie, David, 1962. Kurdish Dialect Studies, vol. II. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2007. The borrowability of structural categories. In Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeanette (eds), Grammatical Borrowing in Cross-Linguistic Perspective, pp. 3173. Berlin: Mouton.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2009. Language Contact. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2010. Contact, convergence, and typology. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Contact Linguistics, pp. 6685. Malden, MA: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2012. A Grammar of Domari. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Menz, Astrid, 2010. Klusile und Affikaten im Anlaut armenischer Globalkopien im Dialektmaterial von Erzurum. In Boeschoten, Hendrik and Rentzsch, Julian (eds), Turcology in Mainz, pp. 173190. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Noorlander, Paul, 2014. Diversity in convergence: Kurdish and Aramaic variation entangled. Journal of Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 201224.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Öpengin, Ergin, 2012. Sociolinguistic situation of Kurdish in Turkey: Sociopolitical factors and language use patterns. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 217: 151180.Google Scholar
Öpengin, Ergin, 2013. Clitic/Affix Interactions: A Corpus-Based Study of Person Marking in the Mukri Variety of Central Kurdish. Unpublished PhD thesis. Paris Sorbonne/University of Bamberg.Google Scholar
Öpengin, Ergin and Haig, Geoffrey, 2014. Variation in Kurmanji. A preliminary classification of dialects. Journal of Kurdish Studies 2 (2): 143176.Google Scholar
Paul, Ludwig, 1998. Zazaki: Grammatik und Versuch einer Dialektologie. Wiesbaden: Reichert.Google Scholar
Skutnabb-Kangas, Tove and Bucak, Sertaç, 1995. Killing a mother tongue: How the Kurds are deprived of linguistic human rights. In Skutnabb-Kangas, Tove and Phillipson, Robert (eds), Linguistic Human Rights: Overcoming Linguistic Discrimination, pp. 347370. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Stilo, Donald, 2005. Iranian as buffer zone between the universal typologies of Turkic and Semitic. In Csató, Éva Ágnes, Isaksson, Bo and Jahani, Carina (eds), Linguistic Convergence and Areal Diffusion: Case Studies from Iranian, Semitic and Turkic, pp. 3563. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Stilo, Donald, 2012. Intersection zones, overlapping isoglosses, and ‘Fade- out/Fade-in’ phenomena in Central Iran. In Aghaei, Behrad and Ghanoonparvar, M. R. (eds), Iranian Languages and Culture: Essays in Honor of Gernot Ludwig Windfuhr, pp. 333. Costa Mesa: Mazda Publishers.Google Scholar
Talay, Shabo, 2006/2007. The influence of Turkish, Kurdish and other neighbouring languages on Anatolian Arabic. In Romano-Arabica VI-VII (2006–2007), pp. 179188. University of Bucharest, Center for Arab Studies.Google Scholar
Talay, Shabo, 2008. Die Neuaramäischen Dialekte der Khabur-Assyrer in Nordostsyrien: Einführung, Phonologie und Morphologie. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Talay, Shabo, 2011. Arabic dialects of Mesopotamia. In Weninger, Stefan (ed.), The Semitic Languages: An International Handbook, pp. 909920. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Vaux, Bert, 2007. Homshetsma: The language of the Armenians of Hamshen. In Simonian, Hoann (ed.), The Hemshin, pp. 255278. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Zeldes, Amir, 2013. Is Modern Hebrew Standard Average European? The view from European. Linguistic Typology 17 (3): 439470.Google Scholar

References

Ansaldo, Umberto, 2004. The correlation between exceed comparatives and verby languages. In Proceedings of the 11th Conference of the South East Asian Linguistic Society. Program for Southeast Asian Studies, Arizona State University.Google Scholar
Boretzky, Norbert, 1983. Kreolsprachen, Substrate und Sprachwandel. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Bostoen, Koen and Sands, Bonny, 2012. Clicks in south-western Bantu languages: Contact-induced vs. language-internal lexical change. In Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), Proceedings of the 6th World Congress of African Linguistics, WOCAL6, Cologne, pp. 129140. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Breu, Walter, 2003. Der indefinite Artikel in slavischen Mikrosprachen: Grammatikalisierung im totalen Sprachkontakt. In Kuße, Holger (ed.), Slavistische Linguistik 2001, pp. 2768. Munich: Sagner.Google Scholar
Breu, Walter, 2004. Der definite Artikel in der obersorbischen Umgangssprache. In Krause, Marion and Sappok, Christian (eds), Slavistische Linguistik 2002, pp. 957. Munich: Sagner.Google Scholar
Bybee, Joan L., Perkins, Revere D. and Pagliuca, William, 1994. The Evolution of Grammar: Tense, Aspect, and Modality in the Languages of the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Claudi, Ulrike, 1993. Die Stellung von Verb und Objekt in Niger-Kongo-Sprachen: Ein Beitrag zur Rekonstruktion historischer Syntax. Afrikanistische Monographien, vol. 1. Cologne: Institut für Afrikanistik, Universität zu Köln.Google Scholar
Clements, G. N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 3685.Google Scholar
Crass, Joachim and Meyer, Ronny, 2008. Ethiopia. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 228250.Google Scholar
Creissels, Denis, Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., Frajzyngier, Zygmunt and König, Christa, 2008. Africa as a morphosyntactic area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 86150.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2011. Noun-modifier order in Africa. In Hieda, , König, and Nakagawa, (eds), pp. 287311.Google Scholar
Evans, N. R. D. and Wilkins, D. P., 2000. In the mind’s ear: The semantic extensions of perception verbs in Australian languages. Language 76 (3): 546592.Google Scholar
Ferguson, Charles, 1970. The Ethiopian Language Area. The Journal of Ethiopian Studies 8 (2): 6780.Google Scholar
Ferguson, Charles A., 1976. The Ethiopian language area. In Bender, Marvin L., Bowen, J. D., Cooper, R. L. and Ferguson, Charles A. (eds), Language in Ethiopia, pp. 6376. London: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Gilman, Charles, 1986. African areal characteristics: Sprachbund, not substrate? Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 1 (1): 3350.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1959. Africa as a linguistic area. In Bascom, W. R. and Herskovits, M. J. (eds), Continuity and Change in African Cultures, pp. 1527. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1983. Some areal characteristics of African languages. In Dihoff, Ivan R. (ed.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, vol. 1, pp. 321. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Gregersen, Edgar A., 1977. Language in Africa: An Introductory Survey. New York, Paris and London: Gordon and Breach.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 1998. The Kalahari Basin as an object of areal typology: A first approach. In Schladt, Mathias (ed.), Language, Identity, and Conceptualization among the Khoisan, pp. 137196. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2008. The Macro-Sudan Belt. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 151185.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1975. The study of word order in African languages. In Herbert, R. K. (ed.), Proceedings of the Sixth Conference on African Linguistics, Ohio State University, Columbus, April 12–13, 1975, pp. 161183. Columbus, OH: The Ohio State University.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages, Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1994. Areal influence on grammaticalization. In Pütz, Martin (ed.), Language Contact and Language Conflict, pp. 5668. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1997. Cognitive Foundations of Grammar. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 2011. Areas of grammaticalization and geographical typology. In Hieda, , König, and Nakagawa, (eds), pp. 4166.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, Claudi, Ulrike and Hünnemeyer, Friederike, 1991. Grammaticalization: A Conceptual Framework. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and König, Christa, 2015. The ǃXun Language: A Dialect Grammar. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2002. World Lexicon of Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2008. Is Africa a linguistic area? In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 1535.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reassessment and reconsideration. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 128. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Internally and externally motivated language change. In Hernández-Campoy, Juan Manuel and Conde-Silvestre, Juan Camilo (eds), The Handbook of Historical Sociolinguistics, pp. 401421. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), 2011. Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas, With Special Reference to Africa. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies (TUFS), Studies in Linguistics. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hopper, Paul J. and Traugott, Elizabeth C., 2003. Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kießling, Roland, Mous, Maarten and Nurse, Derek, 2008. The Tanzanian Rift Valley area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 186227.Google Scholar
Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2001. Ideophone: Eine typologische Untersuchung unter besonderer Berücksichtigung afrikanischer Sprachen. Habilitationsschrift, University of Cologne.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2006. Case in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2008. The marked-nominative languages of Eastern Africa. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 251271.Google Scholar
Kuteva, Tania, 1998. Large linguistic areas in grammaticalization: Auxiliation in Europe. Language Sciences 20 (3): 289311.Google Scholar
Kuteva, Tania, 2000. Areal grammaticalization: The case of the Bantu–Nilotic borderland. Folia Linguistica 34 (3–4): 267283.Google Scholar
Larochette, J., 1959. Overeenkomst tussen Mangbetu, Zande, en Bantu-talen. In Handelingen van het XXIIIe Vlaams Filologencongres, Brussels, pp. 247248.Google Scholar
Leyew, Zelealem and Heine, Bernd, 2003. Comparative constructions in Africa: An areal dimension. Annual Publication in African Linguistics (APAL) 1: 4768.Google Scholar
Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1991. Semantic change and heterosemy in grammaticalization. Language 67 (3): 475509.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2003. The sounds of the Bantu languages. In Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), The Bantu Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Meeussen, A. E., 1975. Possible Linguistic Africanisms (Fifth Hans Wolff Memorial Lecture). Language Sciences, vol. 35. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.Google Scholar
Moravcsik, Edith, 2003. A semantic analysis of associative plurals. Studies in Language 27 (3): 469503.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter (ed.), 2008. Introduction: Conceptual and methodological issues in areal linguistics. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 123. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Singer, Ruth, 1999. The inclusory construction in Australian languages. Melbourne Papers in Linguistics and Applied Linguistics 18: 8196.Google Scholar
Stolz, Christel and Stolz, Thomas, 2001. Mesoamerica as a linguistic area. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkehard, Oesterreicher, Wulf and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Language Typology and Language Universals: An International Handbook, vol. 2, pp. 15421553. Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft, vol. 20.2. New York: Walter de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Stolz, Thomas, 2002. No sprachbund beyond this line! On the age-old discussion of how to define a linguistic area. In Ramat, Paolo and Stolz, Thomas (eds), Mediterranean Languages: Papers from the MEDTYP Workshop, Tirrenia, June 2000, pp. 259281. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2003. Contact as a source of language change. In Joseph, Brian D. and Janda, Richard D. (eds), The Handbook of Historical Linguistics, pp. 687712. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Tosco, Mauro, 1991. A Grammatical Sketch of Dahalo. Cushitic Language Studies, vol. 8. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Tosco, Mauro, 2000. Is there an ‘Ethiopian language area’? Anthropological Linguistics 42 (3): 329365.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony, 1994. A ǃXóõ Dictionary. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung, vol. 9. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Traugott, Elizabeth C. and Heine, Bernd (eds), 1991. Approaches to Grammaticalization, vol. 1. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 19.1. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), 2001. Ideophones. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 44. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Weinreich, Uriel, 1953. Languages in Contact: Findings and Problems. New York: Linguistic Circle of New York. Reprinted 1963, The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Welmers, William E., 1973. African Language Structures. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Welmers, William E., 1977. The Major Indigenous Languages of Africa. Berkeley: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Westermann, Diedrich, 1911. Die Sudansprachen. Hamburg: L. Friederichsen.Google Scholar

References

Amha, Azeb, 2001. Ideophones and compound verbs in Wolaitta. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), Ideophones, pp. 4962. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Amha, Azeb and Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2006. Converbs from an African perspective. In Ameka, Felix, Dench, Alan and Evans, Nick, Catching Language: Issues in Grammar Writing, pp. 393440. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Andersen, Torben, 1984. Aspect and word order in Moru. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 6: 1934.Google Scholar
Andersen, Torben, 1995. Absolutive and Nominative in Berta. In Nicolaï, Robert and Rottland, Franz (eds), Proceedings of the Fifth Nilo-Saharan Linguistics Colloquium, pp. 3649. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Becker, E., 2011. The Prehistoric Inhabitants of the Wadi Howar: An Anthropological Study of Human Skeletal Remains from the Sudanese Part of the Eastern Sahara. Doctoral Dissertation, Johannes-Gutenberg-Universität, Mainz.Google Scholar
Bender, Marvin Lionel, 1996. Kunama. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Bickel, Balthasar, 2007. Typology in the twenty-first century: Major current developments. Linguistic Typology 11: 239251.Google Scholar
Blackings, Mairi and Fabb, Nigel, 2003. A Grammar of Ma’di. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Boyd, Raymond, 1989. Adamawa-Ubangi. In Bendor-Samuel, John (ed.), The Niger-Congo Languages, pp. 178215. Lanham: University Press of America.Google Scholar
Boyeldieu, Pascal, 1995. Le yakoma. In Boyd, Raymond (ed.), Le système verbal dans les langues oubangiennes, pp. 113139. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Boyeldieu, Pascal, 2013. Case alignment(s) in Sinyar. Paper presented at the 11th Nilo-Saharan Linguistics Colloquium, University of Cologne.Google Scholar
Boyeldieu, Pascal and Nougayrol, Pierre, 2008. Les langues soudaniques centrales: Essai d’évaluation. In Ibriszimow, Dymitr (ed.), Problems of Linguistic-Historical Reconstruction in Africa, pp. 929. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Cloarec-Heiss, France, 1986. Dynamique et équilibre d’une syntaxe: le banda-linda de Centrafrique. Paris and Cambridge: Peeters-SELAF and Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Corbett, Greville G., 2000. Number. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Cyffer, Norbert, 2002. The Lake Chad: A new Sprachbund boundary? In Nicolai, Robert and Zima, Peter (eds), Lexical and Structural Diffusion, pp. 2743. Corpus, Les Cahiers 1.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001. Language shift and morphological convergence in the Nilotic area. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 16/17: 83124.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2005. Head marking, dependent marking and constituent order in the Nilotic area. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard (ed.), Studies in African Linguistic Typology, pp. 7192. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2007. Eastern Sudanic and the Wadi Howar and Wadi El Milk diaspora. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 18: 3767.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2008. Africa’s verb-final languages. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 271307.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2010a. Differential Object Marking in Nilo-Saharan. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 31: 1346.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2010b. On the origin of ergativity in Tima. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale: Mélanges offerts à Denis Creissels, pp. 233239. Paris: Presses Universitaires de l’École Normale Supérieure.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2011. Historical Linguistics and the Comparative Study of African Languages. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2014a. Nilo-Saharan. In Lieber, Rochelle and Štekauer, Pavol (eds), The Oxford Handbook of Derivational Morphology, pp. 591608. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2014b. Marked nominative systems in Eastern Sudanic and their historical origin. Afrikanistik Online 11.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2015. The Leopard’s Spots: Essays on Language, Cognition and Culture. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., in press. Nilo-Saharan. In Vossen, Rainer and Dimmendaal, Gerrit J. (eds), The Handbook of African Languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 2002. Australian Languages: Their Nature and Development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ehret, Christopher, 2001. A Historical-Comparative Reconstruction of Nilo-Saharan. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Fabb, Mairi and Fabb, Nigel, 2003. A Grammar of Ma’di. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Ferguson, Charles A., 1970. The Ethiopian language area. Journal of Ethiopian Studies 8 (2): 6780.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1955. Studies in African Linguistic Classification. New Haven, CT: Compass Publishing Co.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. Bloomington and The Hague: Indiana University Press, Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore and Linguistics and Mouton.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1966. Some universals of grammar with particular reference to the order of meaningful elements. In Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.), Universals of Language, pp. 73113. Cambridge MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar
Gulfan, Gumma Ibrahim, 2013. Converbs in Taglennaa (Kordofan Nubian). In Schadeberg, Thilo C. and Blench, Roger (eds), Nuba Mountain Language Studies, pp. 371379. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Hayward, Richard J., 1991. À propos patterns of lexicalization in the Ethiopian language area. In Claudi, Ulrike and Mendel, Daniela (eds), Ägypten im afro-orientalischen Kontext, pp. 139156. Special issue of Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere (AAP).Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2003. Comparative constructions in Africa: An areal dimension. Annual Publications in African Linguistics 1: 4768.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Houis, Maurice, 1970. Réflexion sur une double corrélation typologique. The Journal of West African Languages 7 (2): 5968.Google Scholar
Hutchison, John, 1981. The Kanuri Language: A Reference Grammar. Madison: African Studies Program.Google Scholar
Jakobi, Angelika and Crass, Joachim, 2004. Grammaire du beria (langue saharienne). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Kießling, Roland, Mous, Maarten and Nurse, Derek, 2008. The Tanzanian Rift Valley area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 186227.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2008. Case in Africa. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kutsch Lojenga, Constance, 1994. Ngiti: A Central Sudanic Language of Zaire. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Leslau, Wolf, 1945. The influence of Cushitic on the Semitic languages of Ethiopia: A problem of substratum. Word 1: 5982.Google Scholar
Miller, Cynthia L. and Gilley, Leoma G., 2007. Evidence for ergativity in Shilluk. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 22: 3368.Google Scholar
Moñino, Yves, 2012. Is [the] Ubangian branch a family among Niger-Congo languages? Paper presented at the Niger-Congo International Congress. Paris, 18–21 September 2012.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Language Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nurse, Derek, 2008. Tense and Aspect in Bantu. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Rapold, Christian H., 2008. Medial verbs in Benchnon. In Ebert, Karen H., Mattissen, Johanna and Suter, Rafael (eds), From Siberia to Ethiopia: Converbs from a Cross-linguistic Perspective, pp. 155183. Zürich: Seminar für Allgemeine Sprachwissenschaft, Universität Zürich.Google Scholar
Rilly, Claude, 2007. La langue du royaume de Méroé: Un panorama de la plus ancienne culture écrite d’Afrique subsaharienne. Paris: Champion.Google Scholar
Santandrea, Stefano, 1970. Brief Grammar Outlines of the Yulu and Kara Languages. Bologna: Nigrizia.Google Scholar
Schrock, Terrill B., 2013. A Grammar of Ik (Icé-tód), Northeast Uganda’s Last Thriving Kuliak Language. Utrecht: LOT.Google Scholar
Storch, Anne, 2005. Dynamics of interacting populations: Language contact in the Lwoo languages of Bahr el-Ghazal. Studies in African Linguistics 32 (1): 6593.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Tosco, Mauro, 2000. Is there an Ethiopian language area? Anthropological Linguistics 42 (3): 329365.Google Scholar
Tucker, A. N., 1967. The Eastern Sudanic Languages 1. London: Dawsons.Google Scholar
Tucker, A. N. and Bryan, Margaret A., 1966. Linguistic Analyses: The Non-Bantu Languages of North-Eastern Africa. London: Oxford University Press for the International African Institute.Google Scholar

References

Abdulaziz, Mohamed H. and Osinde, Ken, 1997. Sheng and Engsh: Development of mixed codes among the urban youth in Kenya. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 125: 4363.Google Scholar
Arnott, D. W., 1970. The Nominal and Verbal Systems of Fula. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Atindogbé, Gratien G., Storch, Anne and Blench, Roger M., 2011. Introduction. In Storch, Anne, Atindogbé, Gratien G. and Blench, Roger M. (eds), Copy Pronouns: Case Studies from African Languages. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Bastin, Yvonne, 2003. The interlacustrine zone (zone J). In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 501528.Google Scholar
Bendor-Samuel, John (ed.), 1989. The Niger-Congo Languages: A Classification and Description of Africa’s Largest Language Family. Lanham, MD: University Press of America.Google Scholar
Bird, Charles S., 1970. The development of Mandekan (Manding): A study of the role of extra-linguistic factors in linguistic change. In Dalby, David (ed.), Language and History in Africa, pp. 146159. New York: Africana Publishing Company.Google Scholar
Bostoen, Koen and Sands, Bonny, 2012. Clicks in south-western Bantu languages: Contact-induced vs. language-internal lexical change. In Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), Proceedings of the 6th World Congress of African Linguistics (WOCAL 6), pp. 121132. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Breedveld, J. O., 1995. Form and Meaning in Fulfulde: A Morphophonological Study of Maasinankoore. Leiden: Research School CNWS.Google Scholar
Bucholtz, Mary, 1999. ‘Why be normal?’ Language and identity practices in a community of nerd girls. Language in Society 28: 203223.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 1997. The status of Isicamtho, an Nguni-based urban variety of Soweto. In Spears, Arthur K. and Winford, Donald (eds), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles, pp. 341367. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 2003. An Introduction to African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 2010a. Language contact in Africa: A selected review. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 695713. Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 2010b. The Mande and Atlantic groups of Niger-Congo: Prolonged contact with asymmetrical consequences. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 3: 1546.Google Scholar
Clements, George N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 3685.Google Scholar
Corbett, Greville G., 2013. Number of genders. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Creissels, Denis, 2006. S-O-V-X constituent order and constituent order alternations in West African languages. In Cover, Rebecca T. and Kim, Yuni (eds), Proceedings of the Thirty-First Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, pp. 3751. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
Creissels, Denis, Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., Frajzyngier, Zygmunt and König, Christa, 2008. Africa as a morphosyntactic area. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 86150.Google Scholar
Cysouw, Michael and Comrie, Bernard, 2009. How varied typologically are the languages of Africa?. In Botha, Rudolf and Knight, Chris (eds), The Cradle of Language, pp. 189203. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dalby, David, 1970. Reflections on the classification of African languages: With special reference to the work of Sigismund Wilhelm Koelle and Malcolm Guthrie. African Language Studies 11: 147171.Google Scholar
Di Carlo, Pierpaolo and Good, Jeff, 2014. What are we trying to preserve? Diversity, change, and ideology at the edge of the Cameroonian Grassfields. In Austin, Peter K. and Sallabank, Julia (eds), Endangered Languages: Beliefs and Ideologies in Language Documentation and Revitalization, pp. 229262. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Diamond, Jared, 1997. Guns, Germs, and Steel. London: Vintage.Google Scholar
Diamond, Jared and Bellwood, Peter, 2003. Farmers and their languages: The first expansions. Science 300: 597603.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001a. Areal diffusion versus genetic inheritance: An African perspective. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 359392. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2001b. Language shift and morphological convergence in the Nilotic area. In Nurse, Derek (ed.), Historical Language Contact in Africa, pp. 83124. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika, vol. 16/17. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2008. Language ecology and linguistic diversity on the African continent. Language and Linguistics Compass 2: 840858.Google Scholar
Dimmendaal, Gerrit J., 2011. Historical Linguistics and the Comparative Study of African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dombrowsky-Hahn, Klaudia, 1999. Phénomènes de contact entre les langues minyanka et bambara (sud du Mali). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2009. Verb-object-negative order in central Africa. In Cyffer, Norbert, Ebermann, Erwin and Ziegelmeyer, Georg (eds), Negation Patterns in West African Languages and Beyond, pp. 307362. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013a. Order of genitive and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013b. Order of subject, object and verb. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013c. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Munich: Max Planck Digital Library.Google Scholar
Eckert, Penelope, 2000. Linguistic Variation as Social Practice: The Linguistic Construction of Identity in Belten High. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 2005. Personhood and linguistic identity, purism and variation. In Austin, Peter K. (ed.), Language Documentation and Description, vol. 3, pp. 157180. London: Hans Rausing Endangered Languages Project.Google Scholar
Gensler, Orin D., 1994. On reconstructing the syntagm S-Aux-O-V-Other to Proto-Niger-Congo. In Moore, Kevin E., Peterson, David A. and Wentum, Comfort (eds), Proceedings of the Twentieth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society, Special Session on Historical Issues in African Linguistics, pp. 120. Berkeley, CA: Berkeley Linguistics Society.Google Scholar
Gensler, Orin D., 1997. Grammaticalization, typology, and Niger-Congo word order: Progress on a still-unsolved problem. Journal of African Languages and Linguistics 18: 5793.Google Scholar
Gerhardt, Ludwig, 1983. Lexical interferences in the Chadic/Benue-Congo border-area. In Wolff, Ekkehard and Meyer-Bahlberg, Hilke (eds), Studies in Chadic and Afroasiatic Linguistics, pp. 301310. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar
Good, Jeff, 2012. How to become a ‘Kwa’ noun. Morphology 22: 293335.Google Scholar
Good, Jeff, 2013. A (micro-)accretion zone in a remnant zone? Lower Fungom in areal-historical perspective. In Bickel, Balthasar, Grenoble, Lenore A., Peterson, David A. and Timberlake, Alan (eds), Language Typology and Historical Contingency: In Honor of Johanna Nichols, pp. 265282. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1949. Studies in African linguistic classification III: The position of Bantu. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 5: 309317.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1978. Diachrony, synchrony, and language universals. In Greenberg, Joseph H. (ed.), Universals of Human Language, pp. 6191. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1983. Some areal characteristics of African languages. In Dihoff, Ivan R. (ed.), Current Approaches to African Linguistics, vol. 1, pp. 321. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1995. The diachronic typological approach to language. In Shibatani, Masayoshi and Bynon, Theodora (eds), Approaches to Language Typology, pp. 145166. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Grégoire, Claire, 2003. The Bantu languages of the forest. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 349370.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 1999a. The genesis of verbal negation in Bantu and its dependency on functional features of clause types. In Hombert, Jean-Marie and Hyman, Larry M. (eds), Bantu Historical Linguistics: Theoretical and Empirical Perspectives, pp. 545587. Stanford, CA: CSLI.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 1999b. Head-initial meets head-final: Nominal suffixes in eastern and southern Bantu from a historical perspective. Studies in African Linguistics 28: 4991.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2003. Logophoricity in Africa: An attempt to explain and evaluate the significance of its modern distribution. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 56: 366387.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2007. Preverbal objects and information structure in Benue-Congo. In Aboh, Enoch O., Harmann, Katharina and Zimmerman, Malte (eds), Focus Strategies in African Languages: The Interaction of Focus and Grammar in Niger-Congo and Afro-Asiatic, pp. 83112. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2008. The Macro-Sudan Belt: Towards identifying a linguistic area in northern Sub-Saharan Africa. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 151185.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2010. Sprachraum and geography: Linguistic macro-areas in Africa. In Lameli, Alfred, Kehrein, Roland and Rabanus, Stefan (eds), Language and Space: An International Handbook of Linguistic Variation, vol. 2: Language Mapping, pp. 561585. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2011. Proto-Bantu and Proto-Niger-Congo: Macro-areal typology and linguistic reconstruction. In Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas: With Special Reference to Africa, pp. 109141. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Stoneking, Mark, 2008. A historical appraisal of clicks: A linguistic and genetic population perspective. Annual Review of Anthropology 37: 93109.Google Scholar
Hajek, John, 2013. Vowel nasalization. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Harries, Lyndon, 1958. Ku̦mu: A sub-Bantu language. Kongo-Overzee 265296.Google Scholar
Heath, Jeffrey, 2008. A Grammar of Jamsay. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Heggarty, Paul, Maguire, Warren and McMahon, April, 2010. Splits or waves? Trees or webs? How divergence measures and network analysis can unravel language histories. Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society B: Biological Sciences 365: 38293843.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1968. Die Verbreitung und Gliederung der Togorestsprachen. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1975. Language typology and convergence areas in Africa. Linguistics 144: 2747.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages: Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: D. Riemer.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1980. Methods in comparative Bantu linguistics (the problem of Bantu linguistic classification). In Bouquiaux, Luc (ed.), L’Expansion Bantoue: Actes du colloque international du CNRS, Viviers (France) 4–16 avril 1977, vol. II, pp. 295308. Paris: SELAF.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Leyew, Zelealem, 2008. Is Africa a linguistic area? In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 1535.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2008. A Linguistic Geography of Africa, pp. 151185. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert K., 1990. The sociohistory of clicks in southern Bantu. Anthropological Linguistics 3/4: 295315.Google Scholar
Holden, Clare J. and Gray, Russell D., 2006. Rapid radiation, borrowing and dialect continua in the Bantu languages. In Forster, Peter and Renfrew, Colin (eds), Phylogenetic Methods and the Prehistory of Languages, pp. 1931. Cambridge: McDonald Institute for Archaeological Research.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2004. How to become a ‘Kwa’ verb. Journal of West African Languages 30: 6988.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2007a. Niger-Congo verb extensions: Overview and discussion. In Payne, Doris L. and Peña, Jaime (eds), Selected Proceedings of the 37th Annual Conference on African Linguistics, pp. 149163. Somerville, MA: Cascadilla.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2007b. Reconstructing the Proto-Bantu verbal unit: Internal evidence. In Kula, Nancy C. and Marten, Lutz (eds), SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 15, pp. 201211. London: SOAS.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2011. The Macro-Sudan Belt and Niger-Congo reconstruction. Language Dynamics and Change 1: 349.Google Scholar
Hymes, Dell H., 1968. Linguistic problems in defining the concept of ‘tribe’. In Helm, June (ed.), Essays on the Problem of Tribe: Proceedings of the 1967 Annual Spring Meeting of the American Ethnological Society, pp. 6590. Seattle: University of Washington Press.Google Scholar
Hymes, Dell H., 1972. Linguistic aspects of comparative political research. In Holt, Robert T. and Turner, John E. (eds), The Methodology of Comparative Research, pp. 295341. New York: Free Press.Google Scholar
Irvine, Judith T., 1978. Wolof noun classification: The social setting of divergent change. Language in Society 7: 3764.Google Scholar
Irvine, Judith T. and Gal, Susan, 2000. Language ideology and linguistic differentiation. In Kroskrity, Paul V. (ed.), Regimes of Language: Ideologies, Polities, and Identities, pp. 3583. Santa Fe, NM: School of American Research Press.Google Scholar
Katamba, Francis, 2003. Bantu nominal morphology. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 103120.Google Scholar
Kießling, Roland and Mous, Maarten, 2004. Urban youth languages in Africa. Anthropological Linguistics 46: 303341.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2008. Case in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kopytoff, Igor, 1987. The internal African frontier: The making of African political culture. In Kopytoff, Igor (ed.), The African Frontier: The Reproduction of Traditional African Societies, pp. 384. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Press.Google Scholar
Kropp Dakubu, M. E., 1997. Korle Meets the Sea: A Sociolinguistic History of Accra. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Louw, J. A., 1986. Some linguistic influence of Khoi and San in the prehistory of the Nguni. In Vossen, Rainer and Keuthmann, Klaus (eds), Contemporary Studies on Khoisan: In Honour of Oswin Köhler on the Occasion of his 75th Birthday, pp. 141168. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar
Louw, J. A., 2013. The impact of Khoesan on Southern Bantu. In Vossen, Rainer (ed.), The Khoesan Languages, pp. 435444. Abingdon, UK: Routledge.Google Scholar
Lüpke, Friederike and Storch, Anne, 2013. Repertoires and Choices in African Languages. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2013a. Glottalized consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2013b. Presence of uncommon consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2013c. Tone. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Maho, Jouni, 1999. A Comparative Study of Bantu Noun Classes. Göteburg: Acta Universitatis Gothoburgensis.Google Scholar
Mazrui, Alamin M., 1995. Slang and code-switching: The case of Sheng in Kenya. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 42: 168179.Google Scholar
Mc Laughlin, Fiona, 2008. The ascent of Wolof as an urban vernacular and national lingua franca in Senegal. In Vigouroux, Cécile B. and Mufwene, Salikoko S. (eds), Globalization and Language Vitality: Perspectives from Africa, pp. 142170. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Mc Laughlin, Fiona (ed.), 2009a. The Languages of Urban Africa. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Mc Laughlin, Fiona, 2009b. Senegal’s early cities and the making of an urban language. In Mc Laughlin, Fiona (ed.), The Languages of Urban Africa, pp. 7185. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
Meeussen, A. E., 1967. Bantu grammatical reconstructions. Africana Linguistica 3: 79121.Google Scholar
Miehe, Gudrun and Winkelmann, Kerstin (eds), 2007. Noun Class Systems in Gur Languages, vol. 1: Southwestern Gur Languages (without Gurunsi). Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Mous, Maarten, 1994. Ma’a or Mbugu. In Bakker, Peter and Mous, Maarten (eds), Mixed Languages: 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining, pp. 175200. Amsterdam: IFOTT.Google Scholar
Mous, Maarten, 2003a. The linguistic properties of lexical manipulation and its relevance for Ma’á. In Matras, Yaron and Bakker, Peter (eds), The Mixed Language Debate: Theoretical and Empirical Advances, pp. 209235. Berlin: Mouton.Google Scholar
Mous, Maarten, 2003b. The Making of a Mixed Language: The Case of Ma’a/Mbugu. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mufwene, Salikoko S., 2003. Contact languages in the Bantu area. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 195208.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Modeling ancient population structures and movement in linguistics. Annual Review of Anthropology 26: 359384.Google Scholar
Nurse, Derek, 2007. Did the Proto-Bantu verb have a synthetic or an analytic structure? In Kula, Nancy C. and Marten, Lutz (eds), SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 15, pp. 239256. London: SOAS.Google Scholar
Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard, 2003a. Introduction. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 112.Google Scholar
Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), 2003b. The Bantu Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Olson, Kenneth S. and Hajek, John, 2003. Cross-linguistic insights on the labial flap. Linguistic Typology 7: 157186.Google Scholar
Pakendorf, Brigitte, Bostoen, Koen and de Filippo, Cesare, 2011. Molecular perspectives on the Bantu expansion: A synthesis. Language Dynamics and Change 1: 5088.Google Scholar
Polinsky, Maria, 2013. Applicative constructions. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Redden, James E., 1979. A Descriptive Grammar of Ewondo. Carbondale, IL: Department of Linguistics, Southern Illinois University.Google Scholar
Rudd, Philip W., 2008. Sheng: The Mixed Language of Nairobi. PhD dissertation, Ball State University, Muncie, IN, USA.Google Scholar
Schadeberg, Thilo, 1981. Das Kordofanische. In Heine, Bernd, Schadeberg, Thilo C. and Wolff, Ekkehard (eds), Die Sprachen Afrikas, pp. 117128. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar
Schadeberg, Thilo C., 2003. Historical linguistics. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 143163.Google Scholar
Schuh, Russell G., 1995. Avatime noun classes and concord. Studies in African Linguistics 24: 123149.Google Scholar
Segerer, Guillaume, 2000. Description de la langue bijogo (Guinée Bissau). PhD thesis, Université de la Sorbonne Nouvelle, Paris III, Paris.Google Scholar
Segerer, Guillaume, 2002. La langue bijogo de Babaque (Guinée Bissau). Louvain and Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 2013. Comparative constructions. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online.Google Scholar
Storch, Anne, 2004. Traces of a secret language: Circumfixes in Hone (Jukun) plurals. In Akinlabi, Akinbiyi and Adesola, Oluseye (eds), Proceedings of the Fourth World Congress of African Linguistics, pp. 337349. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Storch, Anne, 2009. Cultured contact: Ritualisation and semantics in Jukun. In Möhlig, Wilhelm J. G., Seidel, Frank and Seifert, Marc (eds), Language Contact, Language Change and History Based on Language Sources in Africa, pp. 297319. Sprache und Geschichte in Africa, vol. 20. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Storch, Anne, 2011. Secret Manipulations: Language and Context in Africa. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Thomas, John Paul, 2011. A Morphophonology of Komo: Non-tonal Phenomena. SIL Electronic Working Papers, 2011–006. Dallas, TX: SIL International.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G., 1997. Ma’a (Mbugu). In Thomason, Sarah G. (ed.), Contact Languages: A Wider Perspective, pp. 469487. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Vansina, Jan, 1995. New linguistic evidence and ‘the Bantu expansion’. Journal of African History 36: 173195.Google Scholar
Voeltz, Erhard Friedrich Karl, 1977. Proto Niger-Congo Verb Extensions. PhD dissertation, UCLA, Los Angeles.Google Scholar
Vossen, Rainer, 1997. What click sounds got to do in Bantu: Reconstructing the history of language contacts in southern Africa. In Smieja, Birgit and Tasch, Meike (eds), Human Contact through Language and Linguistics, pp. 353366. Frankfurt: Peter Lang.Google Scholar
Wallis, Barry M., 1978. Diedrich Westermann’s Die westlichen Sudansprachen and the Classification of the Languages of West Africa. PhD dissertation, Northwestern University, Evanston, IL, USA.Google Scholar
Wedekind, Klaus, 1985. Thoughts when drawing a map of tone languages. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 1: 105124.Google Scholar
Westermann, Diedrich, 1911. Die Sudansprachen: Eine Sprachvergleichende Studie. Hamburg: L. Friedrichsen.Google Scholar
Williamson, Kay, 1985. How to become a Kwa language. In Makkai, Adam and Melby, Alan K. (eds), Linguistics and Philosophy: Essays in Honor of Rulon S. Wells, pp. 427443. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Williamson, Kay, 1989a. Benue-Congo overview. In Bendor-Samuel, (ed.), pp. 247274.Google Scholar
Williamson, Kay, 1989b. Niger-Congo overview. In Bendor-Samuel, (ed.), pp. 345.Google Scholar
Williamson, Kay and Blench, Roger M., 2000. Niger-Congo. In Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), African Languages: An Introduction, pp. 1142. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Wolff, Ekkehard and Gerhardt, Ludwig, 1977. Interferenzen zwischen Benue-Kongo- und Tschad-Sprachen. In Voigt, Wolfgang (ed.), XIX. Deutscher Orientalistentag, pp. 15181543. Wiesbaden: F. Steiner.Google Scholar
Zeitlyn, David and Connell, Bruce, 2003. Ethnogenesis and fractal history on an African frontier: Mambila-Njerep-Mandulu. Journal of African History 44: 117138.Google Scholar

References

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2006. Serial verb constructions in a typological perspective. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Serial Verb Constructions: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 168. Explorations in Linguistic Typology, vol. 2. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Batibo, Herman M. and Tsonope, Joe (eds), 2000. The State of Khoesan Languages in Botswana. Gaborone: Basarwa Languages Project.Google Scholar
Beach, Douglas M., 1938. The Phonetics of the Hottentot Language. Cambridge: Heffer and Sons.Google Scholar
Bell, Arthur and Washburn, Paul (eds), 2001. Khoisan: Syntax, Phonetics, Phonology, and Contact. Ithaca, NY: Cornell University.Google Scholar
Bleek, Dorothea F., 1928–1930. Bushman grammar: A grammatical sketch of the language of the ǀxam-ka-ǃk’e, Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen 19: 8198; 20: 161174.Google Scholar
Bleek, Dorothea F., 1956. A Bushman Dictionary. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society.Google Scholar
Brenzinger, Matthias and Fehn, Anne-Maria, 2013. From body to knowledge: Perception and cognition in Khwe-ǁAni and Ts’ixa. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Storch, Anne (eds), Perception and Cognition in Language and Culture, pp. 161191. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Brenzinger, Matthias and König, Christa (eds), 2010. Khoisan Languages and Linguistics: Proceedings of the First International Symposium January 4–8, 2003, Riezlern/Kleinwalsertal. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Chebanne, Anders M., 2000. The phonological system of the Cuaa language. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 1832.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 1994. African ideophones. In Hinton, Leanne, Nichols, Johanna and Ohala, John J. (eds), Sound Symbolism, pp. 178204. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 2003. An Introduction to African Languages. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Clements, George N., 2000. Phonology. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 123160.Google Scholar
Clements, George N. and Rialland, Annie, 2008. Africa as a phonological area. In Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), A Linguistic Geography of Africa, pp. 3687. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Cole, Desmond T., 1955. An Introduction to Tswana Grammar. Cape Town: Longman.Google Scholar
Collins, Chris, 2002. Multiple verb movement in ǂHoan. Linguistic Inquiry 33 (1): 129.Google Scholar
Collins, Chris, 2003. The internal structure of the verb phrase in Juǀ’hoansi and ǂHoan. Studia Linguistica 57 (1): 125.Google Scholar
Collins, Chris, 2004. The absence of the linker in double object constructions in Nǀuu. Studies in African Linguistics 33 (2): 163198.Google Scholar
Collins, Chris and Namaseb, Levi, 2011. A Grammatical Sketch of Nǀuuki with Stories. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Dale, Desmond, 1975. A Basic English–Shona Dictionary. Gwelo: Mambo Press.Google Scholar
Daniel, Michael and Moravcsik, Edith A., 2005. The associative plural. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 150153.Google Scholar
den Besten, Hans, 1996. Associative DP. In Cremers, Crit and den Dikken, Marcel (eds), Linguistics in the Netherlands 1996, pp. 1324. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dickens, Patrick J., 1994. English–Juǀ’hoan/Juǀ’hoan–English Dictionary. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Dickens, Patrick J., 1997. Relative clauses in Juǀ’hoan. In Haacke, Wilfrid H. G. and Elderkin, Edward D. (eds), Namibian Languages: Reports and Papers, pp. 107116. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Dickens, Patrick J., 2005. A Concise Grammar of Juǀ’hoan with a Juǀ’hoan–English Glossary and a Subject Index. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Dingemanse, Mark, 2012. Advances in the cross-linguistic study of ideophones. Language and Linguistics Compass 6: 654672.Google Scholar
Doke, Clement M., 1992 [1927]. Textbook of Zulu Grammar. Cape Town: Longman.Google Scholar
Doke, Clement M. et al., 1990. English–Zulu/Zulu–English Dictionary. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar
Donaldson, Bruce C., 1993. Afrikaans Grammar. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
ELCIN Church Council Special Committees, 1996. English–Ndonga Dictionary. Oniipa: ELCIN Printing Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1950. Studies in African linguistic classification VI: The click languages. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 6 (3): 223237.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1959. Africa as a linguistic area. In Bascom, William R. and Herskovitz, Melville J. (eds), Continuity and Change in African Cultures, pp. 1527. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1963. The Languages of Africa. Bloomington, IN: Research Center in Anthropology, Folklore, and Linguistics, Indiana University.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 1998. The Kalahari Basin as an object of areal typology: A first approach. In Schladt, Mathias (ed.), Language, Identity, and Conceptualization among the Khoisan, pp. 137196. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 1999. Head-initial meets head-final: Nominal suffixes in eastern and southern Bantu from a historical perspective. Studies in African Linguistics 28 (1): 4991.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2000. Noun categorization in non-Khoe lineages of Khoisan. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 63: 533.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2001. Phonological Regularities of Consonant Systems across Khoisan Lineages. Leipzig: Institut für Afrikanistik, Universität Leipzig.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2002. Die Entlehnung pronominaler Elemente des Khoekhoe aus dem ǃUi-Taa. In Schumann, Theda et al. (eds), Aktuelle Forschungen zu Afrikanischen Sprachen: Sprachwissenschaftliche Beiträge zum 14. Afrikanistentag, Hamburg, 11.–14. Oktober 2000, pp. 4361. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2004. Linear order as a basic morphosyntactic factor in non-Khoe Khoisan. Paper presented at the International Conference ‘Syntax of the World’s Languages’, Leipzig, 5–8 August, 2004. www.iaaw.hu-berlin.de/afrika/linguistik-und-sprachen/mitarbeiter/1683070/dokumente/LinearWorldSyntaxH.pdfGoogle Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2006. Structural isoglosses between Khoekhoe and Tuu: The Cape as a linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 99134. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2008a. A linguist’s view: Khoe-Kwadi speakers as the earliest food-producers of southern Africa. Southern African Humanities 20: 93132.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2008b. Greenberg’s ‘case’ for Khoisan: The morphological evidence. In Ibriszimow, Dymitr (ed.), Problems of Linguistic-Historical Reconstruction in Africa, pp. 123153. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2010a. Sprachraum and geography: Linguistic macro-areas in Africa. In Lameli, Alfred, Kehrein, Roland and Rabanus, Stefan (eds), Language and Space: An International Handbook of Linguistic Variation, vol. 2: Language Mapping, pp. 561585. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2010b. The relation between focus and theticity in the Tuu family. In Fiedler, Ines and Schwarz, Anne (eds), The Expression of Information Structure: A Documentation of its Diversity across Africa, pp. 6993. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2011. Perception verbs in Nǁng (!Ui, Tuu) and beyond. Paper presented at the third KBA workshop, Somlószőlős, Hungary, 7–9 January 2011. http://www2.hu-berlin.de/kba/events/hungary/perception-verbs.pdfGoogle Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013a. Morphology: Taa (East !Xoon dialect). In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 234241.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013b. Morphology: |Xam. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 241249.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013c. Syntax: Taa (East !Xoon dialect). In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 408419.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013d. Syntax: |Xam. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 419431.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013e. Typology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 2537.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2013f. Using minority languages to inform the historical analysis of major written languages: A Tuu perspective on the ‘give’ ~ object marker polysemy in Sinitic. Journal of Asian and African Studies 85: 4159.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2014a. Introduction: ‘Khoisan’ linguistic classification today. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 141.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2014b. The Lower Nossob varieties of Tuu: !Ui, Taa or neither? In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 257282.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, in press. Did Proto-Tuu have a paradigm of cardinal numerals? In Beyer, Klaus et al. (eds), New Perspectives on African Languages. Cologne: Rüdiger Köppe.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Fehn, Anne-Maria (eds), 2014. Beyond ‘Khoisan’: Historical Relations in the Kalahari Basin. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Loughnane, Robyn, 2012. Are there ‘Khoisan’ roots in body-part vocabulary? On linguistic inheritance and contact in the Kalahari Basin. Language Dynamics and Change 2 (2): 215258.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Pratchett, Lee J., 2014. KoMmenting on ǂKx’aoǁ’ae. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Vossen, Rainer, 2000. Khoisan. In Heine, and Nurse, (eds), pp. 99122.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom and Witzlack-Makarevich, Alena, 2013. The risks of analysis without spoken language corpora: Clause-second ke in Richtersveld Nama and Nǁng. Paper presented at the International Conference ‘Information Structure in Spoken Language Corpora (ISSLaC)’, Bielefeld, June 10–12, 2013. www.uni-bielefeld.de/lili/tagung/ISSLaC/files/Gueldemann_Witzlack_ISSLaC_handout.pdfGoogle Scholar
Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 1999. The Tonology of Khoekhoe (Nama/Damara). Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 2013. Namibian Khoekhoe (Nama/Damara): Syntax. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 325240.Google Scholar
Haacke, Wilfrid H. G., 2014. Verb serialisation in northern dialects of Khoekhoegowab: convergence or divergence? In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 125151.Google Scholar
Haacke, Wilfrid H. G. and Eiseb, Eliphas, 2002. A Khoekhoegowab Dictionary with an English–Khoekhoegowab Index. Windhoek: Gamsberg Macmillan.Google Scholar
Hagman, Roy S., 1977. Nama Hottentot Grammar. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University Publications.Google Scholar
Hahn, Theophilus, 1881. Tsuni-ǁGoam: The Supreme Being of the Khoi-Khoi. London: Trübner.Google Scholar
Hajek, John, 2005. Vowel nasalization. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 4649.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, et al. (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1976. A Typology of African Languages Based on the Order of Meaningful Elements. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and König, Christa, 2013. Syntax: Northern Khoesan: !Xun. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 293325.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Nurse, Derek (eds), 2000. African Languages: An Introduction. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert K., 1987. Articulatory modes and typological universals: The puzzle of Bantu ejectives and aspirates. In Shockey, L. and Channon, R. (eds), Festschrift for Ilse Lehiste, pp. 401413. Dordrecht: Foris.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert K., 1990. The relative markedness of click sounds: Evidence from language change, acquisition, and avoidance. Anthropological Linguistics 32 (1/2): 120138.Google Scholar
Hoffmann, Carl F., 1953. Zur Verbreitung der Zahlwortstämme in Bantusprachen, Afrika und Übersee 37: 6580.Google Scholar
Honken, Henry, 2006. Fused loans in Khoesan. Pula 20 (1): 7585.Google Scholar
Honken, Henry, 2013. Eastern ǂHoan: Morphology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 249261.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2003. Segmental phonology. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 4258.Google Scholar
Kießling, Roland, 2014. Verbal serialisation in Taa (Southern Khoisan). In Witzlack-Makarevich, Alena and Ernszt, Martina (eds), Khoisan Languages and Linguistics: Proceedings of the Second International Symposium July 6–10, 2008, pp. 3360. Riezlern/Kleinwalsertal. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2001. Universality and diversity: Ideophones from Baka and Kxoe. In Voeltz, F. K. Erhard and Kilian-Hatz, Christa (eds), Ideophones, pp. 155163. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kilian-Hatz, Christa, 2008. A Grammar of Modern Khwe (Central Khoisan). Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Kisseberth, Charles W. and Odden, David, 2003. Tone. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 5970.Google Scholar
Köhler, Oswin, 1973/1974. Neuere Ergebnisse und Hypothesen der Sprachforschung in ihrer Bedeutung für die Geschichte Afrikas. Paideuma 19/20: 162199.Google Scholar
Köhler, Oswin, 1975. Geschichte und Probleme der Gliederung der Sprachen Afrikas: Von den Anfängen bis zur Gegenwart. In Baumann, Hermann (ed.), Die Völker Afrikas und ihre Traditionellen Kulturen, part 1: Allgemeiner Teil und Südliches Afrika, pp. 135373. Wiesbaden: Franz Steiner.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2006. Focus in !Xun. In Ermisch, Sonja (ed.), Focus and Topic in African Languages, pp. 249263. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
König, Christa, 2010. Serial verb constructions in !Xun. In Brenzinger, and König, (eds), pp. 144175.Google Scholar
König, Christa and Heine, Bernd, 2008. A Concise Dictionary of Northwestern ǃXun. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Krüger, Caspar J. H., 2006. Introduction to the Morphology of Setswana. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Lanham, Leonard W., 1962. The proliferation and extension of Bantu phonemic systems influenced by Bushman and Hottentot. In Lunt, Horace G. (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguistics, Cambridge, Mass., August 27–31, 1962, pp. 382391. Janua Linguarum, Series Maior 12. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Lionnet, Florian, 2014. Demonstrative and relative constructions in Ju: A diachronic account. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 181207.Google Scholar
Louw, Johan A., 1986. Some linguistic influence of Khoi and San in the prehistory of the Nguni. In Voßen, Rainer and Keuthmann, Klaus (eds), Contemporary Studies on Khoisan, vol. 2, pp. 141168. Quellen zur Khoisan-Forschung 5. Hamburg: Helmut Buske.Google Scholar
Luijks, Carla, 2001. The Khoekhoe and/or the San: Gathering the Afrikaans substrate languages. In Bell, and Washburn, (eds), pp. 184199.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2003. The sounds of the Bantu languages. In Nurse, and Philippson, (eds), pp. 1541.Google Scholar
Malchukov, Andrej L., Haspelmath, Martin and Comrie, Bernard 2010. Ditransitive constructions: A typological overview. In Malchukov, Andrej L., Haspelmath, Martin and Comrie, Bernard (eds), Studies in Ditransitive Constructions: A Comparative Handbook, pp. 164. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Meinhof, Carl, 1905. Hottentottische Laute und Lehnworte im Kafir. Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenländischen Gesellschaft 58: 727769, 59: 3689.Google Scholar
Meinhof, Carl, 1930. Der Koranadialekt des Hottentottischen. Berlin: Reimer.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend and Roberge, Paul T. (eds), 2001/2002. Focus on Afrikaans Sociohistorical Linguistics, two volumes. Special issues of Journal of Germanic Linguistics 13 (4), 14 (1).Google Scholar
Miller, Amanda L., 2011. The representation of clicks. In van Oostendorp, Marc et al. (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Phonology, pp. 416439. Oxford and Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Miller-Ockhuizen, Amanda L., 2001. Two kinds of reduplication in Juǀ’hoansi. Afrikanistische Arbeitspapiere 66: 107118.Google Scholar
Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2010. Phonotactics of disyllabic lexical morphemes in Gǀui. Working Papers in Corpus-based Linguistics and Language Education 5: 2331. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar
Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2011. A first report on Gǀui ideophones. In Hieda, Osamu, König, Christa and Nakagawa, Hirosi (eds), Geographical Typology and Linguistic Areas, With Special Reference to Africa, pp. 279286. Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Studies in Linguistics 2. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2012. The importance of TASTE verbs in some Khoe languages. Linguistics 50 (3): 395420.Google Scholar
Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2014. The aspect system and posture verbs in Gǀui. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nienaber, Gabriël S., 1994. Pa-hulle is kreools [Pa-hulle is creole]. Khoekhoe en Afrikaans in gesprek [Khoekhoe and Afrikaans in Dialogue]. Suid-Afrikaanse Tydskrif vir Taalkunde, Supplement 21: 1467.Google Scholar
Nurse, Derek and Philippson, Gérard (eds), 2003. The Bantu Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Ono, Hitomi, 2010. Personal pronouns. In Tanaka, Jiro and Sugawara, Kazuyoshi (eds), An Encyclopedia of ǀGui and ǁGana Culture and Society, pp. 9192. Kyoto: Laboratory of Cultural Anthropology, Kyoto University.Google Scholar
Ono, Hitomi, 2014. Temporal expressions in Gǀui. Paper presented at the 5th International Symposium on Khoisan Languages and Linguistics, Riezlern, 14–16 July 2014.Google Scholar
Poulos, George (with Msimang, Christian T.), 1998. A Linguistic Analysis of Zulu. Cape Town: VIA Afrika.Google Scholar
Rapold, Christian, 2014. Areal and inherited aspects of compound verbs in Khoekhoe. In Güldemann, and Fehn, (eds), pp. 153177.Google Scholar
Samarin, William J., 1971. Survey of Bantu ideophones. African Language Studies 12: 130168.Google Scholar
Sands, Bonny E., 1998. Eastern and Southern African Khoisan: Evaluating Claims of Distant Linguistic Relationships. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Sands, Bonny E., 2001. Borrowing and diffusion as a source of lexical similarities in Khoesan. In Bell, and Washburn, (eds), pp. 200224.Google Scholar
Snyman, Jan W., 1974. The Bushman and Hottentot languages of Southern Africa. Limi 2 (2): 2844.Google Scholar
Snyman, Jan W., 1975. Žuǀ’hõasi Fonologie and Woordeboek [Žuǀ’hõasi Phonology and Dictionary]. Cape Town: Balkema.Google Scholar
Snyman, Jan W. (ed.), 1980. Bushman and Hottentot Linguistic Studies (Papers of Seminar Held on 27 July 1979). Pretoria: University of South Africa.Google Scholar
Snyman, Jan W., 2000. Palatalisation in the Tsowaa and Gǁana languages of central Botswana. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 3343.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony, 1980. Phonetic diversity in the Khoisan languages. In Snyman, (ed.), pp. 167189.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony, 1985. Phonetic and Phonological Studies of ǃXóõ Bushman. Hamburg: Buske.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony, 1986. Do the Khoi have a place in the San? New data on Khoisan linguistic relationships. Sprache und Geschichte in Afrika 7 (1): 407430.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony, 1994. A ǃXóõ Dictionary. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Traill, Anthony and Nakagawa, Hirosi, 2000. A historical !Xóõ-ǀGui contact zone: Linguistic and other relations. In Batibo, and Tsonope, (eds), pp. 117.Google Scholar
Viberg, Åke, 1984. The verbs of perception: A typological study. Linguistics 21 (1): 123162.Google Scholar
Visser, Hessel, 2001. Naro Dictionary: Naro–English, English–Naro. D’Kar: Naro Language Project.Google Scholar
Visser, Hessel, 2010. Verbal compounds in Naro. In Brenzinger, and König, (eds), pp. 176200.Google Scholar
Visser, Hessel, 2013. Naro: Morphology. In Vossen, (ed.), pp. 179206.Google Scholar
Vossen, Rainer, 1997. Die Khoe-Sprachen: Ein Beitrag zur Erforschung der Sprachgeschichte Afrikas. Cologne: Köppe.Google Scholar
Vossen, Rainer (ed.), 2013. The Khoesan Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
van Warmelo, Nicolaas Jacobus, 1989. Venda Dictionary: Tshivenda–English. Pretoria: J. L. van Schaik.Google Scholar
Westphal, Ernst O. J., 1971. The click languages of Southern and Eastern Africa. In Berry, Jack and Greenberg, Joseph H. (eds), Linguistics in Sub-Saharan Africa, pp. 367420. The Hague and Paris: Mouton.Google Scholar
Westphal, Ernst O. J., 1980. The age of ‘Bushman’ languages in Southern African pre-history. In Snyman, (ed.), pp. 5979.Google Scholar

References

Aycard, Pierre, 2014. The Use of Iscamtho by Children in White City-Jabavu, Soweto: Slang and Language Contact in an African Urban Context. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Cape Town.Google Scholar
Botha, Rudolf P., 1988. Form and Meaning in Word Formation: A Study of Afrikaans Reduplication. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Botha, Yolande, 2013. Corpus evidence of anti-deletion in Black South African English noun phrases. English Today 29 (1): 1621.Google Scholar
Branford, Jean, with Branford, William, 1991. A Dictionary of South African English, fourth edition. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Branford, William and Claughton, John, 2002. Mutual lexical borrowings among some languages of southern Africa: Xhosa, Afrikaans and English. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 199215.Google Scholar
Calteaux, Karen, 1996. Standard and Non-standard African Language Varieties in the Urban Areas of South Africa: Main Report for the STANON Research Programme. Pretoria: HSRC Publishers.Google Scholar
Childs, G. Tucker, 1997. The status of Isicamtho, an Nguni-based urban variety of Soweto. In Spears, Arthur K. and Winford, Donald (eds), The Structure and Status of Pidgins and Creoles, pp. 341370. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Christie, Agatha, 1973. A Pocket Full of Rye. London: Fontana. First edition 1953.Google Scholar
Christie, Agatha, 1976. Curtain: Poirot’s Last Case. London: Book Club Associates. First edition 1975.Google Scholar
Combrink, J. G. H., 1978. Afrikaans: Its origin and development. In Lanham, Len W. and Prinsloo, K. P. (eds), Language and Communication Studies in South Africa, pp. 6995. Cape Town: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
de Klerk, Vivian, 2006. Corpus Linguistics and World Englishes: A Study of Xhosa English. London: Continuum.Google Scholar
den Besten, Hans, 2012. Roots of Afrikaans: Selected Writings of Hans den Besten, edited by van der Wouden, Ton. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
den Besten, Hans, Luiks, Carla and Roberge, Paul, 2003. Reduplication in Afrikaans. In Kouwenberg, Silvia (ed.), Twice as Meaningful: Reduplication in Pidgins, Creoles and Other Contact Languages, pp. 271287. London: Battlebridge.Google Scholar
Deumert, Ana, Hurst, Ellen, Masinyana, Oscar and Mesthrie, Rajend, 2006. Logical connectors and discourse markers in Urban Xhosa. Paper presented at the Linguistics Society of Southern Africa conference, University of KwaZulu-Natal, South Africa.Google Scholar
Donaldson, Bruce C., 1988. The Influence of English on Afrikaans. Pretoria: Serva.Google Scholar
Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 33: 316.Google Scholar
Finlayson, Rosalie, 1984. The changing nature of isihlonipho sabafazi. African Studies 43 (2): 137146.Google Scholar
Gough, David, 1996. Black English in South Africa. In de Klerk, Vivian (ed.), Focus on South Africa. John Benjamins: Amsterdam.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2006. A forgotten heritage? Southern African Khoisan and its importance for modern linguistic research. Keynote address to the Linguistics Society of Southern Africa, University of Pretoria.Google Scholar
Güldemann, Tom, 2007. Preverbal objects and information structure in Benue-Congo. In Aboh, Enoch O., Harmann, Katharina and Zimmerman, Malte (eds), Focus Strategies in African Languages: The Interaction of Focus and Grammar in Niger-Congo and Afro-Asiatic, pp. 83112. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gunnink, Hilde, 2012. A Linguistic Analysis of Sowetan Zulu and Sowetan Tsotsi. Unpublished MA thesis, University of Leiden.Google Scholar
Harinck, G., 1969. Interaction between Xhosa and Khoe: Emphasis on the period 1620–1750. In Thompson, Leonard (ed.), African Societies in Southern Africa, pp. 145170. London: Heinemann.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert, 1990. ‘Hlonipha’ and the ambiguous woman. Anthropos 85: 455473.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert, 2002. The sociohistory of clicks in Southern Bantu. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 297315.Google Scholar
Herbert, Robert and Bailey, Richard, 2002. The Bantu languages: Sociohistorical perspectives. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 5078.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 128. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hundleby, Charles E., 1964. Xhosa–English Pronunciation in the South-East Cape. Unpublished PhD thesis, Rhodes University, Grahamstown.Google Scholar
Lanham, Leonard, 1964. The proliferation and extension of Bantu phonemic systems influenced by Bushman and Hottentot. In Lund, H. G. (ed.), Proceedings of the Ninth International Congress of Linguists, pp. 382391. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Lanham, Leonard and Macdonald, Carol, 1979. The Standard in South African History and its Social History. Heidelberg: Julius Groos.Google Scholar
Lass, Roger, 1995. South African English. In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Language and Social History: Studies in South African Sociolinguistics, pp. 89106. Cape Town: David Philip.Google Scholar
Lass, Roger and Wright, Susan, 1986. Endogeny vs. contact: Afrikaans influence on South African English. English World-Wide 7: 201223.Google Scholar
Links, Tony, 1989. So Praat ons Namaqualanders. Cape Town: Tafelberg.Google Scholar
Louw, J. A., 1983. The development of Xhosa and Zulu as languages. In Fodor, Istvan and Hagège, Claude (eds), Language Reform: History and Future. Hamburg: Buske.Google Scholar
McCormick, Kay, 2002. Code-switching, meaning and convergence in Cape Town. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 216234.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 1992. English in Language Shift: The History, Structure and Sociolinguistics of South African Indian English. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 1997. A sociolinguistic study of topicalisation phenomena in South African Black English. In Schneider, Edgar (ed.), New Englishes: Studies in Honour of Manfred Gorlach, vol. 2, pp. 119140. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2002a. Endogeny versus contact revisited: Aspectual busy in South African English. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Collecting Views on Language Change: A Donation to Roger Lass on his Sixty-Fifth Birthday, pp. 345358. Special issue of Language Sciences 24 (2–4).Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), 2002b. Language in South Africa. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2006. Anti-deletions in an L2 grammar: A study of Black South African English mesolect. English World-Wide 27 (2): 111145.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2008. Black South African English: Morphology and syntax. In Mesthrie, Rajend (ed.), Varieties of English, vol. 4: Africa, South and Southeast Asia, pp. 488500. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2010. Socio-phonetics and social change: Deracialisation of the GOOSE vowel in South African English. Journal of Sociolinguistics 14 (1): 333.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend, 2014. The sociophonetic effects of Event X: Post-apartheid Black South African English in multicultural contact with other South African Englishes. In Buschfeld, Sarah, Hoffmann, Thomas, Huber, Magnus and Kautzsch, Alexander (eds), The Evolution of Englishes: The Dynamic Model and Beyond, pp. 5869. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mesthrie, Rajend and Hurst, Ellen, 2013. Slang registers, code-switching and restructured urban varieties in South Africa: An analytic overview of tsotsitaals with special reference to the Cape Town variety. Journal of Pidgin and Creole Languages 28 (1): 103130.Google Scholar
Ngcobo, Mtholeni, 2013. Loan words (sic) classification in isiZulu: The need for a sociolinguistic approach. Language Matters 44 (1): 2138.Google Scholar
Nienaber, P. J. (ed.), 1965. Taalkundige opstelle. Cape Town: A. A. Balkema.Google Scholar
Pauwels, Jan Lodewijk, 1958. Het dialect van Aarschot en omstreken. Tongeren: Michiels.Google Scholar
Ponelis, F. A., 1985. Setselskeiding in Afrikaans. Tydskrif vir Geesteswetenskappe 25 (2): 106127.Google Scholar
Roberge, Paul, 2002. Afrikaans: Considering origins. In Mesthrie, (ed.), pp. 79103.Google Scholar
van Rooy, Bertus, 2004. Black South African English: Phonology. In Schneider, Edgar, Burridge, Kate, Kortmann, Bernd, Mesthrie, Rajend and Upton, Clive (eds), A Handbook of Varieties of English, vol. 1: Phonology, pp. 943952. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
van Rooy, Bertus, 2006. The extension of the progressive aspect in Black South African English. World Englishes 25 (1): 3764.Google Scholar
Slabbert, Sarah and Finlayson, Rosalie, 2000. ‘I’m a cleva!’: The linguistic makeup of identity in a South African urban environment. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 144: 119135.Google Scholar
Thipa, Henry, 1989. The Difference between Rural and Urban Xhosa Varieties. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Natal, Pietermaritzburg.Google Scholar
Valkhoff, Marius, 1966. Studies in Portuguese and Creole, with Special Reference to South Africa. Johannesburg: Witwatersrand University Press.Google Scholar
Wissing, Daan, 2002. Black South African English: A new English? Observations from a phonetic viewpoint. World Englishes 21 (1): 129144.Google Scholar

References

Abbi, Anvita, 1997. Languages in contact in Jharkhand. In Abbi, Anvita (ed.), Languages of Tribal and Indigenous Peoples of India: The Ethnic Space, pp. 131148. Delhi: Motilal Banarsidass.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2007. The Munda Verb: Typological Perspectives. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol. 174. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S. (ed.), 2008. The Munda Languages. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S. and Harrison, K. David, 2008. Sora. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 299380.Google Scholar
Bickel, Balthasar, Bisang, Walter and Yādava, Yogendra P., 1999. Face vs. empathy: The social foundation of Maithili verb agreement. Linguistics 37 (3): 481518.Google Scholar
Chatterji, Suniti Kumar, 1926. The Origin and Development of the Bengali Language: With a Foreword by Sir George Abraham Grierson. Third impression, 2002, New Delhi: Rupa.Google Scholar
Deeney, John J., , S.J., 1975. Ho Grammar and Vocabulary. Chaibasa: Xavier Ho Publications, St. Xavier’s High School.Google Scholar
Donegan, Patricia and Stampe, David, 2004. Rhythm and the synthetic drift of Munda. In Singh, Rajendra (ed.), The Yearbook of South Asian Languages and Linguistics, 2004, pp. 336. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Ebert, Karen, 1999. Nonfinite verbs in Kiranti languages: An areal perspective. In Yadava, Yogendra P. and Glover, Warren W. (eds), Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, pp. 371400. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.Google Scholar
Ebert, Karen, 2001. Südasien als Sprachbund. In Haspelmath, Martin, König, Ekkhard, Oesterreicher, Wulf and Raible, Wolfgang (eds), Sprachtypologie und sprachliche Universalien: Ein internationales Handbuch. Handbücher zur Sprach- und Kommunikationswissenschaft, vol. 20.2.Google Scholar
Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 316.Google Scholar
Genetti, Carol, 1999. Variation in agreement in the Nepali finite verb. In Yadava, Yogendra P. and Glover, Warren W. (eds), Topics in Nepalese Linguistics, pp. 542555. Kathmandu: Royal Nepal Academy.Google Scholar
Ghosh, Arun, 2008. Santali. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 1198.Google Scholar
Grierson, Sir George Abraham, 1903. Linguistic Survey of India, vol. V: Indo-Aryan Family, Eastern Group, part II: Specimens of the Bihari and Oriya Languages. Calcutta.Google Scholar
Grignard, A., 1924. A Grammar of the Oraon Language and Study in Oraon Idiom. Calcutta: Catholic Orphan Press.Google Scholar
Hoffmann, Revd Johann, S.J., 1905/1909. Mundari Grammar and Exercises, parts I and II. Reprint 2001, New Delhi: Gyan Publishing House.Google Scholar
Jordan-Horstmann, Monika, 1969. Sadani: A Bhojpuri Dialect Spoken in Chotanagpur. Indologia Berolinensis, vol. 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Kullū, Paulus, 1992. Tonme kol-āṅgre [The New Testament]. Ranchi: Catholic Press.Google Scholar
Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2013. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, seventeenth edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.comGoogle Scholar
Masica, Colin P., 1976. Defining a Linguistic Area: South Asia. Chicago and London: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Neukom, Lukas, 2001. Santali. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 323. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Neukom, Lukas and Patnaik, Manideepa, 2003. A Grammar of Oriya. Zürich: Universität Zürich.Google Scholar
Nowrangi, Peter Shanti, 1956. A Simple Sadāni Grammar. Ranchi: D.S.S. Book Depot.Google Scholar
Osada, Toshiki, 1991. Linguistic convergence in the Chotanagpur area. In Mullick, S. Bosu (ed.), Cultural Chotanagpur: Unity in Diversity, pp. 99119. New Delhi: Uppal Publishing House.Google Scholar
Osada, Toshiki, 1992. A Reference Grammar of Mundari. Tokyo: Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar
Osada, Toshiki, 2008. Mundari. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 99164.Google Scholar
Patnaik, Manideepa, 2008. Juang. In Anderson, (ed.), pp. 508556.Google Scholar
Peterson, John, 2010. Language contact in Jharkhand: Linguistic convergence between Munda and Indo-Aryan in eastern-central India. Himalayan Linguistics 9 (2): 5686. escholarship.org/uc/item/489929c1Google Scholar
Peterson, John, 2011. A Grammar of Kharia: A South Munda Language. Brill Studies in South and Southwestern Asian Languages, vol. 1. Leiden and Boston: Brill.Google Scholar
Pinnow, Heinz-Jürgen, 1966. A comparative study of the verb in the Munda languages. In Zide, Norman H. (ed.), Studies in Comparative Austroasiatic Linguistics. Indo-Iranian Monographs, vol. V. London, The Hague and Paris: Mouton and Co.Google Scholar
Radice, William, 1994. Bengali: A Complete Course for Beginners. Teach Yourself series. London: Hodder, and Chicago: NTC.Google Scholar
Shukla, Shaligram, 1981. Bhojpuri Grammar. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Thompson, Hanne-Ruth, 2012. Bengali. London Oriental and African Language Library, vol. 18. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Tiwari, Udai Narain, 1960. The Origin and Development of Bhojpuri. The Asiatic Society, Monograph Series, vol. X. Calcutta: The Asiatic Society.Google Scholar
Verma, Manindra K., 1991. Exploring the parameters of agreement. Language Sciences 13 (2): 125143.Google Scholar
Yadav, Ramawatar, 1996. A Reference Grammar of Maithili. Trends in Linguistics, Documentation, vol. 11. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

References

Ansaldo, Umberto, 2009. Contact Languages: Ecology and evolution in Asia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto, 2011. Metatypy in Sri Lanka Malay. Annual Review of South Asian Languages and Linguistics 2011: 316.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto and Lim, Lisa, 2006. Globalisation, empowerment and the periphery: The Malays of Sri Lanka. In Elangaiyan, R., Brown, R. McKenna, Ostler, N. D. M. and Verma, M. K. (eds), Vital Voices: Endangered Languages and Multilingualism, pp. 3946. Proceedings of the FEL X Conference. Bath: Foundation for Endangered Languages; Mysore: Central Institute of Indian Languages.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto and Matthews, Stephen, 2007. Deconstructing creole: The rationale. In Ansaldo, Umberto, Matthews, Stephen and Lim, Lisa (eds), Deconstructing Creole. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto and Nordhoff, Sebastian, 2008. Complexity and the age of languages. In Aboh, Enoch O. and Smith, Norval S. (eds), Complex Processes in New Languages, pp. 345363. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
van der Auwera, Johan, 2011. Standard Average European. In Kortmann, Bernd and van der Auwera, Johan (eds), The Languages and Linguistics of Europe: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 291306. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Bakker, Peter, 2006. The Sri Lanka Sprachbund: The newcomers Portuguese and Malay. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 135159. Houndmills, Basingstoke, UK and New York: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Bakker, Peter and Mous, Maarten, 1994. Mixed Languages: 15 Case Studies in Language Intertwining. Amsterdam: IFOTT.Google Scholar
Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., 2000. Genes, Peoples, and Languages. New York: North Point Press.Google Scholar
Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., Menozzi, Paolo and Piazza, Alberto, 1994. The History and Geography of Human Genes. Princeton: Princeton University Press.Google Scholar
Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32 (1): 316.Google Scholar
Erdosy, George, 1995. The Indo-Aryans of Ancient South Asia: Language, Material Culture and Ethnicity. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Gair, James W., 1994. Universals and the South-South Asian language area. Keynote Address, 1994 SALA meeting, Philadelphia.Google Scholar
Gair, James W., 1998. Studies in South Asian Linguistics: Sinhala and Other Languages. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Gair, James W., 2013. Sri Lankan languages in the South-South Asia linguistic area: Sinhala and Sri Lanka Malay. In Nordhoff, Sebastian (ed.), The Genesis of Sri Lanka Malay, pp. 165194. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, M., 1998. How young is Standard Average European? Language Sciences 20: 271287.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 2001. The European Linguistic Area: Standard Average European. In Haspelmath, Martin (ed.), Language Typology and Language Universals, vol. 2, pp. 14921551. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Haugen, Einar, 1971. The ecology of language. Linguistic Reporter 13 (1): 1926.Google Scholar
Krishnamurti, B., 1969. Comparative Dravidian Linguistics, pp. 309330. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 5. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Krishnamurti, B., 2003. The Dravidian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Kshatriya, Gautam K., 1995. Genetic affinities of Sri Lankan populations. Human Biology 67 (6): 843866.Google Scholar
Lefebvre, Claire (ed.), 2011. Creoles, their Substrates and Language Typology. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Matras, Yaron, 2010. Contact, convergence and typology. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 6685. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Nordhoff, Sebastian, 2009. A Grammar of Upcountry Sri Lanka Malay. PhD thesis, University of Amsterdam.Google Scholar
Reich, David, Kumarasamy, Thangaraj, Patterson, Nick, Price, Alkes L. and Singh, Lalji, 2009. Reconstructing Indian population history. Nature 461 (7263): 489494.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm D., 2006. Metatypy. In Brown, Keith (ed.), Encyclopedia of Language and Linguistics. Oxford: Elsevier.Google Scholar
Sjoberg, Andree, 1992. The Impact of Dravidian on Indo-Aryan: An Overview. Reconstructing Languages and Cultures. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol 58. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Smith, Ian R., 1979a. Convergence in South Asia: A creole example. Lingua 48: 193222.Google Scholar
Smith, Ian R., 1979b. Substrata versus universals in the formation of Sri Lanka Portuguese. Papers in Pidgin and Creole Linguistics 2: 183200.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Trudgill, Peter, 2011. Sociolinguistic Typology: Social Determinants of Linguistic Complexity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar

References

Aikhenvald, Alexandra, 2013. Areal diffusion and parallelism in drift: Shared grammaticalization patterns. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 2342.Google Scholar
Alpatov, Vladimir and Podlesskaya, Vera, 1995. Converbs in Japanese. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 465486.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory, 2005. The velar nasal (ŋ). In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 4245.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory, 2006. Towards a typology of the Siberian linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 266300. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Bengston, John D. and Blažek, Václav, 2009. Ainu and Austric: Evidence of genetic relationship. Journal of Language Relationship 2: 124.Google Scholar
Benzing, Johannes, 1955. Die tungusischen Sprachen: Versuch einer vergleichenden Grammatik. Abhandlungen der geistes- und sozialwissenschaftlichen Klasse 11: 9491099.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 1995. Verb serialization and converbs: Differences and similarities. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 137188.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 1998. Structural similarities of clause combining in Turkic, Mongolian, Manchu-Tungusic and Japanese: A typological alternative to the hypothesis of a genetic relationship. In Johanson, Lars (ed.), The Mainz Meeting: Proceedings of the Seventh International Conference on Turkish Linguistics, pp. 199223. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Bugaeva, Anna, 2015. Causative constructions in Ainu: A typological perspective with remarks on the diachrony. STUF – Language Typology and Universals (Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung) 68 (4): 439484.Google Scholar
Bulatova, Nadežda Ja. and Grenoble, Leonore A. 1999. Evenki. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 141. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Collinder, Björn, 1965. An Introduction to the Uralic Languages. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard, 1981. Negation and other verb categories in the Uralic languages. In Ikola, Osmo (ed.), Congressus Quintis Internationalis Fenno-Ugristarum, vol. VI, pp. 350355. Turku: Suomen Kielen Seura.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard, 2008. The areal typology of Chinese: Between North and Southeast Asia. In Djamouri, Redouane, Meisterernst, Barbara and Sybesma, Rint (eds), Chinese Linguistics in Leipzig, pp. 121. Collection des Cahiers de Linguistique Asie Orientale, vol. 12. Paris: École des Hautes Études en Sciences Sociales, Centre de Recherches Linguistiques sur l’Asie Orientale.Google Scholar
Croft, William, 1990. Typology and Universals. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Cysouw, Michael, 2005. Inclusive/exclusive forms for ‘we’. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 162169.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 1979. Typology of sentence negation. Linguistics 17: 79106.Google Scholar
Diessel, Holger, 2005. Distance contrasts in demonstratives. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 170173.Google Scholar
Doerfer, Gerhard, 1978. Urtungusisch ö. In Doerfer, Gerhard and Weiers, Michael (eds), Beiträge zur nordasiatischen Kulturgeschichte, pp. 66116. Tungusica, vol. 1. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Doerfer, Gerhard, 1985. Mongolo-Tungusica. Wiesbaden: Steiner.Google Scholar
Domii, Tumurtogoo, 2006. The inclusive and the exclusive in Mongolian. In Shagdarsursen, T. (ed.), Mongol ulsin ix sürgüülijn: Erdem šinžilgeenij bičig, pp. 7778. Acta Mongolica, vol. 6.267. Ulanbaatar: National University of Mongolia.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2005a. Prefixing versus suffixing in inflectional morphology. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 110113.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2005b. Order of subject, object, and verb. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 330333.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2005c. Order of genitive and noun; Order of adjective and noun. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 350357.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew, 2005d. Negative morphemes. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 454457.Google Scholar
Erdal, Marcel, 2004. A Grammar of Old Turkic. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas, 2008. Insubordination and its uses. In Nikolaeva, Irina (ed.), Finiteness: Theoretical and Empirical Foundations, pp. 366431. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Filchenko, Andrey Yury, 2007. A Grammar of Eastern Khanty. PhD dissertation, Rice University, Houston.Google Scholar
Frellesvig, Bjarke, 2010. A History of the Japanese Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John, 2008. Evidence for seven vowels in Proto-Japanese. In Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John (eds), Proto-Japanese: Issues and Prospects, pp. 1541. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
van Gelderen, Elly, 2008. Negative cycles. Linguistic Typology 12: 195243.Google Scholar
Georg, Stefan, 2007. A Descriptive Grammar of Ket (Yenisei-Ostyak), part 1: Introduction, Phonology, Morphology. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar
Gil, David, 2005. Numeral classifiers. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 226229.Google Scholar
Göksel, Aslï and Kerslake, Celia, 2005. Turkish: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Gorelova, Liliya, 2002. Manchu Grammar. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Grönbech, Karl, 1936. Der Türkische Sprachbau. Copenhagen: Levin and Munksgaard.Google Scholar
Gruzdeva, Ekaterina, 1998. Nivkh. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 111. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1986. The Altaicization of Northern Chinese. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 7697. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 1995. The converb as a cross-linguistically valid category. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 156.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin et al. (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin and König, Ekkehard (eds), 1995. Converbs in Cross-linguistic Perspective: Structure and Meaning of Adverbial Verb Forms – Adverbial Particles, Gerunds. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Heath, Jeffrey, 1998. Hermit crabs: Formal renewal of morphology by phonologically mediated affix substitution. Language 74: 728759.Google Scholar
Honti, László, 1997. Die Negation im Uralischen, parts I–III. Linguistica Uralica 2: 8196, 161176, 241252.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 1981. Korean vowel system in North Asian perspective. Hangeul 172: 129146.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 1982. On the structure of Proto-Uralic. Finnisch-ugrische Forschungen 44: 2342.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 1996. Manchuria: An Ethnic History. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne, vol. 222. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 1997. Problems of primary root structure in pre-proto-Japanic. International Journal of Central Asian Studies 2: 1430.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 2007. Typological interaction in the Qinghai Linguistic Complex. Studia Orientalia 101: 85103.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 2009. Proto-Uralic: What, where, and when? Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 258: 5778.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 2012. Mongolian. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, 2013. Personal pronouns in Core Altaic. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 211226.Google Scholar
Johanson, Lars, 1995. On Turkic converb clauses. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 313348.Google Scholar
Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine, 2010. Introduction. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 15. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Kaiser, Stefan, Ichikawa, Yasuko, Kobayashi, Noriko and Yamamoto, Hirofumi, 2001. Japanese: A Comprehensive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Ko, Seongyeon, 2012. Tongue Root Harmony and Vowel Contrast in Northeast Asian Languages. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar
Ko, Seongyeon, Whitman, John and Joseph, Andrew, 2014. Comparative consequences of the tongue root harmony analysis for proto-Tungusic, proto-Mongolic, and proto-Korean. In Robbeets, Martine and Bisang, Walter (eds), Paradigm Change in the Transeurasian Languages and Beyond, pp. 141176. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kortlandt, Frederik, 2004. Nivkh as a Uralo-Siberian language. In Hyllested, Adam, Jørgensen, Anders Richardt, Larsson, Jenny Helena and Olander, Thomas (eds), Per aspera ad asteriscos: Festschrift in Honour of Jens E. Rasmussen, pp. 285289. Innsbruck: IBS.Google Scholar
Lee, Ki-Mun and Ramsey, Robert, 2011. A History of the Korean Language. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Li, Charles N. and Thompson, Sandra A. 1989. Mandarin Chinese: A Functional Reference Grammar. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2005. Tone. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 5861.Google Scholar
Malchukov, Andrej, 2012. Tungusic converbs and a typology of taxis. In Malchukov, Andrej and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), Recent Advances in Tungusic Linguistics, pp. 213228. Turcologica, vol. 89. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Malchukov, Andrej, 2013. Verbalization and insubordination in Siberian languages. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 177208.Google Scholar
Martin, Samuel Elmo, 1988. A Reference Grammar of Japanese. Tokyo: Tuttle.Google Scholar
Martin, Samuel Elmo, 1992. A Reference Grammar of Korean. Tokyo: Tuttle.Google Scholar
Maslova, Elena, 2003a. A Grammar of Kolyma Yukaghir. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 27. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Maslova, Elena, 2003b. Tundra Yukaghir. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 372. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Miestamo, Matti, 2005. Standard Negation: The Negation of Declarative Verbal Main Clauses in a Typological Perspective. Empirical Approaches to Language Typology, vol. 31. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Murayama, Shichirō, 1992. Ainugo no kigen [Origins of the Ainu Language]. Tokyo: San’ichi Shobo.Google Scholar
Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1994. Negation in Evenki. In Kahrel, Peter and van den Berg, René (eds), Typological Studies in Negation, pp. 134. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1995. Converbs in Evenki. In Haspelmath, and König, (eds), pp. 441464.Google Scholar
Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1997. Evenki: Descriptive Grammar. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Nevskaya, Irina, 2010. Inclusive and Exclusive in Altaic Languages. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 115128. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 2012. Selection for M : T pronominals in Eurasia. In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Copies versus Cognates in Bound Morphology, pp. 4770. Brill’s Studies in Language, Cognition and Culture, vol. 2. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna and Peterson, David, 2005. Personal pronouns. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 546553.Google Scholar
Nikolaeva, Irina, 1999. Ostyak. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 305. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Norman, Jerry, 1988. Chinese. Cambridge Language Surveys. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Payne, John R., 1985. Negation. In Shopen, Timothy (ed.), Language Typology and Syntactic Description, vol. 1: Clause Structure, pp. 197242. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Poppe, Nicholas, 1954. Grammar of Written Mongolian. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Poppe, Nicholas, 1955. Introduction to Mongolian Comparative Studies. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne, vol. 110. Helsinki: Suomalais-Ugrilainen Seura.Google Scholar
Poppe, Nicholas, 1964. Der altaische Sprachtyp. In Spuler, B. et al. (eds), Mongolistik, pp. 116. Handbuch der Orientalistik, vol. 5.2. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Rickmeyer, Jens, 1989. Japanisch und der altaische Sprachtyp. Eine Synopsis struktureller Entsprechungen. Bochumer Jahrbuch zur Ostasienforschung 12: 313323.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2005. Is Japanese Related to Korean, Tungusic, Mongolic and Turkic? Turcologica, vol. 64. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2007a. How the actional suffix chain connects Japanese to Altaic. Turkic Languages 11 (1): 358.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2007b. The causative-passive in the Trans-Eurasian languages. Turkic Languages 11 (2): 235278.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2008. If Japanese is Altaic, why is it so simple? In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics. Studies in Slavic and General Linguistics, vol. 33. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2009. Insubordination in Altaic. Journal of Philology, vol. 31. Ural-Altaic Studies 1: 6179.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2010. Transeurasian: Can verbal morphology end the controversy? In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Transeurasian Verbal Morphology in a Comparative Perspective: Genealogy, Contact, Chance, pp. 81114. Turcologica, vol. 78. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2012. Shared verb morphology in the Transeurasian languages: Copy or cognate? In Johanson, Lars and Robbeets, Martine (eds), Copies vs. Cognates in Bound Morphology, pp. 427446. Brill’s Studies in Language, Cognition and Culture, vol. 3. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2013. Genealogically motivated grammaticalization. In Robbeets, and Cuyckens, (eds), pp. 147175.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2014. The development of negation in the Transeurasian languages. In Suihkonen, Pirkko and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), On Diversity and Complexity of Languages Spoken in Europe and North and Central Asia, pp. 401420. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 164. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2015. Diachrony of Verb Morphology: Japanese and the Transeurasian Languages. Trends in Linguistics, Studies and Monographs, vol. 291. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine, 2016. Insubordination and the establishment of genealogical relationship. In Evans, Nicholas and Watanabe, Honore (eds), Insubordination, pp. 209246. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 115. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Robbeets, Martine and Cuyckens, Hubert (eds), 2013. Shared Grammaticalization: with Special Focus on the Transeurasian Languages. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 132. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Rybatzki, Volker, 2003. Middle Mongol. In Janhunen, Juha (ed.), The Mongolic Languages, pp. 5782. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Shibatani, Masayoshi, 1990. The Languages of Japan. Cambridge Language Surveys. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Sohn, Ho-min, 1994. Korean. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Sohn, Ho-min, 2009. The semantics of clause linking in Korean. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra (eds), The Semantics of Clause Linking: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 285317. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 1997. Intransitive Predication. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 2005a. Predicative possession. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 474477.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 2005b. Predicative adjectives. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 478481.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 2005c. Comparative constructions. In Haspelmath, et al. (eds), pp. 490493.Google Scholar
Street, John, 1957. The Language of the Secret History of the Mongols. New Haven, CT: American Oriental Society.Google Scholar
Suihkonen, Pirkko, 2002. The Uralic languages. Fennia 180 (1/2): 165176.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1985. Vowel harmony shift in Mongolian. Lingua 67 (4): 283327.Google Scholar
Tamura, Suzuko, 2000. The Ainu Language. ICHEL Linguistic Studies, vol. 2. Tokyo: Sanseidō.Google Scholar
Vajda, Edward J., 2004. Ket. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 204. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Vovin, Alexander, 1993. A Reconstruction of Proto-Ainu. Brill’s Japanese Studies Library, vol. 4. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Vovin, Alexander, 2005. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar of Western Old Japanese, part 1: Sources, Script and Phonology, Lexicon, Nominals. Languages of Asia, vol. 3. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar
Vovin, Alexander, 2009. A Descriptive and Comparative Grammar of Western Old Japanese, part 2: Adjectives, Verbs, Adverbs, Conjunctions, Particles, Postpositions. Languages of Asia, vol. 8. Folkestone: Global Oriental.Google Scholar
Weiers, Michael, 1966. Untersuchungen zu einer Historischen Grammatik des Präklassischen Schriftmongolisch. PhD dissertation, Rheinischen Friedrich-Wilhelms-Universität, Bonn.Google Scholar
Werner, Heinrich, 1997. Die ketische Sprache. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Whaley, Lindsay J. and Li, Fengxiang, 2000. Emphatic reduplication in Oroqen and its Altaic context. Linguistics 38 (2): 355372.Google Scholar
Whitman, John Bradford, 1990. A rule of medial *-r- loss in pre-Old Japanese. In Baldi, Philip (ed.), Linguistic Change and Reconstruction Methodology, pp. 511545. Trends in Linguistics: Studies and Monographs, vol. 45. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Wohlgemuth, Jan, 2009. A Typology of Verbal Borrowings. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Wrona, Janick, 2008. The nominal and adnominal forms in Old Japanese: Consequences for a reconstruction of pre-Old Japanese syntax. In Frellesvig, Bjarke and Whitman, John (eds), Proto-Japanese: Issues and Prospects, pp. 193215. Current Issues in Linguistic Theory, vol. 294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Yap, Foong Ha and Matthews, Stephen, 2008. The development of nominalizers in East Asian and Tibeto-Burman languages. In López-Couso, María José and Seoane, Elena (eds), Rethinking Grammaticalization: New Perspectives, pp. 309341. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Zeitoun, Elizabeth, 2007. A Grammar of Mantauran (Rukai). Taipei: Institute of Linguistics, Academia Sinica.Google Scholar

References

Anderson, Gregory D. S., 1998a. Xakas. Languages of the World/Materials, vol. 251. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 1998b. Historical aspects of Yakut (Sakha) phonology. Turkic Languages 2 (2): 132.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2001. Deaffrication in the Siberian area. In Aronson, Howard I. (ed.), Non-Slavic Languages, vol. 9: Linguistic Studies, pp. 117. Columbus, OH: SLAVICA.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2003. Towards a phonological typology of native Siberia. In Holisky, Dee Ann and Tuite, Kevin (eds), Current Trends in Caucasian, East European and Inner Asian Linguistics: Papers in Honor of Howard I. Aronson, pp. 122. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2004. The languages of central Siberia: Introduction and overview. In Vajda, Edward (ed.), Languages and Prehistory of Central Siberia, pp. 1119. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2005. Language Contact in South Central Siberia. Turcologica, vol. 54. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2006. Towards a typology of the Siberian linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 266300. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2010. Perspectives on the global language extinction crisis: The Oklahoma and Eastern Siberia language hotspots. Revue Roumaine de Linguistique XLV: 129142.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2011. Language hotspots: What (applied) linguistics and education should do about language endangerment in the twenty-first century. Language and Education 25 (4): 273289.Google Scholar
Anderson, Gregory D. S., 2015. Russian colonialism and hegemony and Native Siberian languages. In Stolz, Christel (ed.), Language Empires in Comparative Perspective. Colonial and Postcolonial Linguistics, vol. 6. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Aralova, Natalia, Grawunder, Sven and Winter, Bodo, 2012. The acoustic correlates of tongue root vowel harmony in Even (Tungusic). In The 17th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 240243. Hong Kong: City University.Google Scholar
Bergsland, Knut, 1997. Aleut Grammar: Unangam Tunuganaan Achixaasiẋ. Fairbanks: Alaska Native Language Center.Google Scholar
Bulatova, N. J. and Grenoble, Leonore A., 1999. Evenki. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Castrén, M. A., 1854. Grammatik der samojedischen Sprachen. Reprinted in 1966 as Uralic and Altaic Series, vol. 53. Bloomington, IN: Indiana University.Google Scholar
Fortescue, Michael, 1998. Language Relations across the Bering Strait: Reassessing the Archaeological and Linguistic Evidence. London and Washington: Cassell.Google Scholar
Georg, Stefan, 2007. Descriptive Grammar of Ket (Yenisei-Ostyak), part 1: Introduction, Phonology, Morphology. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Gilbers, Dicky G., Nerbonne, John and Schaeken, Jos, 2000. Languages in Contact. Studies in Slavic and General Linguistics, vol. 28. Atlanta: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Grenoble, Lenore A., 2000. Morphosyntactic change: The influence of Russian on Evenki. In Gilbers, et al. (eds), pp. 105120.Google Scholar
Grenoble, Lenore A., 2010. Switch or shift: Code-mixing, contact-induced change and attrition in Russian-Evenki contacts. In Mustajoki, Arto, Protassova, Ekaterina and Vakhtin, Nikolai (eds), Sociolinguistic Approaches to Non-Standard Russian, pp. 139152. Slavica Helsingensia, vol. 40. Helsinki: Instrumentarium of Linguistics.Google Scholar
Grenoble, Lenore A., 2012a. Contact induced change and language shift: The impact of Russian and the creation of the Russian Language Empire. Paper presented at Language Empires conference, Bremen, Germany, March 2012.Google Scholar
Grenoble, Lenore A., 2012b. Areal typology and syntactic change. Vestnik TGPU (TSPU Bulletin) 116 (1): 101105.Google Scholar
Grenoble, Lenore A., 2014. Spatial semantics, case and relator nouns in Evenki. In Suihkonen, Pirkko and Whaley, Lindsay J. (eds), On Diversity and Complexity of Languages Spoken in Europe and North and Central Asia, pp. 111131. Studies in Language Companion Series, vol. 164. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Grishina, N. M., 1977. Upotreblenie slova bang v slozhnom predlozhenii ketskogo jazyka [Use of the word bang in complex sentences in Ket]. Jazyki i Toponimija 4: 102107.Google Scholar
Gruzdeva, Ekaterina, 2000. Aspects of Russian–Nivkh grammatical interference: The Nivkh imperative. In Gilbers, et al. (eds), pp. f121134.Google Scholar
Häkkinen, Jaakko, 2012. Early contacts between Uralic and Yukaghir. Mémoires de la Société Finno-Ougrienne 264: 91101.Google Scholar
Joki, A. J., 1977. Die Tungusen und ihre Kontakte mit anderen Völkern. Studia Orientalia 47: 109118.Google Scholar
Kämpfe, H. R. and Volodin, A. P., 1995. Abriss der Tschuktschischen Grammatik. Wiesbaden: Harrassowitz.Google Scholar
Kilby, David, 1980. Universals and particulars of the Evenki case system. International Review of Slavic Linguistics 5: 4574.Google Scholar
Ko, Seongyeon, 2012. Tongue Root Harmony and Vowel Contrasts in Northeast Asian Languages. PhD Dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar
Kolesnikova, V. D., 1966. Sintaksis èvenkijskogo jazyka [Evenki Syntax]. Moscow and Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar
Kostjakov, M. M., 1976. Ketskie sootvetsvija russkomu slozhnopodchinennomu predlozheniju s pridatochnym vremeni [Ket correspondences to the Russian temporally subordinate clause]. Jazyki i toponimija 1: 5663.Google Scholar
Krejnovich, E. A., 1958. Jukagirskij jazyk [The Yukaghir Language]. Moscow and Leningrad: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar
Krejnovich, E. A., 1982. Issledovanija i materialy po jukagirskomu jazyku [Research and Materials on Yukaghir]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar
Lebedeva, E. P., 1997. Orochskij jazyk [The Orochi language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 215226.Google Scholar
Mal’chukov, A., 1995. Even. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Maslova, E., 2003a. Tundra Yukaghir. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Maslova, E., 2003b. A Grammar of Kolyma Yukaghir. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Menovshchikov, G. A. and Vakhtin, N. B., 1983. Èskimosskij jazyk [The Eskimo Language]. Leningrad: Proveshchenie.Google Scholar
Nedjalkov, Igor V., 1997. Evenki. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Nikolaeva, Irina, 2006. A Historical Dictionary of Yukaghir. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nikolaeva, Irina and Tolskaja, Maria, 2001. A Grammar of Udihe. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Oskolskaya, Sofia and Stoynova, Natasha, 2013. The LA-form: Russian verbs in Nanai speech. Eesti ja soome-ugri keeleteaduse ajakiri / The Journal of Estonian and Finno-Ugric Linguistics 4 (2): 99116.Google Scholar
Pakendorf, Brigitte, 2007. Contact in the History of the Sakha (Yakuts): Linguistic and Genetic Perspectives. Leiden: LOT.Google Scholar
Petrov, N. E., 1984. Modal’nye slova v jakutskom jazyke [Modal Words in Yakut]. Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar
Prokof’ev, G. N., 1937a. Sel’kupskij (ostjako-samoedskij) jazyk [The Sel’kup language]. In Prokof’ev, G. N. (ed.), Jazyki i pis’mennost’ narodov severa, part 1, pp. 91124. Moscow and Leningrad: Uchpedgiz.Google Scholar
Prokof’ev, G. N., 1937b. Nganasanskij (tavgijskij) jazyk [The Nganasan language]. In Prokof’ev, G. N. (ed.), Jazyki i pis’mennost’ narodov severa, part 1, pp. 5374. Moscow and Leningrad: Uchpedgiz.Google Scholar
de Reuse, W., 1994. Siberian Yupik Eskimo: The Language and its Contacts with Chukchi. Salt Lake City: University of Utah Press.Google Scholar
Romanova, O. et al. (eds), 1997. Jazyki Mira: Mongol’skie jazyki, Tunguso-Man’chzhurskie jazyki, Japonskij jazyk, Korejskij jazyk. Moscow: Indrik.Google Scholar
Sem, L. I., 1997. Nanajskij jazyk [The Nanai language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 173188.Google Scholar
Skorik, P. J., 1986. Kategorii imeni sushchestvitel’nogo v chukotsko-kamchatskikh jazykakh [Categories of the noun in Chukotko-Kamchatkan languages]. In Skorik, P. J. (ed.), Paleoaziatskie jazyki. Novosibirsk: Akademija Nauk SSSR.Google Scholar
Stapert, Eugénie, 2013. Contact-Induced Change in Dolgan: An Investigation into the Role of Linguistic Data for the Reconstruction of a People’s (Pre-)History. PhD Dissertation, Leiden University.Google Scholar
Stebnitskij, S. N., 1994. Ocherki po jazyku i fol’kloru korjakov [Studies on Koryak Language and Folklore]. Moscow: Muzej antropologii i ètnografii RAN.Google Scholar
Sunik, O. P., 1997. Ul’chskij jazyk [The Ul’chi language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 248260.Google Scholar
Tenishev, È. R. et al., 1988. Sravnitel’no-istoricheskaja grammatika tjurkskikh jazykov: Morfologija [Comparative-historical Grammar of the Turk Languages: Morphology]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar
Tsintsius, V. I., 1948. Problemy sravnitel’noj grammatiki tunguso-man’chdzhurskikh jazykov [Problems in the Comparative Grammar of the Manchu-Tungus Languages]. Moscow: Nauka.Google Scholar
Tsintsius, V. I., 1997. Negidal’skij jazyk [Negidal language]. In Romanova, et al. (eds), pp. 188201.Google Scholar
Tsydendambaev, T. B., 1981. Zametki ob etnicheskikh i jazykovykh kontaktakh burjat i evenkov [Notes on the ethnic and linguistic contacts between Buryat and Evenki]. In Ubrjatova, E. I. (ed.), Jazyki i Fol’klor narodov severa [Languages and Folklore of the Peoples of the North], pp. 7091 Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar
Ubrjatova, E. I., 1985. Jazyk noril’skix dolgan [The Language of the Norilsk Dolgan]. Novosibirsk: Nauka.Google Scholar
Vajda, Edward, 2008. Head-negating enclitics in Ket. In Vajda, Edward (ed.), Subordination and Coordination Strategies in North Asian Languages, pp. 179201. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Vajda, Edward, 2012. The Dene–Yeniseian connection: A reply to G. Starostin. Journal of Language Relationship 8: 138152.Google Scholar
Zhukova, A. N., 1972. Grammatika korjakskogo jazyka [Grammar of Koryak]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar
Zhukova, A. N., 1980. Jazyk palanskikh korjakov [The Language of the Palana Koryak]. Leningrad: Nauka.Google Scholar

References

Bao, Houxing and Yan Sen 鲍厚星, 颜森, 1986. Hunan fangyan de fenqu 湖南方言的分区 [The distribution of dialects in Hunan]. Fangyan 3: 273276.Google Scholar
Bauer, Robert S., 1996. Identifying the Tai Substratum in Cantonese. In Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics V, pp. 18061844. Bangkok: Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.Google Scholar
Baxter, William and Sagart, Laurent, 2014. Old Chinese: A New Reconstruction. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Beffa, Marie-Lise and Even, Marie-Dominique, 2011. Le mandchou. In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 964976.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 1992. Das Verb im Chinesischen, Hmong, Vietnamesischen, Thai und Khmer. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 1996. Areal typology and grammaticalization: Processes of grammaticalization based on nouns and verbs in East and mainland South East Asian languages. Studies in Language 20 (3): 519597.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 2009. On the evolution of complexity: Sometimes less is more in East and mainland Southeast Asia. In Sampson, Geoffrey, Gil, David and Trudgill, Peter (eds), Language Complexity as an Evolving Variable, pp. 3449. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Bonvini, Emilio, Busuttil, Joëlle and Peyraube, Alain (eds), 2011. Dictionnaire des langues. Paris: Presses Universitaires de France.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, 2001. Language contact and areal diffusion in Sinitic languages: Problems for typology and genetic affiliation. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 328357. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, 2013. Pan-Sinitic object markers: morphology and syntax. In Guangshun, Cao, Chappell, Hilary, Djamouri, Redouane and Wiebusch, Thekla (eds), Breaking Down the Barriers: Interdisciplinary Studies in Chinese Linguistics and Beyond, two volumes, pp. 785816. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary (ed.), 2015a. Diversity in Sinitic languages. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, 2015b. Linguistic areas in China for differential object marking, passive and comparative constructions. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 1352.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, Li, Ming and Peyraube, Alain, 2007. Chinese linguistics and typology: The state of the art. Linguistic Typology 11 (1): 187211.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary and Peyraube, Alain, 2006. The analytic causatives of Early Modern Southern Min in diachronic perspective. In Ho, Dah-an, Cheung, H. S., Pan, W. and Wu, F. (eds), Shan gao shui chang: Linguistic Studies in Chinese and Neighboring Languages, pp. 9731011. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary and Peyraube, Alain, 2015. The comparative construction in Sinitic languages: Synchronic and diachronic variation. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 134152.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, Peyraube, Alain and Wu, Yunji, 2011. A comitative source for object markers in Sinitic languages: kai55 in Waxiang and kang7 in Southern Min. Journal of East Asian Linguistics 20 (4): 291338.Google Scholar
Chen, Ping, 1999. Modern Chinese: History and Sociolinguistics. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Chen, Yujie, 2015. The semantic differentiation of demonstratives in Sinitic languages. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 89109.Google Scholar
Clark, Marybeth, 1974. Submissive verbs as adversatives in some Asian languages. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, pp. 85110. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-31. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Clark, Marybeth, 1985. Asking questions in Hmong and other South-East Asian languages. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 8 (2): 6067.Google Scholar
Clark, Marybeth, 1989. Hmong and areal Southeast Asia. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 11: South-East Asian Syntax, pp. 175230. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-77. Canberra: Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Diffloth, Gérard, 2011. Les langues austroasiatiques. In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 10991101.Google Scholar
Diller, Anthony, 2008. Introduction. In Diller, A., Edmondson, J. and Luo, Y. (eds), The Tai-Kadai Languages, pp. 38. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Djamouri, Redouane, 2015. Object positioning in Tangwang. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar
Dong, Hongxun, 1907. 《古丈坪厅志》Guzhangping Tingzhi [Guzhang Gazetteer]. For more information, see parts reprinted in Wu and Shen 2010.Google Scholar
van Driem, George, 2011. The Trans-Himalayan phylum and its implications for population prehistory. Communication on Contemporary Anthropology 5: 135142.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew, 2003. Word order in Sino-Tibetan languages from a typological and geographical perspective. In Thurgood, Graham and LaPolla, Randy (eds), The Sino-Tibetan Languages, pp. 4355. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Dwyer, Arianne, 1992. Altaic elements in the Linxia dialect. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 20 (1): 160178.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and Mainland South-East Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181206.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1974. Aspect and tense in Asian languages. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 1: 1525.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1976a. Language diffusion on the Asian continent: Problems of typological diversity in Sino-Tibetan. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 3: 4965.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1976b. The double object construction in Chinese. Computational Analyses of Asian and African Languages 6: 3342.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1986. The altaicization of Northern Chinese. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 7697. Leiden: E.J. Brill.Google Scholar
Hashimoto, Mantaro, 1987. Hanyu beidongshi de lishi, quyu fazhan [The history and areal development of the Chinese passive]. Zhongguo Yuwen 1: 3649.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1997. Cognitive Foundations of Grammar. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2002. Word Lexicon of Grammaticalization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 128. Chichester, UK: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Huang, Yuanwei, 1997. The interaction between Zhuang and the Yue (Cantonese) dialects. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Solnit, David B. (eds), Comparative Kadai: The Tai Branch, pp. 5776. Dallas, TX: Summer Institute of Linguistics and the University of Texas at Arlington.Google Scholar
Janhunen, Juha, Peltomaa, Marja, Sandman, Erika and Dongzhou, Xiawu, 2008. Wutun. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Kwok, Bit-Chee, 2010. Yǔyán Jiēchù zhōng de Yǔfǎ Biànhuà: Lùn Nánníng Yùeyǔ ‘Shúyǔ + Bīnyǔ + Bǔyǔ’ Jiégòu de Láiyuán 語言接觸中的語法變化:論南寧粵語 「述語+賓語+補語」結構的來源 [Grammatical change in language contact: on the origin of the ‘verb + object + complement’ construction in Nanning Yue]. In Hung-nin Samuel Cheung 張洪年 and Song Hing Chang 張雙慶 (eds), Diachronic Change and Language Contact: Dialects in South East China 歷時演變與語言接觸 – 中國東南方言, pp. 201216. Journal of Chinese Linguistics Monograph, vol. 24.Google Scholar
Lamarre, Christine, 2015. The morphologization of verb suffixes in Northern Chinese. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China, pp. 275307. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar
Lewis, Paul (ed.), 2009. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 16th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.comGoogle Scholar
Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2015. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 18th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.comGoogle Scholar
Li, Fang-kuei, 1939. Languages and dialects. In The Chinese Yearbook (1938–1939), pp. 4446. Shanghai: Commercial Press.Google Scholar
Li, Fang-Kuei, 1977. A Handbook of Comparative Tai. Honolulu: The University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Li, Keyou and Li, Meiling, 1998. Hanyu Qinghaihua mingci de tedian. 汉语青海话名词的特点 [Features of nouns in the Chinese of Qinghai]. Qinghai Minzu Yanjiu 青海民族研究 3: 2534.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James, 1991a. Grammatization in Lahu. In Traugott, Elizabeth Closs and Heine, Bernd (eds), Approaches to Grammaticalization, vol. 2, pp. 383453. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James, 1991b. Sino-Tibetan linguistics: Present state and future prospects. Annual Review of Anthropology 20: 469504.Google Scholar
Milliken, Margaret, 1998. The classifier Gij in northern Zhuang. In Burusphat, S. (ed.), The International Conference on Tai Studies, pp. 173200. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar
Niederer, Barbara, 2011. Les langues hmong-mjen (miao-yao). In Bonvini, et al. (eds), pp. 12831299.Google Scholar
Norman, Jerry, 1982. Four notes on Chinese-Altaic linguistic contacts. Tsinghua Journal of Chinese Studies 14 (1/2): 243247.Google Scholar
Norman, Jerry, 1988. Chinese. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Norman, Jerry and Mei, Tsu-Lin, 1976. The Austroasiatics in Ancient South China: Some lexical evidence. Monumenta Serica 32: 274301.Google Scholar
Ouyang, Jueya, 1995. Liangguang Yue fangyan yu Zhuangyu de zhong zhong guanxi 两广粤方言粤语与状语的种种关系 [Different kinds of relationships between the Yue dialects of Guangxi and Guangdong and Zhuangyu]. Minzu Yuwen 民族语文 6: 4952.Google Scholar
Peyraube, Alain, 2008. Languages in contact in Northwestern China: Convergence, mixed languages or linguistic area? Paper delivered at the 16th Annual Conference of the International Association of Chinese Linguistics, Beijing, 29 May to 2 June 2008.Google Scholar
Peyraube, Alain, 2015. A comparative analysis of the case system in some Northwestern Sinitic languages. In Guangshun, Cao, Djamouri, Redouane and Peyraube, Alain (eds), Languages in Contact in Northwestern China. Monograph series of the Cahiers de linguistique Asie orientale. Paris: CRLAO.Google Scholar
Sagart, Laurent, 2005. Sino-Tibetan-Austronesian: An updated and improved argument. In Sagart, L., Blench, R. and Sanchez-Mazas, A. (eds), The Peopling of East Asia: Putting together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics, pp. 161176. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar
Shearer, Walter and Hongkai, Sun, 2002. Speakers of the Non-Han Languages and Dialects of China. Lewiston: Edwin Mellen Press.Google Scholar
de Sousa, Hilário 2013. Nánníng Shàngyáo Pínghuà de Yīxiē Míngcí Duǎnyǔ Xiànxiàng Duìbǐ Yánjiū 南宁上尧平话的一些名词短语现象对比研究 [Comparative studies of some noun phrase phenomena in Nánníng Shàngyáo Pínghuà]. In Liú 刘丹青, Dānqīng, Zhōu 周磊, Léi and Xuē 薛才德, Cáidé (eds), Hànyǔ Fāngyán Yǔfǎ Yánjiū de Xīnshìjiǎo – Dì Wǔ Jiè Hànyǔ Fāngyán Yǔfǎ Guójì Xuéshù Yántǎohuì Lùnwénjí 汉语方言语法研究的新视角 – 第五届汉语方言语法国际学术研讨会论文集 [New Viewpoints in the Studies of Grammar of the Chinese Dialects: Proceedings of the Fifth International Conference on Syntax of Chinese Dialects], pp. 141160. Shanghai: Shanghai Educational Publishing House 上海教育出版社.Google Scholar
de Sousa, Hilario, 2015. Language contact in Nanning: From the point of view of Nanning Pinghua and Nanning Cantonese. In Chappell, (ed.), pp. 157189.Google Scholar
Sposato, A., 2014. Word order in Miao-Yao (Hmong-Mien). Linguistic Typology 18 (1): 83140.Google Scholar
Stassen, Leon, 1985. Comparison and Universal Grammar. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Stolz, Thomas, 1999. Comitatives vs. instrumentals vs. agents. In Bisang, Walter (ed.), Aspects of Typology and Universals, pp. 153174. Studia Typologica, vol. 1. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.Google Scholar
Wu, Fuxiang, 2013. Nanfang minzu yuyan bijiaoju yuxu de yanbian he bianyi 南方民族语言比较语序的演变和变异 [Development and variation in the word order of comparatives in the minority languages of Southern China]. In Guangshun, Cao, Chappell, Hilary, Djamouri, Redouane and Wiebusch, Thekla (eds), Breaking Down the Barriers: Interdisciplinary Studies in Chinese Linguistics and Beyond, two volumes, pp. 831864. Taipei: Academia Sinica.Google Scholar
Wu, Yunji, 2005. A Synchronic and Diachronic Study of the Grammar of the Chinese Xiang Dialects. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Wu, Yunji and Cao, Xilei, 2008. Xiangxi Waxianghua he Xinan guanhua biao chuzhishi de ‘gen’ suo yinfa de yiwen 湘西瓦乡话和西南官话表处置的‘跟’所引发的疑问 [The unusual case of [gēn] 跟 used as a disposal marker in Waxiang and the Southwestern Mandarin of Western Hunan, China]. Zhongguo Yuwen Yanjiu 《中國語文研究》[Chinese Language Studies]. 26 (2): 114.Google Scholar
Wu, Yunji and Shen, Ruiqing, 2010. 湘西古丈瓦乡话调查报告Xiangxi Guzhang Waxianghua Diaocha Baogao [Research Report on the Waxiang Language of Guzhang, Western Hunan]. Shanghai: Jiaoyu Chubanshe.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stephen and Li, Rong (eds), 1987. Language Atlas of China 中国语言地图集. Zhongguo Yuyan Dituji. Hong Kong: Longman.Google Scholar
Xiong, Zhenghui and Zhang, Zhenxing, 2008. 汉语方言的分区 Hanyu fangyan de fenqu [The distribution of Chinese dialects]. 方言 Fangyan 2: 97108.Google Scholar
Xu, Liejiong and Peyraube, Alain, 1997. On the double-object construction and the oblique construction in Cantonese. Studies in Language 21 (1): 105127.Google Scholar
Yue, Anne O., 2003. Chinese dialects: Grammar. In Thurgood, Graham and LaPolla, Randy (eds), The Sino-Tibetan Languages, pp. 84125. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Yue-Hashimoto, Anne, 1991. The Yue dialects. In Wang, William S-Y. (ed.), Languages and Dialects of China, pp. 294324. Journal of Chinese Linguistics, Monograph Series, vol. 3. Berkeley: Project on Linguistic Analysis.Google Scholar
Zhang, Zhenxing (ed.), 2012. Zhongguo Yuyan Dituji Di’er ban 中国语言地图集: 第二版 [Language Atlas of China], second edition. Beijing: Commercial Press.Google Scholar
Zhu, Yongzhong, Chuluu, Ujiyediin, Slater, Keith and Stuart, Kevin, 1997. Gangou Chinese dialect: A comparative study of a strongly altaicized Chinese dialect and its Mongolic neighbor. Anthropos 92: 433450.Google Scholar

References

Abbi, Anvita, 2012. Dictionary of the Great Andamanese Language: English–Great Andamanese–Hindi. Delhi: Ratna Sagar.Google Scholar
Abbi, Anvita, 2013. A Grammar of the Great Andamanese Language: An Ethnolinguistic Study. Leiden: Brill Academic.Google Scholar
Abramson, Arthur S. and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2009. A fuzzy boundary between tone languages and voice-register languages. In Fant, Gunnar, Fujisaki, Hiroya and Shen, Jiaxuen (eds), Frontiers in Phonetics and Speech Science, pp. 149155. Beijing: The Commercial Press.Google Scholar
Adelaar, Alexander and Himmelmann, Nikolaus P., 2005. The Austronesian Languages of Asia and Madagascar. London: Routledge Curzon.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2000. Classifiers: A Typology of Noun Categorization Devices. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Alves, Mark J., 2001. What’s so Chinese about Vietnamese? In Thurgood, Graham W. (ed.), Papers from the Ninth Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, pp. 221242. Phoenix: Arizona State University.Google Scholar
Alves, Mark J., 2006. A Grammar of Pacoh: A Mon-Khmer Language of the Central Highlands of Vietnam (Shorter Grammars). Pacific Linguistics, vol. 580. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Alves, Mark J., 2009. Sino-Vietnamese grammatical vocabulary and sociolinguistic conditions for borrowing. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 19.Google Scholar
Alves, Mark J., 2015. Morphological functions among Mon-Khmer languages: Beyond the basics. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 524550.Google Scholar
Ammerman, Albert J. and Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi L., 1971. Measuring the rate of spread of early farming in Europe. Man 6 (4): 674688.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto, 1999. Comparative Constructions in Sinitic: Areal Typology and Patterns of Grammaticalisation. Dissertation, Stockholm University, Stockholm.Google Scholar
Ansaldo, Umberto and Matthews, Stephen J., 2001. Typical creoles and simple languages: The case of Sinitic. Linguistic Typology 5 (2/3): 311324.Google Scholar
Bauer, Robert S., 1996. Identifying the Tai substratum in Cantonese. In Pan-Asiatic Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, vol. V, pp. 18061844. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar
Bellwood, Peter, 1992. Southeast Asia before prehistory. In Tarling, (ed.), vol. 1, pp. 55136.Google Scholar
Benjamin, Geoffrey, 2006. Hervey’s ‘Kenaboi’: Lost Malayan language or forest-collecting taboo jargon? Paper presented at the 10th International Association of Historians of Asia Conference, Singapore, October 1986.Google Scholar
Bisang, Walter, 1991. Verb serialization, grammaticalization and attractor positions in Chinese, Hmong, Vietnamese, Thai and Khmer. In Seiler, Hansjakob and Premper, Waldfried (eds), Partizipation: Das sprachliche Erfassen von Sachverhalten, pp. 509562. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Blench, Roger, 2011. The role of agriculture in the evolution of Mainland Southeast Asian language phyla. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 125152.Google Scholar
Blench, Roger, 2015. The origins of nominal classification markers in MSEA languages: Convergence, contact and some African parallels. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 551578.Google Scholar
Blench, Roger and Post, Mark W., 2013. Re-thinking Sino-Tibetan phylogeny from the perspective of North East Indian languages. In Hill, Nathan and Owen-Smith, Thomas (eds), Trans-Himalayan Linguistics, pp. 71104. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 1994. The Austronesian settlement of Mainland Southeast Asia. In Adams, Karen L. and Hudak, Thomas John (eds), Papers from the Second Annual Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society, pp. 2583. Tempe, AZ: Arizona State University.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2013a. Southeast Asian islands and Oceania: Austronesian linguistic history. In Bellwood, Peter (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Global Human Migration, vol. 1: Prehistory. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2013b. The Austronesian Languages (revised edition). Canberra: Asia-Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Bo, Wenze, 2002. A Study of Mulao. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar
Bon, Noëllie, 2014. Une Grammaire de la Langue Stieng, Langue en Danger du Cambodge et du Vietnam. Dissertation, Université Lumière Lyon 2, Lyon.Google Scholar
Bradley, David, 1995. Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 13: Studies in Burmese Languages. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-83. Canberra: Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Bradley, David, 2007. Language endangerment in China and Mainland Southeast Asia. In Brenzinger, Matthias (ed.), Language Diversity Endangered, pp. 278302. Trends in Linguistics: Studies and Monographs. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
van Breugel, Seino, 2014. A Grammar of Atong. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2009. Contact-induced change? Register in three Cham dialects. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2: 122.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc and Kirby, James, 2015. Re-assessing tonal diversity and geographical convergence in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 80108.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, Dương, Nguyễn Duy and Hùng, Nguyễn Khắc, 2010. A laryngographic and laryngoscopic study of Northern Vietnamese tones. Phonetica 67: 147169.Google Scholar
Buakaw, Supakit, 2012. A Phonological Study of Palaung Dialects Spoken in Thailand and Myanmar, with Focuses on Vowels and Final Nasals. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar
Bulbeck, David, 2011. Biological and cultural evolution in the population and culture history of Homo sapiens in Malaya. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 207255.Google Scholar
Burenhult, Niclas, 2005. A Grammar of Jahai. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 566. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Burenhult, Niclas, 2006. Body part terms in Jahai. Language Sciences 28: 162180.Google Scholar
Burenhult, Niclas, Kruspe, Nicole and Dunn, Michael, 2011. Language history and culture groups among Austroasiatic-speaking foragers of the Malay Peninsula. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 257275.Google Scholar
Burenhult, Niclas and Majid, Asifa, 2011. Olfaction in Aslian ideology and language. The Senses and Society 6 (1): 1929.Google Scholar
Burenhult, Niclas and Wegener, Claudia, 2009. Preliminary notes on the phonology, orthography and vocabulary of Semnam (Austroasiatic, Malay Peninsula). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 283312.Google Scholar
Burling, Robbins, 2004. The Language of the Modhipur Mandi (Garo), vol. I: Grammar. New Delhi: Bibliophile South Asia.Google Scholar
Butler, Becky, 2015. Approaching a phonological understanding of the sesquisyllable with phonetic evidence from Khmer and Bunong. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 437493.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1979. Further typological studies in southeast Asian languages. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 3, pp. 142. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Cavalli-Sforza, Luigi, Menozzi, Paolo and Piazza, Alberto, 1993. Demic expansions and human evolution. Science 259 (5095): 639646.Google Scholar
Chappell, Hilary, 2001. Language contact and areal diffusion in Sinitic languages. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 328357. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Chappell, John and Shackleton, N. J., 1986. Oxygen isotopes and sea level. Nature 324 (6093): 137140.Google Scholar
Chen, Guoqing, 2005. Kemieyu yanjiu [A Study of Kemie]. Beijing: Minzu chubanshe.Google Scholar
Clark, Marybeth, 1989. Hmong and areal South-East Asia. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, vol. 11: Southeast Asian Syntax, pp. 175230. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Clark, Marybeth and Prasithrathsint, Amara, 1985. Synchronic lexical derivation in Southeast Asian languages. In Ratanakul, Suriya and Premsrirat, Suwilai (eds), Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies Presented to André-G. Haudricourt, pp. 3481. Bangkok: Mahidol University.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard (ed.), 1990. The Major Languages of East and South-East Asia. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Comrie, Bernard, 2007. Areal typology of mainland Southeast Asia: What we learn from the WALS maps. In Kullavanijaya, Pranee (ed.), Trends in Thai Linguistics, pp. 1847. Special issue of Manusya 13. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University.Google Scholar
Cooke, Joseph R., 1968. Pronominal Reference in Thai, Burmese and Vietnamese. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Coupe, A. R., 2003. A Phonetic and Phonological Description of Ao: A Tibeto-Burman Language of Nagaland, North-East India. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Coupe, A. R., 2007. A Grammar of Mongsen Ao. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 39. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 2008. An exercise in ‘a posteriori’ language sampling. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 61 (3): 208220.Google Scholar
Diffloth, Gérard, 2011. Austroasiatic word histories: Boat, husked rice and taro. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 295313.Google Scholar
Diller, Anthony V. N., Edmondson, Jerold A. and Luo, Yongxian, 2008. The Tai-Kadai Languages. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, Hetherington, Rebecca, McElvenny, James and Dawson, Virginia, 2013. World Phonotactics Database. Canberra: Australian National University. http://phonotactics.anu.edu.auGoogle Scholar
van Driem, George, 2007. Austroasiatic phylogeny and the Austroasiatic homeland in light of recent population genetic studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 37: 114.Google Scholar
van Driem, George, 2011. Rice and the Austroasiatic and Hmong-Mien homelands. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 361390.Google Scholar
van Driem, George, 2013. Trans-Himalayan. In Hill, Nathan and Owen-Smith, Thomas (eds), Trans-Himalayan Linguistics. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://wals.infoGoogle Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Burenhult, Niclas, Kruspe, Nicole, Tufvesson, Sylvia and Becker, Neele, 2011. Aslian linguistic prehistory: A case study in computational phylogenetics. Diachronica 28 (3): 291323.Google Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Kruspe, Nicole and Burenhult, Niclas, 2013. Time and place in the prehistory of the Aslian languages. Human Biology 85: 383399.Google Scholar
Edmondson, Jerold A. and Esling, John H., 2006. The valves of the throat and their functioning in tone, vocal register and stress: laryngoscopic case studies. Phonology 23 (2): 157191.Google Scholar
Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J., 2007. The languages of Vietnam: Mosaics and expansions. Language and Linguistics Compass 1 (6): 727749.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181206.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2006. Languages as historical documents: The endangered archive in Laos. South East Asia Research 14 (3): 471488.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2007. A Grammar of Lao. Mouton Grammar Library, vol. 38. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J. (ed.), 2011a. Dynamics of Human Diversity: The Case of Mainland Southeast Asia. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2011b. Introduction: Dynamics of Human Diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.) pp. 18.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2011c. Linguistic diversity in mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 6380.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2013. Relationship Thinking: Agency, Enchrony, and Human Sociality. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J., 2015. The Utility of Meaning: What Words Mean and Why. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J. and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2015. The Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: The State of the Art. Berlin and Boston: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Enfield, N. J. and Diffloth, Gérard, 2009. Phonology and sketch grammar of Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 38 (1): 369.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 2014. Arem, a Vietic Language. Mon-Khmer Studies 43 (1): 115.Google Scholar
Fix, Alan, 2011. Origin of genetic diversity among Malaysian Orang Asli: An alternative to the demic diffusion model. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 277291.Google Scholar
Gai, Xingzhi, 2002. A Study of Tanglang. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar
Giaphong, Suchada, 2004. Plang Grammar as Spoken in Huay Namkhun Village, Chiang Rai Province. MA thesis, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar
Gil, David, 2015. The Mekong-Mamberamo linguistic area. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 262351.Google Scholar
Goddard, Cliff, 2005. The Languages of East and Southeast Asia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Grant, Anthony and Sidwell, Paul, 2005. Chamic and Beyond: Studies in Mainland Austronesian Languages. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Grinevald, Colette, 2000. A morphosyntactic typology of classifiers. In Senft, Gunter (ed.), Systems of Nominal Classification, pp. 5092.Google Scholar
Hạ, Kiều Phương, 2010. Prosody of Vietnamese from an interactional perspective: ờ, ừ and vâng in backchannels and requests for information. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 3 (1): 5676.Google Scholar
Hạ, Kiều Phương, 2013. Prosodic means in repair initiation as an activity in Northern Vietnamese conversation. In Hole, Daniel and Löbel, Elisabeth (eds), Linguistics of Vietnamese: An International Survey, pp. 3554. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary Rosamond, 1969. Sibling terms as used by marriage partners. Southwestern Journal of Anthropology 25 (3): 228235.Google Scholar
Haiman, John, 2011. Cambodian: Khmer. London Oriental and African Language Library, vol. 16. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hajek, John, 1998. Kenaboi: An extinct unclassified language of the Malay Peninsula. Mon-Khmer Studies 28: 137149.Google Scholar
Hartmann, John, 1998. A linguistic geography and history of Tai Meuang-Fai (Ditch-Dike) techno-culture. Language and Linguistics 16 (2): 67101.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, Dryer, Matthew S., Gil, David and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1952. The main features of Cambodian pronunciation. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 14: 149174.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics of South East Asian languages. Lingua 15: 400434.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1967. Grammar and tone in South East Asian languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx-Universität Leipzig 16 (1/2): 171178.Google Scholar
Higbie, James and Thinsan, Snea, 2003. Thai Reference Grammar: The Structure of Spoken Thai. Bangkok: Orchid Press.Google Scholar
Higham, C., 2002. Early Cultures of Mainland Southeast Asia. Bangkok: River Books.Google Scholar
Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2011. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 3. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar
Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2012. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 4. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar
Hyslop, Gwendolyn, Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2013. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 5. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar
Iwasaki, Shoichi and Horie, Preeya Ingkaphirom, 2005. A Reference Grammar of Thai. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Jacquesson, François, 2004. Le Deuri: Langue Tibéto-Birmane d’Assam. Leuven, Paris and Dudley, MA: Peeters.Google Scholar
Jenny, Mathias and Sidwell, Paul (eds), 2015. Handbook of the Austroasiatic Languages. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Jonsson, Hjorleifur, 2011. Ethnology and the issue of human diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 109122.Google Scholar
Jonsson, Hjorleifur, 2014. Slow Anthropology: Negotiating Difference with the Iu Mien. Ithaca, NY: Cornell Southeast Asia Program Publications.Google Scholar
Konnerth, Linda, 2014. A Grammar of Karbi. Dissertation, University of Oregon, Eugene, OR.Google Scholar
Kosaka, Ryuichi, 2000. A Descriptive Study of the Lachi Language: Syntactic Description, Historical Reconstruction and Genetic Relation. Doctoral dissertation, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies, Tokyo.Google Scholar
Kölver, Ulrike, 1991. Local prepositions and serial verb constructions in Thai. In Seiler, Hansjakob and Premper, Waldfried (eds), Partizipation: Das sprachliche Erfassen von Sachverhalten, pp. 485508. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Kruspe, Nicole, 2004. A Grammar of Semelai. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Larish, Michael D., 2005. Moken and Moklen. In Himmelmann, Nikolaus P. and Adelaar, Alexander (eds), The Austronesian Languages of Asia and Madagascar, pp. 513533. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar
Lebar, Frank, Hickey, Gerald and Musgrave, John, 1964. Ethnic Groups of Mainland Southeast Asia. New Haven, CT: HRAF Press.Google Scholar
Li, Daqin, 2003. A Study of Geman. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar
Li, Daqin, 2004. Sulong Yu Yan Jiu [A Study of Sulong]. Beijing: Minzu Chubanshe.Google Scholar
Li, Yongsui, 2003. A Study of Sangkong. Beijing: The Nationalities Press.Google Scholar
Lidz, Liberty A., 2010. A Descriptive Grammar of Yongning Na (Mosuo). Doctoral dissertation, University of Texas at Austin.Google Scholar
Luong, H. V., 1988. Discursive practices and power structure: Person-referring forms and sociopolitical struggles in colonial Vietnam. American Ethnologist 15 (2): 239253.Google Scholar
Luong, H. V., 1990. Discursive Practices and Linguistic Meanings: The Vietnamese System of Person Reference. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Majid, Asifa and Burenhult, Niclas, 2014. Odors are expressible in language, as long as you speak the right language. Cognition 130 (2): 266270.Google Scholar
Mao, Zongwu and Li, Yunbing, 2002. A Study of Jiongnai. Beijing: Central Nationalities University Press.Google Scholar
Mao, Zongwu and Li, Yunbing, 2007. Younuoyu Yanjiu [A Study of Younuo]. Beijing: Minzu University of China Publishing House.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. In Hyman, Larry M. (ed.), Southern California Occasional Papers in Linguistics, no. 1, pp. 7295. Los Angeles: University of Southern California.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 1991. Areal and universal dimensions of grammatization in Lahu. In Traugott, Elizabeth Closs and Heine, Bernd (eds), Approaches to Grammaticalization, pp. 383453. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 2003a. Handbook of Proto-Tibeto-Burman. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 2003b. Aslian: Mon-Khmer of the Malay Peninsula. Mon-Khmer Studies 33: 158.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James A., 2015. Re-examining the genetic position of Jingpho: Putting flesh on the bones of the Jingpho/Luish relationship. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 109150.Google Scholar
Mayuree, Thawornpat, 2006. Gong: An Endangered Language of Thailand. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar
Michaud, Jean (ed.), 2010. Editorial: Zomia and beyond (Special Issue). Journal of Global History 5 (2): 187214.Google Scholar
Morey, Stephen, 2005. The Tai Languages of Assam: A Grammar and Texts. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Morey, Stephen, 2010. Turung: A Variety of Singpho Language Spoken in Assam. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2008. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 1. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar
Morey, Stephen and Post, Mark W. (eds), 2010. North East Indian Linguistics, vol. 2. New Delhi: Cambridge University Press India.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter (ed.), 2008. From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nonaka, Angela M., 2004. The forgotten endangered languages: Lessons on the importance of remembering from Thailand’s Ban Khor sign language. Language in Society 33 (5): 737767.CrossRefGoogle Scholar
O’Connor, Richard A., 1995. Agricultural change and ethnic succession in Southeast Asian states: A case for regional anthropology. The Journal of Asian Studies 54 (4): 968996.Google Scholar
Oppenheimer, Stephen, 2011. MtDNA variation and southward Holocene human dispersals within Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 81108.Google Scholar
Oxenham, Marc and Tayles, Nancy, 2006. Bioarchaeology of Southeast Asia. New York: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Phattharathanit, Srichomthong, 2012. Identity maintenance in Lanna (Northern Thai). Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 5: 6784.Google Scholar
Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2009. Proto-Southwestern-Thai: A new reconstruction. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 2: 119143.Google Scholar
Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2015. Typologizing sesquisyllabicity: The role of structural analysis in the study of linguistic diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 494523.Google Scholar
Ploykaew, Pornsawan, 2001. Samre Grammar. Doctoral dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar
Post, Mark W., 2007. A Grammar of Galo. Dissertation, La Trobe University, Melbourne.Google Scholar
Post, Mark W., 2011. Prosody and typological drift in Austroasiatic and Tibeto-Burman: Against ‘Indosphere’ and ‘Sinosphere’. In Srichampa, S., Sidwell, Paul and Gregerson, K. J. (eds), Austroasiatic Studies: Papers from International Conference on Austroasiatic Linguistics (ICAAL4), pp. 198211. Special issue of Mon-Khmer Studies 3. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Post, Mark W. 2015. Morphosyntactic reconstruction in an areal-historical context: A pre-historical relationship between North East India and Mainland Southeast Asia? In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 205261.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 2010. Hmong-Mien Language History. Studies in Language Change, vol. 8. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 2015. Word-initial prenasalization in Southeast Asia: A historical perspective. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 2948.Google Scholar
Sagart, Laurent, 2011. The Austroasiatics: East to west or west to east? In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 345359.Google Scholar
Sagart, Laurent, Blench, Roger and Sanchez-Mazas, A. (eds), 2005. The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics. New York: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar
Samarina, Irina, 2011. Jazyki gelao: Materialy k sopostavitel’nomu slovarju kadajskich jazykov [Gael Languages: Materials for a Comparative Dictionary of Kadai Languages]. Moskva: Academia.Google Scholar
van Schendel, Willem, 2002. Geographies of knowing, geographies of ignorance: Jumping scale in Southeast Asia. Environment and Planning D: Society and Space 20 (6): 647668.Google Scholar
Scott, James C., 2009. The Art of Not Being Governed: An Anarchist History of Upland Southeast Asia. New Haven, CT: Yale University Press.Google Scholar
Seng Mai, Ma, 2012. A Descriptive Grammar of Wa. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar
Shee, Naw Hsar, 2008. A Descriptive Grammar of Geba Karen. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar
Shintani, Tadahiko, 2008. The Palaung Language: the Comparative Lexicon of its Southern Dialects. Tokyo: Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa (ILCCA).Google Scholar
Shorto, H. L., 1960. Word and syllable pattern in Palaung. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 23 (3): 544557.Google Scholar
Shorto, H. L., 2006. A Mon-Khmer Comparative Dictionary, edited by Sidwell, Paul. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Sidnell, Jack and Shohet, Merav, 2013. The problem of peers in Vietnamese interaction. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 19 (3): 618638.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul, 2009. Proto-Mon-Khmer vocalism: Moving on from Shorto’s ‘alternances’. Journal of the Southeast Asian Linguistics Society 1: 205214.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul, 2013. Southeast Asian Mainland: Linguistic history. In Bellwood, Peter (ed.), The Encyclopedia of Global Human Migration, vol. 1: Prehistory, pp. 259268. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul, 2015. Local drift and areal convergence in the restructuring of Mainland Southeast Asian languages. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 4979.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul and Blench, Roger, 2011. The Austroasiatic Urheimat: The southeastern riverine hypothesis. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 315343.Google Scholar
Simpson, Andrew (ed.), 2007. Language and National Identity in Asia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Sophana, Srichampa, 2008. Patterns of polite expressions in Vietnamese. The Mon-Khmer Studies Journal 38: 117147.Google Scholar
de Sousa, Hilário, 2015. The Far Southern Sinitic languages as part of Mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 352436.Google Scholar
Srisakorn, Preedaporn, 2008. So (Thavung) Grammar. Dissertation, Mahidol University, Bangkok.Google Scholar
Stolz, Thomas, 2002. No Sprachbund beyond this line! On the age-old discussion of how to define a linguistic area. In Ramat, Paulo and Stolz, Thomas (eds), Mediterranean Languages: Paper from the MEDTYP Workshop, Tirrenia, June 2000, pp. 259281. Bochum: Brockmeyer.Google Scholar
Sun, Hongkai and Liu, Guangkun, 2009. A Grammar of Anong: Language Death under Intense Contact, edited translation and annotation, with translation, editing, annotation and expansion by Thurgood, Graham, Li, Fengxiang and Thurgood, Ela. Languages of the Greater Himalayan Region. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Suwilai, Premsrirat, 1987. Khmu, a Minority Language of Thailand. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Suwilai, Premsrirat, 1998. Language maintenance and language shift in minority languages of Thailand. In Matsumura, Kazuto (ed.), Studies in Endangered Languages, pp. 191211. Tokyo: Hituzi Syobo.Google Scholar
Suwilai, Premsrirat, 2007. Endangered languages of Thailand. International Journal of the Sociology of Language 186: 7593.Google Scholar
Suwilai, Premsrirat, 2008. Orthography development: A tool for revitalizing and maintaining ethnic minority languages. Journal of Language and Culture 26: 1834.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, Kam, Raw, Lindell, Kristina and Lundstrom, Håkan, 2013. Dictionary of Kammu Yuan Language and Culture. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Tarling, Nicholas, 1992. The Cambridge History of Southeast Asia: from Early Times to c. 1800, vol. 1. Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham, 1998. The development of the Chamic vowel system: the interaction of inheritance and borrowing. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 15: Further Chamic Studies, pp. 6190. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham, 1999. From Ancient Cham to Modern Dialects: Two Thousand Years of Language Contact and Change. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham, 2010. Hainan Cham, Anong, and Eastern Cham: Three languages, three social contexts, three patterns of change. Journal of Language Contact, Varia 3: 3961.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham and La Polla, Randy J., 2003. The Sino-Tibetan Languages. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham, Thurgood, Ela and Li, Fengxiang, 2014. A Grammatical Sketch of Hainan Cham: History, Contact, and Phonology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Tooley, M. J. and Shennan, Ian (eds), 1987. Sea Level Changes. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Umaporn, Sungkaman, 2007. Backchannel response in Mon conversation. Mon-Khmer Studies 37: 6785.Google Scholar
Vittrant, Alice, 2015. Expressing motion: The contribution of Southeast Asian languages with reference to East Asian languages. In Enfield, and Comrie, (eds), pp. 579625.Google Scholar
Vittrant, Alice and Watkins, Justin (eds), in press. Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia Linguistic Area: Grammatical Sketches. Boston and Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Voris, Harold K., 2000. Maps of Pleistocene sea levels in Southeast Asia: Shorelines, river systems and time durations. Journal of Biogeography 27 (5): 11531167.Google Scholar
Watkins, Justin, 2002. The Phonetics of Wa: Experimental Phonetics, Phonology, Orthography and Sociolinguistics. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Watkins, Justin (ed.), 2005. Studies in Burmese Linguistics. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Watkins, Justin, 2013. Dictionary of Wa, two volumes. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Wayesha, Ahsi James, 2010. A Phonological Description of Leinong Naga. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar
White, Joyce C., 2011. Cultural diversity in Mainland Southeast Asia: A view from prehistory. In Enfield, (ed.), pp. 946.Google Scholar
Wnuk, Ewelina, 2016. Semantic Specificity of Perception Verbs in Maniq. Nijmegen: Radboud University.Google Scholar
Wnuk, Ewelina and Majid, Asifa, 2014. Revisiting the limits of language: The odor lexicon of Maniq. Cognition 131 (1): 125138.Google Scholar
Yip, Moira, 2002. Tone. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Yu, Defen, 2007. Aspects of Lisu Phonology and Grammar, a Language of Southeast Asia. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

References

Abercrombie, David, 1967. Elements of General Phonetics. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Abramson, Arthur, L-Thongkum, Theraphan and Nye, Patrick W., 2004. Voice register in Suai (Kuai): An analysis of perceptual and acoustic data. Phonetica 61: 147171.Google Scholar
Abramson, Arthur and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2009. A fuzzy boundary between tone languages and voice-register languages. In Fant, Gunnar, Fujisaki, Hiroya and Shen, Jiaxuen (eds), Frontiers in Phonetics and Speech Science, pp. 149155. Beijing: The Commercial Press.Google Scholar
Abramson, Arthur, Nye, Patrick and L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 2007. Voice register in Khmu’: Experiments in production and perception. Phonetica 64: 80104.Google Scholar
Adisasmito-Smith, Niken, 2004. Phonetic Influences of Javanese on Indonesian. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2006. Reflections on language contact, areal diffusion, and mechanisms of linguistic change. In Caron, Bernard and Zima, Petr (eds), Sprachbund in the West African Sahel, pp. 2336. Louvain-Paris: Peeters.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W., 2001. Introduction. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 126. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Andruski, Jean E. and Ratliff, Martha, 2000. Phonation types in production of phonological tone: The case of Green Mong. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 30: 3761.Google Scholar
Baxter, William H., 1992. A Handbook of Old Chinese Phonology. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Benedict, Paul, 1996. Interphyla flow in Southeast Asia. In Pan-Asian Linguistics: Proceedings of the Fourth International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, pp. 15791590. Institute of Language and Culture for Rural Development, Mahidol University.Google Scholar
Bradley, David, 1982. Register in Burmese. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 8: Tonation, pp. 117132. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Bruhn, Daniel, 2007. The phonetic inventory of Iu-Mien. Manuscript, University of California, Berkeley. http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/~dwbruhn/dwbruhn_iu-mien.pdfGoogle Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2005. Register in Eastern Cham: Phonetic, Phonological and Sociolinguistic Approaches. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2006. A phonetic study of Eastern Cham register. In Sidwell, Paul and Grant, Anthony (eds), Chamic and Beyond, pp. 136. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2009. Tone perception in Northern and Southern Vietnamese. Journal of Phonetics 37 (1): 7996.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2010. The role of larynx height in the Javanese tense ~ lax stop contrast. In Mercado, Raphael, Potsdam, Eric and de Mena Travis, Lisa (eds), Austronesian and Theoretical Linguistics, pp. 723. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc, 2012. Dialect experience and perceptual integrality in phonological registers: Fundamental frequency, voice quality and the first formant in Cham. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 131 (4): 30883102.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc and Finkeldey, Joshua, 2011. Tone perception in Sgaw Karen. In Proceedings of the 16th International Congress of Phonetic Sciences, pp. 372375.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc and Kirby, James, 2015. Re-assessing tonal diversity and geographical convergence in Mainland Southeast Asia. In Comrie, Bernard and Enfield, Nick (eds), Languages of Mainland Southeast Asia: The State of the Art, pp. 82110. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Brunelle, Marc and Pittayaporn, Pittayawat, 2012. Phonologically-constrained change: The role of the foot in monosyllabization and rhythmic shifts in Mainland Southeast Asia. Diachronica 29 (4): 411433.Google Scholar
Chirkova, Ekaterina and Chen, Yiya, 2013. Lizu. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 43 (1): 7586.Google Scholar
Clements, Nick, Michaud, Alexis and Patin, Cédric, 2011. Do we need tone features? In Hume, Elisabeth, Goldsmith, John and Leo Wetzels, W. (eds), Tones and Features, pp. 324. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Conver, Lynn C., 1999. A sketch of the phonology of a Lamet dialect. Mon-Khmer Studies, 29: 3556.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, 2008. An exercise in a posteriori language sampling. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung 61: 208220.Google Scholar
DiCanio, Christian T., 2009. The phonetics of register in Takhian Thong Chong. Journal of the International. Phonetic Association 39 (2): 162188.Google Scholar
DiCanio, Christian T., 2012. Coarticulation between tone and glottal consonants in Itunyoso Trique. Journal of Phonetics 40 (1): 162176.Google Scholar
Diffloth, Gérard, 1982. Registres, dévoisement, timbre vocalique: Leur histoire en katouique. Mon-Khmer Studies 11: 4782Google Scholar
Diffloth, Gérard, 1989. Proto-Austroasiatic creaky voice. Mon-Khmer Studies 15: 139154.Google Scholar
Diffloth, Gérard, 2005. The contribution of linguistic palaeontology and Austro-Asiatic. In Sagart, Laurent, Blench, Roger and Sanchez-Mazas, Alicia (eds), The Peopling of East Asia: Putting Together Archaeology, Linguistics and Genetics, pp. 7780. London: Routledge Curzon.Google Scholar
Ding, Picus S., 2001. The pitch-accent system of Niuwozi Prinmi. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 24 (2): 5783.Google Scholar
Ding, Picus S., 2006. A typological study of tonal systems of Japan and Prinmi: Towards a definition of pitch-accent languages. Journal of Language Universals 7 (2): 135.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2012. The shape and spread of tone. In Donohue, Cathryn, Ishihara, Shunichi and Steed, William (eds), Quantitative Approaches to Problems in Linguistics: Studies in Honor of Phil Rose, pp. 920. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Whiting, Bronwen, 2011. Quantifying areality: A study of prenasalisation in Southeast Asia and New Guinea. Linguistic Typology 15 (1): 101121.Google Scholar
Edmondson, Jerold A., 2010. The Kháng language of Vietnam in comparison to Ksingmul (Xinh-mun). In McElhanon, Kenneth A. and Reesink, Gerard P. (eds), A Mosaic of Languages and Cultures: Studies Celebrating the Career of Karl J. Franklin, pp. 138154. Dallas, TX: SIL International.Google Scholar
Edmondson, Jerold A., Esling, John, Harris, Jimmy G., Shaoni, Li and Ziwo, Lama, 2001. The aryepiglottic folds and voice quality in the Yi and Bai languages: Laryngoscopic case studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 83100.Google Scholar
Egerod, Søren C., 1971. Phonation types in Chinese and South East Asian languages. Acta Linguistica Hafniensia 13 (2): 159172.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181206.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J., 2011. Linguistic diversity in mainland Southeast Asia. In Enfield, Nicholas J. (ed.), Dynamics of Human Diversity, pp. 6379. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J. and Diffloth, Gérard, 2009. Phonology and sketch grammar of Kri, a Vietic language of Laos. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 38 (1): 369.Google Scholar
Evans, Jonathan P., 2001a. Contact-induced tonogenesis in Southern Qiang. Language and Linguistics 2 (2): 63110.Google Scholar
Evans, Jonathan P., 2001b. Introduction to Qiang Phonology and Lexicon: Synchrony and Diachrony. Tokyo: ILCAA, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar
Evans, Jonathan P., 2008. ‘African’ tone in the Sinosphere. Language and Linguistics 9 (3): 463490.Google Scholar
Fagan, Joel L., 1988. Javanese intervocalic stop phonemes. Studies in Austronesian Linguistics 76: 173202.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 1979. Formation des registres et mutations consonantiques dans les langues mon-khmer. Mon-Khmer Studies 8: 176.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 1996. Langues et peuples viet-muong. Mon-Khmer Studies 26: 728.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 1998. Les systèmes de tons dans les langues viet-muong. Diachronica 15 (1): 127.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 2004. The origin of tones in Viet-Muong. In Burusphat, Somsonge (ed.), Papers from the Eleventh Meeting of the Southeast Asian Linguistic Society, pp. 297313. Tempe, AZ: Arizona State University, Program for Southeast Asian Studies.Google Scholar
Ferlus, Michel, 2009. What were the four divisions of Middle Chinese? Diachronica 26 (2): 184213.Google Scholar
Gage, William W., 1985. Glottal stops and Vietnamese tonogenesis. In Acson, Veneeta Z. and Leed, Richard L. (eds), Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications, no. 20: For Gordon H. Fairbanks, pp. 2136. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Gandour, Jack, 1974. Consonant types and tone in Siamese. Journal of Phonetics 2: 337350.Google Scholar
Gandour, Jack, 1983. Tone perception in Far Eastern languages. Journal of Phonetics 11: 149175.Google Scholar
Gernet, Jacques, 1996. A History of Chinese Civilization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Gregerson, Kenneth J., 1976. Tongue-root and register in Mon-Khmer. In Jenner, Philip N., Thompson, Laurence C. and Starosta, Stanley (eds), Austroasiatic Studies, pp. 323370. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Gruber, James, 2011. An Articulatory, Acoustic, and Auditory Study of Burmese Tone. PhD thesis, Georgetown University, Washington, DC.Google Scholar
Gussenhoven, Carlos, 2000. On the origin and development of the Central Franconian tone contrast. In Lahiri, Aditi (ed.), Analogy, Leveling, and Markedness, pp. 215260. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Haig, Geoffrey, 2001. Linguistic diffusion in present-day Anatolia: From top to bottom. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 195224. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hanson, H. M., 2009. Effects of obstruent consonants on fundamental frequency at vowel onset in English. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 125 (1): 425441.Google Scholar
Hartmann-So, Helga, 1989. Morphophonemic changes in Daai Chin. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 12 (2): 5165.Google Scholar
Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1954. De l’origine des tons en viêtnamien. Journal Asiatique 242: 6982.Google Scholar
Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1961. Bipartition et tripartition des systèmes de tons dans quelques langues d’Extrême-Orient. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 56 (1): 163180.Google Scholar
Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1965. Les mutations consonantiques des occlusives initiales en mon-khmer. Bulletin de la Société de Linguistique de Paris 60 (1): 160172.Google Scholar
Haudricourt, André-Georges, 1971. New Caledonia and the Loyalty Islands. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 8: Linguistics in Oceania, pp. 359396. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1952. The main features of Cambodian pronunciation. Bulletin of the School of Oriental Studies 17: 140174.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1965. The topography of certain phonetic and morphological characteristics of South East Asian languages. Lingua 15: 400434.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1967. Grammar and tone in South-East Asian languages. Wissenschaftliche Zeitschrift der Karl-Marx Universität Leipzig 16 (1/2): 171178.Google Scholar
Henderson, Eugénie J. A., 1979. Bwe Karen as a two-tone language? In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 3, pp. 301326. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Hildebrandt, Kristine A., 2007. Tone in Tibeto-Burman languages: Typological and sociolinguistic approaches. In Miestamo, Matti and Wälchli, Bernhard (eds), New Trends in Typology: Young Typologists’ Contributions to Linguistic Theory, pp. 6790. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Hombert, Jean-Marie, 1977. Development of tones from vowel height? Journal of Phonetics 5: 916.Google Scholar
Hombert, Jean-Marie, 1978. Consonant types, vowel quality, and tone. In Fromkin, Victoria A. (ed.), Tone: A Linguistic Survey, pp. 77111. New York: Academic Press.Google Scholar
Hombert, Jean-Marie, Ohala, John J. and Ewan, William G., 1979. Phonetic explanations for the development of tones. Language 55 (1): 3758.Google Scholar
House, Arthur S. and Fairbanks, Grant, 1953. The influence of consonant environment upon the secondary acoustical characteristics of vowels. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 25: 105113.Google Scholar
Huffman, Franklin E., 1976. The register problem in fifteen Mon-Khmer languages. In Jenner, Philip N., Thompson, Laurence C. and Starosta, Stanley (eds), Austroasiatic Studies, part I, pp. 575589. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
van der Hulst, Harry, 2011. Pitch-accent systems. In van Oostendorp, Marc, Ewan, Colin J., Hume, Elisabeth and Rice, Keren (eds), The Blackwell Companion to Phonology, vol. 2, pp. 10031027. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 1976. Phonologization. In Julliand, Alphonse G. (ed.), Linguistic Studies Offered to Joseph Greenberg on the Occasion of his Sixtieth Birthday, vol. 2, pp. 407418. Saratoga: Anma Libri.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2006. Word prosodic typology. Phonology 23: 225257.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2009. How (not) to do phonological typology: The case of pitch-accent. Language Sciences 31: 213238.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M., 2010. Kuki-Thaadow: An African tone system in Southeast Asia. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale, pp. 3151. Lyon, France: Les Presses de l’Ecole Normale Supérieure.Google Scholar
Hyman, Larry M. and Haokip, Thien, 2004. Kuki-Thaadow Grammar (draft). http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/person/19Google Scholar
Hyslop, Gwendolyn, 2009. Kurtöp tone: A tonogenetic case study. Lingua 119: 827845.Google Scholar
Jenner, Philip N., 1974. The development of registers in Standard Khmer. In Liem, Nguyen Dang (ed.), South-East Asian Linguistic Studies, vol. 1, pp. 4760. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Jones, Robert B., 1986. Pitch register languages. In McCoy, John and Light, Timothy (eds), Contributions to Sino-Tibetan Studies, pp. 135143. Leiden: Brill.Google Scholar
Kingston, John, 2005. The phonetics of Athabaskan tonogenesis. In Hargus, Sharon and Rice, Keren (eds), Athabaskan Prosody, pp. 137184. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kirby, James, 2010. Dialect experience in Vietnamese tone perception. Journal of the Acoustical Society of America 127 (6): 37493757.Google Scholar
Kirby, James, 2013. The role of probabilistic enhancement in phonologization. In Yu, Alan C. L. (ed.), Origins of Sound Change: Approaches to Phonologization, pp. 228246. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Kirby, James, 2014. Incipient tonogenesis in Phnom Penh Khmer: Acoustic and perceptual studies. Journal of Phonetics 43: 6985.Google Scholar
L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 1979. The distribution of the sounds of Bruu. Mon-Khmer Studies 8: 221293.Google Scholar
L-Thongkum, Theraphan, 1988. Another look at the register distinction in Mon. In Bamroongraks, Cholticha, Khanittanan, Wilaiwan and Permch, Laddawan (eds), The International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, pp. 2251. Bangkok: Thammasat University.Google Scholar
L-Thongkum, Theraphan and Chommanad, Intajamornrak, 2008. Tonal evolution induced by language contact: A case study of the T’in (Lua’) language of Nan province, northern Thailand. Mon-Khmer Studies 38: 5768.Google Scholar
Htay, La Maung, 2011. A Sociolinguistic Survey of Three Lisu Dialects. MA thesis, Payap University, Chiang Mai, Thailand.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, Peter, 1971. Preliminaries to Linguistic Phonetics. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Laver, John, 1980. Phonetic Description of Voice Quality. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Lee, Ernest W., 1966. Proto-Chamic Phonological Word and Vocabulary. PhD dissertation, Indiana University.Google Scholar
Lee, Ernest W., 1998. The contribution of Cat Gia Roglai to Chamic. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistic Studies, no. 15: Further Chamic Studies, pp. 3154. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Leer, Jeff, 1999. Tonogenesis in Athabaskan. In Kaji, Shigeki (ed.), Cross-linguistic Studies of Tonal Phenomena, Tonogenesis, Typology, and Related Topics, pp. 3766. Tokyo: Institute of the Study of the Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar
Lehiste, Ilse, 1970. Suprasegmentals. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar
Lewis, Paul W., 1973. Tone in the Akha language. Anthropological Linguistics 15: 183188.Google Scholar
Lindell, Kristina, Svantesson, Jan-Olof and Tayanin, Damrong, 1978. Two dialects of the Romeet (Lamet) language. Cahiers de linguistique Asie Orientale 4: 522.Google Scholar
Lisker, Leigh, 1986. ‘Voicing’ in English: A catalogue of acoustic features signaling /b/ versus /p/ in trochees. Language and Speech 29: 311.Google Scholar
Luce, Gordon H., undated. Draft letter, incomplete, addressee not indicated (to Henderson?), concerning analysis of Riang tones and grammar. Luce Collection, MS 6574–7, 050a-b. National Library of Australia.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 1978. Universals of tone. In Greenberg, Joseph H., Ferguson, Charles A. and Moravcsik, Edith A. (eds), Universals of Human Language, vol. 2: Phonology, pp. 335363. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2011. Tone. In Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), The World Atlas of Language Structures Online, chapter 13. Munich: Max Planck Digital Library. http://wals.info/chapter/13Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian and Pang, Keng-Fong, 1993. Tone in Utsat. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 91106. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Maspero, Henri, 1912. Etudes sur la phonétique historique de la langue annamite: Les initiales. Bulletin de l’École française d’Extrême-Orient 12: 1124.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James, 1973. Tonogenesis in Southeast Asia. In Hyman, Larry (ed.), Consonant Types and Tone, pp. 7195. Los Angeles: Linguistics Program, University of Southern California.Google Scholar
Matisoff, James, 2001. Genetic versus contact relationship: Prosodic diffusability in South-East Asian languages. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 291327. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Mazaudon, Martine, 1973. Phonologie du Tamang. Langues et Civilisations à Tradition Orale, vol. 4. Paris: SELAF.Google Scholar
Mazaudon, Martine, 2012. Paths to tone in the Tamang branch of Tibeto-Burman (Nepal). In de Vogalaer, Gunther and Seiler, Guido (eds), The Dialect Laboratory: Dialects as a Testing Ground for Theories of Language Change, pp. 139177. Amsterdam and Philadelphia: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mazaudon, Martine and Michaud, Alexis, 2008. Tonal contrasts and initial consonants: A case study of Tamang, a ‘missing link’ in tonogenesis. Phonetica 65: 231256.Google Scholar
Michaud, Alexis, 2004. Final consonants and glottalization: New perspectives from Hanoi Vietnamese. Phonetica 61 (2/3): 119146.Google Scholar
Michaud, Alexis, 2006. Tonal reassociation and rising tonal contours in Naxi. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 29 (1): 6194.Google Scholar
Michaud, Alexis, 2008. Phonemic and tonal analysis of Yongning Na. Cahiers de Linguistique – Asie Orientale 37 (2): 159196.Google Scholar
Michaud, Alexis, 2013. Studying level-tone systems in Asia: The case of the Naish languages. Paper presented at the International Conference on Phonetics of the Languages in China (ICPLC-2013), City University of Hong Kong, 2–4 December 2013.Google Scholar
Michaud, Alexis and Xueguang, He, 2007. Reassociated tones and coalescent syllables in Naxi (Tibeto-Burman). Journal of the International Phonetic Association 37 (3): 237255.Google Scholar
Morey, Stephen, 2005. The Tai Languages of Assam: A Grammar and Texts. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Mundhenk, Alice T. and Goschnick, Hella E., 1977. Haroi phonemes. In Thomas, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 4: Chamic Studies, pp. 116. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Narumol, Charoenma, 1982. The phonologies of a Lampang Lamet and Wiang Papao Lua. Mon-Khmer Studies 11: 3545.Google Scholar
Bay, Naw Say, 1995. The phonology of the Dung dialect of Moken. In Bradley, David (ed.), Papers in Southeast Asian Linguistics, no. 13: Studies in Burmese Languages, pp. 193205. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Văn Lợi, Nguyễn, 1993. Tiếng Rục. Hanoi: Nhà xuất bản Khoa học xã hội [Social Sciences Publishing House].Google Scholar
Văn Lợi, Nguyễn and Edmondson, Jerold, 1997. Tones and voice quality in modern northern Vietnamese: Instrumental case studies. Mon-Khmer Studies 28: 118.Google Scholar
Nicolson, Beth, 2000. The Nung An language of Vietnam: Stepchild or aberrant son? In The Fifth International Symposium on Languages and Linguistics, pp. 266295. Vietnam National University, Ho Chi Minh City University of Social Sciences and Humanities.Google Scholar
Ohala, John J., 1973. The physiology of tone. In Hyman, Larry M. (ed.), Consonant Types and Tone, pp. 114. Los Angeles: Linguistics Program, University of Southern California.Google Scholar
Pham, Andrea, 2003. Vietnamese Tone: A New Analysis. New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Phan, John D., 2013. Lacquered Words: The Evolution of Vietnamese under Sinitic Influences from the First Century BCE through the Seventeenth Century CE. PhD dissertation, Cornell University, New York.Google Scholar
Pike, Kenneth L., 1948. Tone Languages. Ann Arbor, MI: The University of Michigan Press.Google Scholar
Premsrirat, Suwilai, 2001. Tonogenesis in Khmu dialects of SEA. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 4756.Google Scholar
Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1962. The consonantal system of Old Chinese. Asia Major, Series 2 (9): 58144, 206265.Google Scholar
Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1978. The nature of the Middle Chinese tones and their development to early Mandarin. Journal of Chinese Linguistics 6: 173203.Google Scholar
Pulleyblank, Edwin G., 1986. Tonogenesis as an index of areal relationships in East Asia. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 19 (1): 6582.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 1987. Tone sandhi compounding in White Hmong. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 10 (2): 71105.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 1992a. Grammar and tone in Asian languages. In The Third International Symposium on Language and Linguistics, Bangkok, Thailand, pp. 10641078. Bangkok: Chulalongkorn University.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 1992b. Meaningful Tone: A Study of Tonal Morphology in Compounds, Form Classes and Expressive Phrases in White Hmong. Dekalb, IL: Northern Illinois University Press.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 2002. Timing tonogenesis: Evidence from borrowing. Berkeley Linguistics Society 28: 2941.Google Scholar
Ratliff, Martha, 2015. Tonoexodus, tonogenesis, and tone change. In Honeybone, Patrick and Salmons, Joseph (eds), The Oxford Handbook of Historical Phonology, pp. 245261. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Rivierre, Jean-Claude, 1993. Tonogenesis in New Caledonia. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 155173. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul, 2013. Issues in Austroasiatic classification. Language and Linguistics Compass 7 (8): 437457.Google Scholar
Sidwell, Paul and Blench, Roger, 2011. The Austroasiatic Urheimat: The Southeastern Riverine Hypothesis. In Enfield, Nicholas J. (ed.), Dynamics of Human Diversity, pp. 130. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Steriade, Donca, 2001/2008. The phonology of perceptibility effects: The P-map and its consequences for constraint organization. In Hanson, Kristin and Inkelas, Sharon (eds), The Nature of the Word: Studies in Honor of Paul Kiparsky, pp. 151179. Cambridge, MA: The MIT Press.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1983. Kammu Phonology and Morphology. Travaux de L’Institut de Linguistique de Lund, vol. 18. Malmö: CWK Gleerup.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1988. U. Linguistics of the Tibeto-Burman Area 11: 64133.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1989. Tonogenetic mechanisms in Northern Mon-Khmer. Phonetica 46: 6079.Google Scholar
Svantesson, Jan-Olof, 1991. Hu: A language with unorthodox tonogenesis. In Davidson, Jeremy H. C. S. (ed.), Austroasiatic Languages: Essays in Honour of H. L. Shorto, pp. 6779. London: SOAS.Google Scholar
Minh, Thạch Ngọc, 1999. Monosyllabization in Kiengiang Khmer. Mon-Khmer Studies 29: 8195.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G., 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: University of Edinburgh Press.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Ela, 2004. Phonation types in Javanese. Oceanic Linguistics 43 (2): 277295.Google Scholar
Thurgood, Graham, 2002. Vietnamese tone: Revising the model and the analysis. Diachronica 19 (2): 333363.Google Scholar
Uhlenbeck, Eugenius M., 1964. A Critical Survey of Studies on the Languages of Java and Madura. The Hague: Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Phương, Vũ Thang, 1981. The Acoustic and Perceptual Nature of Tone in Vietnamese. PhD dissertation, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Watkins, Justin, 2001. Burmese. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 31: 291295.Google Scholar
Watkins, Justin, 2013. A first look at tone in Myebon Sumtu Chin. SOAS Working Papers in Linguistics 16: 79104.Google Scholar
Watson, Richard L., 1996. Why three phonologies for Pacoh? Mon-Khmer Studies 26: 197205.Google Scholar
Wayland, Ratree and Jongman, Allard, 2001. Chanthaburi Khmer vowels: Phonetic and phonemic analyses. Mon-Khmer Studies 31: 6582.Google Scholar
Wayland, Ratree and Jongman, Allard, 2002. Registrogenesis in Khmer: A phonetic account. Mon-Khmer Studies 32: 101115.Google Scholar
Wayland, Ratree and Guion, Susan A., 2005. Sound changes following the loss of /r/ in Khmer: A new tonogenetic mechanism? Mon-Khmer Studies 35: 5582.Google Scholar
Yip, Moira, 2002. Tone. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar

References

Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), 2001. Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter, 1981a. Switch-reference in Australia. Language 57: 309334.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter, 1981b. Proto-Kanyara and Proto-Mantharta historical phonology. Lingua 54: 295333.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter, 1981c. Case-Marking in Southern Pilbara languages. Australian Journal of Linguistics 1: 211226.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter, 1988. Classification of Southern Pilbara languages. Pacific Linguistics, Papers in Australian Linguistics, no. 17. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter K., 1994a. A reference grammar of the Mantharta languages, Western Australia. Unpublished manuscript, La Trobe University.Google Scholar
Austin, Peter K., 1994b. A reference grammar of the Kanyara languages, Western Australia. Unpublished manuscript, La Trobe University.Google Scholar
Baker, Brett, 2014. Word structure in Australian languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 139214.Google Scholar
Bowern, Claire, 2003. Another look at Australia as a linguistic area. In Proceedings of the Twenty-Ninth Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society (General Session and Parasession on Phonetic Sources of Phonological Patterns: Synchronic and Diachronic Explanations).Google Scholar
Bowern, Claire, 2006. Another look at Australia as a linguistic area. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas, pp. 244265. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Busby, Peter, 1980. The distribution of phonemes in Australian Aboriginal language. In Waters, Bruce E. and Busby, Peter A. (eds), Papers in Australian Linguistics, vol. 14, pp. 73139. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-60. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Butcher, Andrew, 2012. On the phonetics of long, thin phonologies. In Donohue, Cathryn, Ishihara, Shunishi and Steed, William (eds), Quantitative Approaches to Problems in Linguistics: Studies in Honour of Phil Rose, pp. 133154. Munich: LINCOM.Google Scholar
Butcher, Andrew and Fletcher, Janet, 2014. Sound patterns of Australian languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 89132.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle and Poser, William J., 2008. Language Classification: History and Method. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1982. The development of an accusative case marking pattern in the Ngayarda languages of Western Australia. Australian Journal of Linguistics 2: 4359.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1987. Complex sentences in Martuthunira. In Austin, Peter (ed.), Complex Sentence Constructions in Australian Aboriginal Languages, pp. 97139. Typological Studies in Language, vol. 15. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1991. Panyjima. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Blake, Barry (eds), Handbook of Australian Languages, vol. 4, pp. 124243. Melbourne: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1994. The historical development of pronoun paradigms in the Pilbara region of Western Australia. Australian Journal of Linguistics 14: 155191.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1995. Martuthunira: A Language of the Pilbara Region of Western Australia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-125. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1997. Where do complex kinterms come from? In Tryon, Darryl and Walsh, Michael (eds), Boundary Rider: Essays in Honour of Geoffrey O’Grady, pp. 107132. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-136. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1998a. Yingkarta. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 1998b. What is a Ngayarta language? A reply to O’Grady and Laughren. Australian Journal of Linguistics 18: 91107.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 2001. Descent and diffusion: The complexity of the Pilbara situation. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 105133.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 2006. Case marking strategies in subordinate clauses in Pilbara languages: Some diachronic speculations. Australian Journal of Linguistics 26 (1): 81105.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 2007. Demonstrative paradigm splitting in the Pilbara languages of Western Australia. In Salmons, Joseph and Dubenion-Smith, Shannon (eds), Historical Linguistics 2005, pp. 224237. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan, 2008. Case in an Australian language: Distribution of case and multiple case-marking in Nyamal. In Malchukov, Andrej and Spencer, Andrew (eds), The Handbook of Case, pp. 756769. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Dench, Alan. Field notes: Ngarla, Nyamal, Yinhawangka. Manuscript, University of Western Australia, 1995–1997.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 1980. Languages of Australia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 1997. The Rise and Fall of Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 2001. The Australian linguistic area. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 64104.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 2002. The Australian Languages: Their Nature and Development. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Eldredge, Niles and Gould, Stephen Jay, 1972. Punctuated equilibria: An alternative to phyletic gradualism. In Schopf, T. J. M. (ed.), Models in Palaeobiology, pp. 82115. San Francisco: Freeman Cooper and Co.Google Scholar
Ellison, T. Mark and Miceli, Luisa, 2013. New perspectives on language change: L2 transmission and the cognitive basis for contact-induced differentiation of lexical forms. Paper presented at the 21st International Conference for Historical Linguistics, Oslo.Google Scholar
Ellison, T. Mark and Miceli, Luisa, in press. Language monitoring in bilinguals as a mechanism for rapid lexical divergence. Language 93.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas (ed.), 2003. The non-Pama-Nyungan Languages of Northern Australia: Comparative Studies of the Continent’s Most Linguistically Complex Region. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas, 2005. Australian languages reconsidered: A review of Dixon (2002). Oceanic Linguistics 44 (1): 242286.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas and Wilkins, David, 2000. In the mind’s ear: The semantic extensions of perception verbs in Australian languages. Language 76 (3): 546592.Google Scholar
François, Alexandre, 2011. Social ecology and language history in the Northern Vanuatu linkage: A tale of divergence and convergence. Journal of Historical Linguistics 1 (2): 175246.Google Scholar
Gaby, Alice and Singer, Ruth, 2014. Semantics of Australian Aboriginal languages. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 295327.Google Scholar
Goddard, Clifford, 1985. A Grammar of Yankunytjatjara. Alice Springs: Institute for Aboriginal Development Press.Google Scholar
Hamilton, Philip, 1996. Phonetic Constraints and Markedness in the Phonotactics of Australian Aboriginal Languages. PhD thesis, University of Toronto.Google Scholar
Hansen, Kenneth C., 1984. Communicability of some Western Desert communalects. In Hudson, Joyce and Pym, Noreen (eds), Language Survey, pp. 1112. Work Papers of SIL/AAB, vol. B-11. Darwin: SIL.Google Scholar
Harvey, Mark, 2011. Lexical change in pre-colonial Australia. Diachronica 28 (3): 345381.Google Scholar
Heath, Jeffrey, 1978. Linguistic Diffusion in Arnhem Land. Canberra: Institute of Aboriginal Studies.Google Scholar
Hill, Peter, 2011. Morphology and Sentence Construction in Kurrama: A Language of the Pilbara Region of Western Australia. PhD thesis, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar
Koch, Harold, 2004. A methodological history of Australian linguistic classification. In Bowern, Claire and Koch, Harold (eds), Australian Languages: Classification and the Comparative Method, pp. 1760. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Koch, Harold, 2009. On reconstructing pronominal proto-paradigms: Methodological considerations from the Pama-Nyungan language family of Australia. In Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), Discovering History Through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross, pp. 317344. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Koch, Harold, 2014. Historical relations among the Australian languages: Genetic classification and contact-based diffusion. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (ed.), pp. 2389.Google Scholar
Koch, Harold and Nordlinger, Rachel (eds), 2014a. The Languages and Linguistics of Australia: A Comprehensive Guide. The World of Linguistics, vol. 3. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Koch, Harold and Nordlinger, Rachel, 2014b. The languages of Australia in linguistic research: Context and issues. In Koch, and Nordlinger, (eds), pp. 321.Google Scholar
Kohn, Allison, 1994. A Morphological Description of Ngarluma. BA (Hons) dissertation, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar
Kohn, Allison. Nyiyaparli field notes. Manuscript, University of Western Australia.Google Scholar
Kuteva, Tanja, 1999. Languages and societies: The ‘punctuated equilibrium’ model of language development. Language and Communication 19: 213228.Google Scholar
Marmion, Douglas, 1996. A Description of the Morphology of Wajarri. BA (Hons) dissertation, University of New England.Google Scholar
McConvell, Patrick, 2010. Contact and indigenous languages in Australia. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 770794. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Merlan, Francesca, 1981. Land, language and social identity in Aboriginal Australia. Mankind 13 (2): 133148.Google Scholar
Miceli, Luisa, 2004. Pama-Nyungan as a genetic entity. In Bowern, Claire and Koch, Harold (eds), Australian Languages: Classification and the Comparative Method, pp. 6168. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Miceli, Luisa, 2015a. Pama-Nyungan. In Bowern, Claire and Evans, Bethwyn (eds), The Routledge Handbook of Historical Linguistics, pp. 704725. London and New York: Routledge.Google Scholar
Miceli, Luisa, 2015b. Looking for evidence of an anti-doppel bias in the Pilbara. Paper presented at Workshop on Comparative Australian Linguistics, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Miceli, Luisa and Round, Erich R., 2014. Sound change in Australia: Current knowledge and research priorities. Paper presented at Third Biennial Workshop on Sound Change, University of California, Berkeley, May 28–31 2014.Google Scholar
Miller, W. R., 1971. Dialect differentiation in the Western Desert Language. Anthropological Forum 3: 6178.Google Scholar
O’Grady, Geoffrey, 1958. The Significance of the Circumcision Boundary in Western Australia. BA thesis, Sydney University.Google Scholar
O’Grady, Geoffrey, 1966. Proto-Ngayarda phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 5: 71130.Google Scholar
O’Grady, Geoffrey, Voegelin, Carl F. and Voegelin, Frances M., 1966. Languages of the World: Indo-Pacific Fascicle Six. Anthropological Linguistics 8 (2): 1197.Google Scholar
Radcliffe-Brown, A., 1913. Three tribes of Western Australia. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 43: 141195.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Contact-induced change in Oceanic languages in North-East Melanesia. In Aikhenvald, and Dixon, (eds), pp. 134166.Google Scholar
Round, Erich R., 2013. The phonologically exceptional continent: A large cross-linguistic survey reveals why Australia is, and is not, typologically unusual. Paper presented at the Association for Linguistic Typology 10th Biennial Conference, Leipzig.Google Scholar
Stirling, Lesley and Dench, Alan, 2012. Tense, aspect, modality and evidentiality in Australian languages: Foreword. Australian Journal of Linguistics 32: 16.Google Scholar
Sutton, Peter, 1997. Materialism, sacred myth and pluralism: Competing theories of the origin of Australian languages. In Merlan, Francesca, Morton, John and Rumsey, Alan (eds), Scholar and Sceptic: Australian Aboriginal Studies in Honour of L. R. Hiatt, pp. 211242. Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press.Google Scholar
Sutton, Peter and Koch, Harold, 2008. Australian languages: A singular vision. Journal of Linguistics 44: 471504.Google Scholar
Ulm, Sean, 2013. ‘Complexity’ and the Australian continental narrative: Themes in the archaeology of Holocene Australia. Quaternary International 285: 182192.Google Scholar
Voegelin, C.F., Voegelin, F. M., Wurm, Stephen, O’Grady, Geoffrey N. and Matsuda, Tokuichiro 1963. Obtaining an index of phonological differentiation from the construction of non-existent minimax systems. International Journal of American Linguistics 29 (1): 429.Google Scholar
Westerlund, Torbjörn, 2007. A Grammatical Sketch of Ngarla: A Language of Western Australia. Master’s thesis, Uppsala University.Google Scholar
Westerlund, Torbjörn, 2013. Finite Verbs in Ngarla (Pama-Nyungan, Ngayarta). PhD thesis, Uppsala University.Google Scholar
Williams, Alan, Ulm, Sean, Turney, Chris S. M., Rohde, David, White, Gentry, 2015. Holocene demographic changes and the emergence of complex societies in prehistoric Australia. PLoS ONE 10 (6) 117.Google Scholar
Wordick, Frank, 1982. The Yindjibarndi Language. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar

References

Baird, Louise, 2008. A Grammar of Klon: A Non-Austronesian Language of Alor, Indonesia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 596. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Barnes, Barney, 1989. Urat grammar essentials. Unpublished manuscript, Summer Institute of Linguistics Papua New Guinea Branch.Google Scholar
Bellwood, Peter, 2002. Farmers, foragers, languages, genes: The genesis of agricultural societies. In Bellwood, and Renfrew, (eds), pp. 1728.Google Scholar
Bellwood, Peter and Renfrew, Colin (eds), 2002. Examining the Farming/Language Dispersal Hypothesis. Cambridge: McDonald Institute of Archaeological Research.Google Scholar
Bellwood, Peter, Ross, Malcolm, Chambers, Geoff and Hung, Hsiao-chun, 2011. Are ‘cultures’ inherited? Multidisciplinary perspectives on the origins and migrations of Austronesian-speaking peoples prior to 1000 BCE. In Roberts, Ben and Vander Linden, Marc (eds), Investigating Archaeological Cultures: Material Culture, Variability and Transmission, pp. 321354. New York: Springer.Google Scholar
Bickel, Balthasar and Nichols, Johanna, 2006. Oceania, the Pacific Rim, and the theory of linguistic areas. Berkeley Linguistics Society 32.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert A., 1982. The linguistic value of the Wallace Line. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 138: 231250.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert A., 1993. Central and Central-Eastern Malayo-Polynesian. Oceanic Linguistics 32: 241293.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert A., 2009. The position of the languages of Eastern Indonesia: A reply to Donohue and Grimes. Oceanic Linguistics 48: 3677.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2013. The Austronesian Languages, revised edition. Asia-Pacific Linguistics Open Access Monographs, vol. A-PL 008. Canberra: Australian National University. http://hdl.handle.net/1885/10191Google Scholar
Bowden, John, 2001. Taba: Description of a South Halmahera Language. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 521. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Brandes, J. H. L., 1884. Bijdragen tot de vergelijkende klankleer der westerse afdeling van de Maleisch-Polynesische taalfamilie. PhD dissertation, Rijksuniversiteit te Leiden.Google Scholar
Bugenhagen, Robert D., 1994. The semantics of irrealis in the Austronesian languages of Papua New Guinea. In Reesink, Ger P. (ed.), Topics in Descriptive Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 139. Semaian, vol. 11. Leiden: Vakgroep Talen en Culturen van Zuidoost-Azie en Oceanie, Rijksuniversiteit te Leiden.Google Scholar
Cahill, Michael, 2011. Tonal diversity in languages of Papua New Guinea. SIL Electronic Working Papers 2011:008.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2006. Areal linguistics: A closer scrutiny. In Matras, Yaron, McMahon, April and Vincent, Nigel (eds), Linguistic Areas: Convergence in Historical and Typological Perspective, pp. 131. Basingstoke, UK: Palgrave Macmillan.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle and Poser, William J., 2008. Language Classification: History and Method. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1943. The Linguistic Position of South-Eastern Papua. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Company.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1948. Distribution of languages in the Central Highlands of New Guinea. Oceania 19: 104129, 234253, 249377.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1949. Two tonal languages of New Guinea. Bulletin of the School of Oriental and African Studies 13: 184199.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1952. Languages of Bogia District, New Guinea. Oceania 22: 130147, 178207.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1969. A Survey of New Guinea Languages. Sydney: Sydney University Press.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1976. Austronesian and Papuan ‘mixed’ languages: General remarks. In Wurm, S. A. (ed.), New Guinea Area Languages and Language Study, vol. 2: Austronesian Languages, pp. 527579. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-39. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Coller, Matthew, 2007. Sahul Time. Melbourne: Monash University. http://sahultime.monash.edu.auGoogle Scholar
Comrie, Bernard and Cysouw, Michael, 2012. New Guinea through the eyes of WALS. Language and Linguistics in Melanesia 30: 6594.Google Scholar
Conrad, Robert J. and Wogiga, Kepas, 1991. An Outline of Bukiyip Grammar. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-113. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Corbett, Greville G., 2013. Canonical morphosyntactic features. In Brown, Dunstan, Chumakina, Marina and Corbett, Greville G. (eds), Canonical Morphology and Syntax, pp. 4865. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Corris, Miriam, 2005. A Grammar of Barupu: A Language of Papua New Guinea. PhD thesis, University of Sydney.Google Scholar
David, Bruno, McNiven, Ian J., Richards, Thomas et al., 2011. Lapita sites in the Central Province of mainland Papua New Guinea. World Archaeology 43: 576593.Google Scholar
Dempwolff, Otto, 1937. Vergleichende Lautlehre des Austronesischen Wortschatzes, vol. 2: Deduktive Anwendung des Urindonesischen auf austronesische Einzelsprachen. Beihefte zur Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, vol. 17. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Dempwolff, Otto, 1939. Grammatik der Jabêm-Sprache auf Neuguinea. Hamburg: Friederichsen, de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dempwolff, Otto. Grammar of the Graged language. Unpublished mimeograph, Lutheran Mission, Narer, Karkar Island.Google Scholar
Denham, T. P., Haberle, S. G., Lentfer, C. et al., 2003. Origins of agriculture at Kuk Swamp in the Highlands of New Guinea. Science 301: 189193.Google Scholar
D’Jernes, Lucille, 1990. Arop-Lokep grammar. Unpublished manuscript, Summer Institute of Linguistics, Ukarumpa.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 1997. Tone systems in New Guinea. Linguistic Typology 1: 347386.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2005a. Tone and the Trans New Guinea languages. In Kaji, (ed.), pp. 3353.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2005b. Word order in New Guinea: Dispelling a myth. Oceanic Linguistics 44: 527536.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2005c. Configurationality in the languages of New Guinea. Australian Journal of Linguistics 25: 181218.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2007a. The Papuan language of Tambora. Oceanic Linguistics 46: 520537.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2007b. Word order in Austronesian from north to south and west to east. Linguistic Typology 11: 349391.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2010. Farming and language in Island Southeast Asia: Reframing Austronesian history. Current Anthropology 51: 223256.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and San Roque, Lila, 2004. I’saka. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 554. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Schapper, Antoinette, 2008. Whence the Austronesian possession construction? Oceanic Linguistics 47: 316327.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1940/1941. Beitrag zur Sprachgruppierung in Holländisch-Neuguinea. Anthropos 35/36: 355.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1949a. Bijzonderheden uit de talen van Frederik-Hendrik-Eiland: Kimaghama, Ndom en Riantana. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 105: 124.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1949b. Aantekeningen over twee talen in het centraal gebergte van Nederlands Nieuw-Guinea. Bijdragen tot de Taal-, Land- en Volkenkunde 105: 423444.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1950. Talen en dialecten van Zuid-West Nieuw-Guinea. Anthropos 45: 545574.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1952. Spraakkunst can het Ekagi. The Hague : Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Drabbe, Peter, 1953. Spraakkunst van de Kamoro-taal. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Drabbe, P., 1955. Spraakkunst van het Marind, zuidkust Nederlands Nieuw-Guinea. Studia Instituti Anthropos, vol. 11. Posieux and Fribourg: Instituut Anthropos.Google Scholar
Drabbe, P., 1959. Kaeti en Wambon: Twee Awju Dialecten. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Draper, Norm and Draper, Sheila, 2002. Dictionary of Kyaka Enga, Papua New Guinea. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 532. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 1988. Object-verb order and adjective-noun order: Dispelling a myth. Lingua 74: 185217.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 1992. The Greenbergian word order correlations. Language 68: 81138.Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013a. Order of adjective and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 87. http://wals.info/chapter/87Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013b. Relationship between the order of object and verb and the order of adjective and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 97. http://wals.info/chapter/97Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013c. Relationship between the order of object and verb and the order of adposition and noun phrase. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 95. http://wals.info/chapter/95Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013d. Order of genitive and noun. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 86. http://wals.info/chapter/86Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S., 2013e. Position of negative morpheme with respect to subject, object, and verb. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 144. http://wals.info/chapter/144Google Scholar
Dryer, Matthew S. and Haspelmath, Martin (eds), 2013. The World Atlas of Language Structures Online. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://wals.infoGoogle Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Levinson, Stephen C., Lindström, Eva, Reesink, Ger and Terrill, Angela, 2008. Structural phylogeny in historical linguistics: Methodological explorations applied in Island Melanesia. Language 84: 710759.Google Scholar
Dutton, Tom, 2010. Reconstructing Proto-Koiarian: The History of a Papuan Language Family. Studies in Language Change, vol. 7. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Emeneau, Murray B., 1956. India as a linguistic area. Language 32: 316.Google Scholar
Emeneau, Murray B., 1980. The Indian linguistic area revisited. In Emeneau, Murray B. (ed.), Language and Linguistic Area, pp. 197249. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J., 2003. Linguistic Epidemiology: Semantics and Grammar of Language Contact in Mainland Southeast Asia. London: RoutledgeCurzon.Google Scholar
Enfield, Nicholas J., 2005. Areal linguistics and mainland Southeast Asia. Annual Review of Anthropology 34: 181206.Google Scholar
Etherington, Paul, 2002. Nggem Morphology and Syntax. MA thesis, Northern Territory University.Google Scholar
Evans, Bethwyn and Palmer, Bill, 2011. Contact-induced change in southern Bougainville. Oceanic Linguistics 50: 483523.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas, 2012. Even more diverse than we had thought: The multiplicity of Trans-Fly languages. In Evans, Nicholas and Klamer, Marian (eds), Melanesian Languages on the Edge of Asia: Challenges for the Twenty-first Century, pp. 109149. Language Documentation and Conservation Special Publication 5. Honolulu: Language Documentation and Conservation.Google Scholar
Ewing, Michael C., 2010. Agentive alignment in Central Maluku languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 119141.Google Scholar
Ewing, Michael and Klamer, Marian (eds), 2010. East Nusantara: Typological and Areal Analyses. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 618. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Florey, Margaret J., 2010. Negation in the Moluccan languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 227250.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 1986. The Papuan Languages of New Guinea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 2000. The languages of New Guinea. Annual Review of Anthropology 29: 357404.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 2005a. Linguistic prehistory in the Sepik-Ramu basin. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 109144.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 2005b. Semantic parameters and the unaccusative split in the Austronesian language family. Studies in Language 29: 385430.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 2010. Clause linkage and nexus in Papuan languages. In Bril, Isabelle (ed.), Clause Linking and Clause Hierarchy: Syntax and Pragmatics, pp. 2750. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., in press. The languages of the Sepik-Ramu Basin and environs. In Palmer, Bill (ed.), The Languages and Linguistics of New Guinea: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Foley, William A. and Van Valin, Robert D., 1984. Functional Syntax and Universal Grammar. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Friedlaender, Jonathan S. (ed.), 2007. Genes, Language and Culture History in the Southwest Pacific. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Friedlaender, Jonathan S., Friedlaender, F. R., Hodgson, J. A. et al., 2007. Mitochondrial DNA variation in Northern Island Melanesia. In Friedlaender, (ed.), pp. 6180.Google Scholar
Gil, David, 2015. The Mekong-Mamberamo linguistic area. In Enfield, N. J. and Comrie, Bernard (eds), Mainland Southeast Asian Languages: The State of the Art, pp. 261350. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Golson, Jack, 1977. The making of the New Guinea Highlands. In Winslow, J. H. (ed.), The Melanesian Environment, pp. 4556. Canberra: Australian National University Press.Google Scholar
Gravelle, Gilles, 2002. Morphosyntactic properties of Meyah word classes. In Reesink, Ger P. (ed.), Languages of the Eastern Bird’s Head, pp. 109180. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 524. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1960. A quantitative approach to the morphological study of language. International Journal of American Linguistics 26: 178194. Originally published in Spencer, Robert F. (ed.), 1954, Method and Perspective in Anthropology: Papers in Honor of Wilson D. Wallis, Minneapolis: University of Minnesota Press.Google Scholar
Grimes, Charles E., 1991. The Buru Language of Eastern Indonesia. PhD thesis, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Hammarström, Harald, 2010. Online appendix for ‘A full-scale test of the language farming dispersal hypothesis’ (Diachronica 27: 197213).Google Scholar
Hammarström, Harald, 2012. Pronouns and the (preliminary) classification of Papuan languages. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 428538.Google Scholar
Hammarström, Harald and van den Heuvel, Wilco (eds), 2012. History, Contact and Classification of Papuan Languages, part 2. Special issue of Language and Linguistics in Melanesia. Port Moresby: Linguistic Society of Papua New Guinea.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, Dryer, Matthew, Gil, David and Comrie, Bernard (eds), 2005. The World Atlas of Language Structures. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Healey, Alan, 1964. The Ok Family in New Guinea. PhD dissertation, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Healey, Alan, 1970. Proto-Awyu-Dumut phonology. In Wurm, S. A. and Laycock, D. C. (eds), Pacific Linguistic Studies in Honour of Arthur Capell, pp. 9971063. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-13. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Holton, Gary, 2010. Person-marking, verb classes, and and the notion of alignment in Western Pantar. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 97117.Google Scholar
Kaji, Shigeki (ed.), 2005. Crosslinguistic Studies of Tonal Phenomena: Historical Development, Tone-Syntax Interface, and Descriptive Studies. Tokyo: Research Institute for Languages and Cultures of Asia and Africa, Tokyo University of Foreign Studies.Google Scholar
Kaspruś, Alois, 1945. The languages of the Mugil District, NE-New Guinea. Anthropos 37–40: 711778.Google Scholar
Kennedy, Jean, 2002. Manus from the beginning: An archaeological overview. In Kaufmann, Christian, Schmid, C. Kocher and Ohnemus, S. (eds), Admiralty Islands: Art from the South Seas, pp. 1729. Zürich: Museum Rietberg.Google Scholar
Kennedy, Jean and Clarke, William, 2004. Cultivated Landscapes of the Southwest Pacific. Resource Management in Asia-Pacific Working Paper, vol. 50. Canberra: Resource Management in Asia-Pacific Program, Research School of Pacific and Asian Studies, The Australian National University.Google Scholar
Klaffl, Johann and Vormann, Friedrich, 1905. Die Sprachen des Berlinhafen-Bezirks in Deutsch-Neuguinea. Mitteilungen des Seminars für Orientalische Sprachen 8: 1138.Google Scholar
Klamer, Marian, 2010. A Grammar of Teiwa. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Klamer, Marian and Ewing, Michael, 2010. The languages of East Nusantara: An introduction. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 124.Google Scholar
Klamer, Marian, Reesink, Ger P. and van Staden, Mirjam, 2008. East Nusantara as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 95149. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, Peter, Cochran, Anne and Disner, Sandra, 1977. Laterals and trills. Journal of the International Phonetic Association 7: 4654.Google Scholar
Ladefoged, Peter and Maddieson, Ian, 1996. The Sounds of the World’s Languages. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Laidig, Wyn D. and Laidig, Carol J., 1995. A synopsis of Larike morphology and syntax. NUSA 38: 1842.Google Scholar
Lepofsky, Diane, 1988. The environmental context of Lapita settlement locations. In Kirch, Patrick V. and Hunt, T. L. (eds), The Archaeology of the Lapita Cultural Complex: A Critical Review, pp. 3347. Thomas Burke Memorial Washington State Museum Monographs, vol. 5. Seattle: Burke Museum.Google Scholar
Lewis, M. Paul, Simons, Gary F. and Fennig, Charles D. (eds), 2014. Ethnologue: Languages of the World, 17th edition. Dallas, TX: SIL International. www.ethnologue.comGoogle Scholar
Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 1983. A Grammar of Manam. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Lichtenberk, Frantisek, 2013. The rise and demise of possessive classifiers in Austronesian. In Kikusawa, Ritsuko and Reid, Lawrence A. (eds), Historical Linguistics 2011: Selected Papers from the 20th International Conference on Historical Linguistics, Osaka, 25–30 July 2011, pp. 199225. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Longacre, Robert E., 1972. Hierarchy and Universality of Discourse Constituents on New Guinea Languages: Discussion. Washington, DC: Georgetown University Press.Google Scholar
Loughnane, Robyn and Fedden, Sebastian, 2011. Is Oksapmin Ok? A study of the genetic relationship between Oksapmin and the Ok languages. Australian Journal of Linguistics 31: 142.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 1977. Notes on Maisin: An Austronesian language of the Northern Province of Papua New Guinea. Paper presented to the Annual Congress of the Linguistic Society of Papua New Guinea.Google Scholar
MacDonald, Lorna, 1990. A Grammar of Tauya. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Maddieson, Ian, 2013. Lateral consonants. In Dryer, and Haspelmath, (eds), chapter 8. http://wals.info/chapter/8Google Scholar
McElhanon, Kenneth A. and Voorhoeve, C. L., 1970. The Trans-New Guinea phylum: Explorations in Deep Level Genetic Relationships. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-16. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Milke, Wilhelm, 1958. Zur inneren Gliederung und geschichtlichen Stellung der ozeanisch-austronesischen Sprachen. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie 83: 5862.Google Scholar
Milke, Wilhelm, 1961. Beiträge zur ozeanischen Linguistik. Zeitschrift für Ethnologie 86: 162182.Google Scholar
Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1997. Sprung from two common sources: Sahul as a linguistic area. In McConvell, Patrick and Evans, Nicholas (eds), Archaeology and Linguistics: Aboriginal Australia in Global Perspective, pp. 135168. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 2010. Macrofamilies, macroareas and contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 361379. Oxford: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2005. The chequered career of the Trans New Guinea hypothesis: Recent research and its implications. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 67107.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2007. Recent research on the historical relationships of the Papuan languages, or, what does linguistics say about the prehistory of Melanesia? In Friedlaender, Jonathan (ed.), Population Genetics, Linguistics, and Culture History in the Southwest Pacific: A Synthesis, pp. 3659. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2008. Where and when was Proto Oceanic spoken? Linguistic and archaeological evidence. In Lander, Yury A. and Ogoblin, Alexander K. (eds), Language and Text in the Austronesian World: Studies in Honour of Ülo Sirk, pp. 4771. Munich: LINCOM Europa.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2012. How reconstructable is Proto Trans New Guinea? Problems, progress, prospects. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 88164.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), 2005. Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of Papuan-speaking Peoples. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew and Hammarström, Harald, in press. The Trans New Guinea family. In Palmer, Bill (ed.), The Languages and Linguistics of New Guinea: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Pilhofer, G., 1933. Grammatik der Kâte-Sprache in Neuguinea. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1911. Comparative notes on Maisin and other languages of eastern Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 41: 397405.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1913. The languages of the Papuan Gulf District, Papua. Zeitschrift fur Kolonialsprachen 4: 2080.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1923. The languages of the Western Division of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 53: 332360.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1926. A Comparative Study of the Melanesian Island Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1929. The languages of the Central Division of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 59: 6596.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1932. A Grammar of the Kiwai Language, Fly Delta, Papua, with a Kiwai Vocabulary by E. Baxter Riley. Port Moresby: E.G. Baker, Government Printer.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney H., 1938. The languages of the Eastern and South-Eastern Divisions of Papua. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 68: 153208.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger, 2002. Clause-final negation: Structure and interpretation. Functions of Language 9: 239268.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger, 2003. The North Papuan Linkage: A hypothesis. Paper for the Workshop Pioneers of Island Melanesia, Cambridge, April 2003.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger, 2009. A connection between Bird’s Head and (Proto) Oceanic. In Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), Discovering History through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross, pp. 181192. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 605. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger, 2010. Prefixation of arguments in West Papuan languages. In Ewing, and Klamer, (eds), pp. 7195.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger and Dunn, Michael, 2012. Systematic typological comparison as a tool for investigating language history. In Evans, Nicholas and Klamer, Marian (eds), Melanesian Languages on the Edge of Asia: Challenges for the Twenty-first Century, pp. 3471. Language Documentation and Conservation Special Publication 5. Honolulu: Language Documentation and Conservation.Google Scholar
Reesink, Ger, Singer, Ruth and Dunn, Michael, 2009. Explaining the linguistic diversity of Sahul using population models. PLoS Biology 7: e1000241.Google Scholar
Remijsen, Bert, 2001. Word-prosodic Systems of Raja Ampat Languages. PhD dissertation, University of Leiden.Google Scholar
Remijsen, Bert, 2002. Lexically contrastive stress accent and lexical tone in Ma’ya. In Gussenhoven, Carlos and Warner, Natasha (eds), Laboratory Phonology, vol. 7, pp. 585614. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Renfrew, Colin, 2002. ‘The emerging synthesis’: The archaeogenetics of farming/language dispersals and other spread zones. In Bellwood, and Renfrew, (eds), pp. 316.Google Scholar
Roberts, John R., 1997. Switch-reference in Papua New Guinea: A preliminary survey. In Pawley, Andrew (ed.), Papers in Papuan Linguistics, no. 3, pp. 101241. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-87. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1984. Maisin: A preliminary sketch. In Papers in New Guinea Linguistics, no. 23, pp. 182. Pacific Linguistics, vol. A-63. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1987. A contact-induced morphosyntactic change in the Bel languages of Papua New Guinea. In Laycock, Donald C. and Winter, W. (eds), A World of Language: Papers Presented to Professor S. A. Wurm on his 65th Birthday, pp. 583601. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-100. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1988. Proto Oceanic and the Austronesian Languages of Western Melanesia. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-98. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1993. Tonogenesis in the North Huon Gulf chain. In Edmondson, Jerold A. and Gregerson, Kenneth J. (eds), Tonality in Austronesian Languages, pp. 133153. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publications, vol. 24. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1994. Areal phonological features in north central New Ireland. In Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell (eds), Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World, pp. 551572. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Contact-induced change and the comparative method: Cases from Papua New Guinea. In Durie, Mark and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change, pp. 180217. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Contact-induced change in Oceanic languages in north-west Melanesia. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, R. M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 134166. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2003. Diagnosing prehistoric language contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), Motives for Language Change, pp. 174198. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2005a. Pronouns as a preliminary diagnostic for grouping Papuan languages. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 1566.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2005b. Towards a reconstruction of the history of tone in the Trans New Guinea family. In Kaji, (ed.), pp. 331.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2007. Calquing and metatypy. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 1: 116143.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2008. A history of metatypy in the Bel languages. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 2 (1): 149164.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2013. Diagnosing contact processes from their outcomes: The importance of life stages. Journal of Language Contact 6: 547.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2014. Reconstructing the history of languages in northwest New Britain: Inheritance and contact. Journal of Historical Linguistics 4: 84132.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm and Næss, Åshild, 2007. An Oceanic origin for Äiwoo, the language of the Reef Islands? Oceanic Linguistics 46: 456498.Google Scholar
Sahlins, Marshall D., 1963. Poor man, rich man, big-man, chief: Political types in Melanesia and Polynesia. Comparative Studies in Society and History 5: 285303.Google Scholar
Schapper, Antoinette, 2009. Bunaq: A Papuan Language of Central Timor. PhD thesis, The Australian National University.Google Scholar
Schapper, Antoinette, 2014. Elevation in the spatial deictic systems of Alor-Pantar languages. In Klamer, Marian (ed.), Alor-Pantar Languages: History and Typology, pp. 247284. Berlin: Language Science Press.Google Scholar
Schapper, Antoinette, Huber, Juliette and van Engelenhoven, Aone, 2014. The relatedness of Timor-Kisar and Alor-Pantar languages: A preliminary demonstration. In Klamer, Marian (ed.), Alor-Pantar Languages: History and Typology, pp. 99154. Berlin: Language Science Press.Google Scholar
Scheinfeldt, Laura B., Friedlaender, F. R., Friedlaender, Jonathan S. et al., 2007. Y-chromosome variation in Northern Island Melanesia. In Friedlaender, (ed.), pp. 8195.Google Scholar
Smallhorn, Jacinta, 2011. The Binanderean Languages of Papua New Guinea: Reconstruction and Subgrouping. Studies in Language Change, vol. 9. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Smith, Ellen, 2016. Contact-induced change in a highly endangered language of northern Bougainville. Australian Journal of Linguistics 36 (3): 369405.Google Scholar
Specht, Jim, 2005. Revisiting the Bismarcks: Some alternative views. In Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of Papuan-Speaking Peoples, pp. 235288. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Spriggs, Matthew, 1996. Chronology and colonisation in Island Southeast Asia and the Pacific: New data and an evaluation. In Davidson, Janet, Irwin, Geoffrey, Leach, Foss, Pawley, Andrew and Brown, Dorothy (eds), Oceanic Culture History: Essays in Honour of Roger Green, pp. 3350. Dunedin: New Zealand Journal of Archaeology.Google Scholar
Spriggs, Matthew J. T., 1997. The Island Melanesians. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Strong, W. M., 1911. The Maisin language. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 41: 381396.Google Scholar
Summerhayes, Glenn R., Leavesley, Matthew, Fairbairn, Andrew et al., 2010. Human adaptation and plant use in highland New Guinea 49,000 to 44,000 years ago. Science 330: 7881.Google Scholar
Suter, Edgar, 2012. Verbs with pronominal object prefixes in Finisterre-Huon languages. In Hammarström, and van den Heuvel, (eds), pp. 2359.Google Scholar
Swadling, Pamela and Hide, Robin, 2005. Changing landscape and social interaction: Looking at agricultural history from a Sepik-Ramu perspective. In Pawley, et al. (eds), pp. 289327.Google Scholar
Terrill, Angela, 2002. Systems of nominal classification in East Papuan languages. Oceanic Linguistics 41: 6388.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2001. Language Contact: An Introduction. Edinburgh: Edinburgh University Press.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1982. A Comparative Study of Anêm and Lusi. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-83. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1987. Processes of Change in the Languages of North-Western New Britain. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-99. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1989. How exoteric languages build a lexicon: Esoterogeny in West New Britain. In Harlow, Ray and Hooper, Robin (eds), VICAL 1, Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 555579. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1992. Sociolinguistic typology and other factors effecting change in northwestern New Britain, Papua New Guinea. In Dutton, Tom (ed.), Culture Change, Language Change: Case Studies from Melanesia, pp. 123139. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-120. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1994. Renovation and innovation in the languages of north-western New Britain. In Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell (eds), Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World, pp. 573609. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Usher, Timothy and Suter, Edgar, 2015. The Anim languages of Southern New Guinea. Oceanic Linguistics 54 (1): 110142.Google Scholar
Van Valin, Robert D. Jr and LaPolla, Randy J., 1997. Syntax: Structure, Meaning and Function. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Voorhoeve, C. L., 2001. Proto Awyu-Dumut phonology II. In Pawley, Andrew, Ross, Malcolm and Tryon, Darrell (eds), The Boy from Bundaberg: Studies in Melanesian Linguistics in Honour of Tom Dutton, pp. 361381. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 514. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Weinreich, Uriel, 1953. Languages in Contact: Findings and Problems. Publications of the Linguistic Circle of New York, vol. 1. New York: Linguistic Circle of New York.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A., 1975a. Language distribution in the New Guinea area. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 338.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A. (ed.), 1975b. New Guinea Area Languages and Language Study, vol. 1: Papuan Languages and the New Guinea Linguistic Scene. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-38. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A., 1982. The Papuan Languages of Oceania. Tübingen: Narr.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A. and Hattori, Shirō (eds), 1981. Language Atlas of the Pacific Area, part 1. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-66. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A. and McElhanon, K. A., 1975. Papuan language classification problems. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 145164.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stefan A., Voorhoeve, C. L. and McElhanon, K. A., 1975. The Trans-New Guinea phylum in general. In Wurm, (ed.), pp. 299322.Google Scholar

References

Arthur, Bill and Morphy, Frances (eds), 2005. Macquarie Atlas of Indigenous Australia. New South Wales: Macquarie Library Pty.Google Scholar
Attenbrow, Val, 2010. Sydney’s Aboriginal Past: Investigating the Archaeological and Historical Records. University of New South Wales Press.Google Scholar
Ball, Douglas, 2007. On ergativity and accusativity in Proto-Polynesian and Proto-Central Pacific. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (1): 128153.Google Scholar
Beaglehole, J. C. (ed.), 1969. The Journals of Captain James Cook: The Voyage of the Resolution and Adventure, 1772–1775. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press for the Hakluyt Society.Google Scholar
Bedford, Stuart, Sand, Christophe and Connaughton, Sean P. (eds), 2007. Oceanic Explorations: Lapita and Western Pacific Settlement. Canberra: Australian National University Press.Google Scholar
Biggs, Bruce, 1965. Direct and indirect inheritance in Rotuma. Lingua 13: 373405. Revised version in Geraghty, and Tent, (eds), pp. 132.Google Scholar
Biggs, Bruce, 1991. A linguist revisits the New Zealand bush. In Pawley, Andrew K. (ed.), Man and a Half: Essays in Pacific Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulmer, pp. 6772. Auckland: The Polynesian Society.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert A., 1981. Some remarks on labiovelar correspondences in Oceanic languages. In Hollyman, and Pawley, (eds), pp. 229253.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert A., 1987. Rennell-Bellona /l/ and the ‘Hiti’ substratum. In Laycock, Donald C. and Winter, Werner (eds), A World of Language: Papers Presented to Professor S. A. Wurm on his Sixty Fifth Birthday, pp. 6979. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-100. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2005. Review of Lynch, Ross and Crowley 2002. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 544558.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2008. Remote Melanesia: One history or two? An addendum to Donohue and Denham. Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 445459.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1941. A New Fijian Dictionary. Sydney: Australian Medical Publishing Company.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1943. The Linguistic Position of South-East Papua. Sydney: The Australasian Medical Publishing Co.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1962. Oceanic linguistics today. Current Anthropology 3 (4): 371428.Google Scholar
Capell, Arthur, 1971. The Austronesian languages of Australian New Guinea. In Sebeok, T. E. (ed.), Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 8: Oceania, pp. 240340. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Churchward, C. Maxwell, 1940. Rotuman Grammar and Dictionary. Sydney: Australasian Medical Publishing Co.Google Scholar
Churchward, C. Maxwell, 1959. Tongan Dictionary. Government of Tonga.Google Scholar
Clark, Ross, 1986. Linguistic convergence in Central Vanuatu. In Geraghty, Paul, Carrington, Lois and Wurm, Stephen A. (eds), FOCAL II: Papers from the Fourth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, pp. 333342. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-94. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Clark, Ross, 1994. The Polynesian outliers as a locus of language contact. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 109139.Google Scholar
Codrington, R. H., 1885. The Melanesian Languages. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Codrington, R. H., 1891. The Melanesians: Studies in their Anthropology and Folk Lore. Oxford: Clarendon Press.Google Scholar
Cowan, H. K. J., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 398400.Google Scholar
Crowley, Terry, 1990. An Illustrated Bislama–English and English–Bislama Dictionary. Vila: Pacific Languages Unit, University of the South Pacific.Google Scholar
Crowley, Terry, 2000. An Erromangan (Sye) Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 508. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Davenport, William, 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 400402.Google Scholar
Deacon, A. Bernard, 1934. Malekula: A Vanishing People in the New Hebrides. London: Routledge.Google Scholar
Dempwolff, Otto, 1920. Die Lautentsprechungen der indonesischen lippenlaute in einigen anderen austronesischen Südseesprachen. Zeitschrift für Eingeborenen-Sprachen, Supplement 2. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Dempwolff, Otto, 1937. Vergleichende Lautlehre des Austronesischen Wortschatzes, vol. 2. Berlin: Dietrich Reimer.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W., 1980. The Languages of Australia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark, 2005. Word order in New Guinea: Dispelling a myth. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 527536.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2008. The languages of Lapita: Vanuatu and an early Papuan presence in the Pacific. Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 433444.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Denham, Tim, 2012. Lapita and Proto-Oceanic: Thinking outside the pot? The Journal of Pacific History 47 (4): 443457.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Musgrave, Simon, 2007. Typology and the linguistic macrohistory of Island Melanesia. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (2): 348387.Google Scholar
Donohue, Mark and Schapper, Antoinette, 2008. Whence the Austronesian indirect possession construction? Oceanic Linguistics 47 (2): 316327.Google Scholar
Dubois, M. J., 1976. Peuplement du Pacifique. Bulletin de la Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie 28: 1228.Google Scholar
Dubois, M. J., 1981. Histoire résumée de Maré (Iles Loyauté). Publication 27. Nouméa: Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie.Google Scholar
Dubois, M. J., 1982. Kwênyii: l’Ile des Pins aux temps anciens. Publication 30. Nouméa: Société d’Etudes Historiques de la Nouvelle-Calédonie.Google Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Foley, Robert, Levinson, Stephen, Reesink, Ger and Terrill, Angela, 2007. Statistical reasoning in the evaluation of typological diversity in Island Melanesia. Oceanic Linguistics 46 (2): 388403.Google Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Terrill, Angela, Reesink, Ger, Foley, Robert A. and Levinson, Stephen C., 2005. Structural phylogenetics and the reconstruction of ancient language history. Science 309 (5743): 20722075.Google Scholar
Dutton, Tom and Tryon, Darrell T. (eds), 1994. Language Contact and Change in the Austronesian World. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Evans, Bethwyn (ed.), 2009. Discovering History through Language: Papers in Honour of Malcolm Ross. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 605. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Evans, Bethwyn and Palmer, Bill, 2011. Contact-induced change in southern Bougainville. Oceanic Linguistics 50 (2): 483523.Google Scholar
Foley, William A., 1986. The Papuan Languages of New Guinea. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Fox, C. E., 1955. A Dictionary of the Nggela Language. Auckland: Unity Press.Google Scholar
Fox, Charles E., 1978. Arosi Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-57. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
François, Alexandre, 2006. Are Vanikoro languages really Austronesian? Paper read at Second Conference on Austronesian Languages and Linguistics, Oxford.Google Scholar
François, Alexandre, 2007. Noun articles in Torres and Banks languages: Conservation and innovation. In Siegel, , Lynch, and Eades, (eds), pp. 313326.Google Scholar
François, Alexandre, 2009. The languages of Vanikoro: Three lexicons and one grammar. In Evans, (ed.), pp. 103126.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul A., 1977. Fijian dialect diversity and foreigner talk: The evidence of pre-missionary manuscripts. In Schütz, (ed.), pp. 5167.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul A., 1983. The History of the Fijian Languages. Oceanic Linguistics Special Publication 19. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul, 1989. Proto Southern Oceanic and its relationships. In Harlow, Ray and Hooper, Robin (eds), VICAL 1: Oceanic Languages: Papers from the Fifth International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, special publication: Te Reo. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul, 1994. Linguistic evidence for the Tongan Empire. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 233249.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul, 1996. Problems with Proto Central Pacific. In Lynch, John and Pat, Fa’afo (eds), Oceanic Studies: Proceedings of the First International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics, pp. 8593. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-133. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul, 2001. Amazing -a: The suffix that named the Pacific world. Rongorongo Studies 11 (2): 6374.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul, 2004. Borrowed plants in Fiji and Polynesia: Some linguistic evidence. In Geraghty, and Tent, (eds), pp. 6598.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul and Nunn, Patrick, 2013. Pre-European contact between Australia and New Caledonia: linguistic and other evidence. Paper presented at COOL9 [Ninth International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics], University of Newcastle, NSW, Australia.Google Scholar
Geraghty, Paul and Tent, Jan, 2004. Borrowing: A Pacific Perspective. Canberra: Pacific Linguistics.Google Scholar
Grace, George W., 1961. Austronesian linguistics and culture history. American Anthropologist 63: 359368.Google Scholar
Grace, George W., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 408410.Google Scholar
Grace, George W., 1981. An Essay on Language. Columbia, SC: Hornbeam.Google Scholar
Green, Roger, 1991. Near and remote Oceania: Disestablishing ‘Melanesia’ in culture history. In Pawley, Andrew (ed.), Man and a Half: Essays in Pacific Anthropology and Ethnobiology in Honour of Ralph Bulmer, pp. 491502. Auckland: The Polynesian Society.Google Scholar
Harrison, Sheldon P., 1981. Recent directions in Oceanic linguistics: A review of the contributions to Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures. Oceanic Linguistics 20: 151231.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook of the History of English, pp. 497507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hocart, A. M., 1923. Who are the Melanesians? Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute of Great Britain and Ireland 53: 472.Google Scholar
Hollyman, Jim and Pawley, Andrew (eds), 1981. Studies in Pacific Languages and Cultures in Honour of Bruce Biggs. Auckland: Linguistic Society of New Zealand.Google Scholar
Horton, David (ed.), 1994. The Encyclopaedia of Aboriginal Australia. Canberra: Aboriginal Studies Press.Google Scholar
Howells, William, 1973. The Pacific Islanders. New York: Scribners.Google Scholar
Jackson, Geoffrey W., 2001. Tuvaluan Dictionary. Suva: the author.Google Scholar
Kirch, Patrick Vinton, 1997. The Lapita Peoples: Ancestors of the Oceanic World. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Labillardière, J., 1800. An Account of a Voyage in Search of La Pérouse. John Stockdale.Google Scholar
Layard, John, 1942. Stone Men of Malekula. London: Chatto and Windus.Google Scholar
Lincoln, Peter, 1978. Reef-Santa Cruz as Austronesian. In Wurm, Stephen and Carrington, Lois (eds), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, pp. 929967. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-61. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lindstrom, Lamont, 1986. Kwamera Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-95. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 1977. Lenakel Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-55. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 1981. Melanesian diversity and Polynesian homogeneity: The other side of the coin. Oceanic Linguistics 20: 95129.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 2001. The Linguistic History of Southern Vanuatu. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 509. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 2002. The Proto-Oceanic labiovelars: Some new observations. Oceanic Linguistics 41 (2): 310362.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 2005. The apicolabial shift in Nese. Oceanic Linguistics 44 (2): 389403.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, 2009. At sixes and sevens: The development of numeral systems in Vanuatu and New Caledonia. In Evans, (ed.), pp. 391411.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, Ross, Malcolm and Crowley, Terry, 2002. The Oceanic Languages. Curzon Language Family Series. Richmond, UK: Curzon Press.Google Scholar
Lynch, John and Tepahae, Philip, 2001. Anejom Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 510. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lynch, John and Tryon, D. T., 1985. Central-Eastern Oceanic: A subgrouping hypothesis. In Pawley, Andrew and Carrington, Lois (eds), Austronesian Linguistics at the Eleventh Pacific Science Congress, pp. 3152. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-88. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Muller, Kal, 1972. Taboos and magic rule Namba lives. National Geographic 141 (1): 5683.Google Scholar
Næss, Åshild, 2006. Bound nominal elements in Äiwoo (Reefs): A reappraisal of the ‘multiple noun class systems’. Oceanic Linguistics 45 (2): 269296.Google Scholar
Næss, Åshild, 2013. From Austronesian voice to Oceanic transitivity: Äiwoo as the ‘missing link’. Paper presented at COOL9 [Ninth International Conference on Oceanic Linguistics], University of Newcastle, NSW, Australia.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 1972. On the internal relationships of Eastern Oceanic languages. In Green, Roger and Kelly, M. (eds), Studies in Oceanic Culture History, vol. 3, pp. 1142. Pacific Anthropological Records. Honolulu: Bishop Museum.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 1981. Melanesian diversity and Polynesian homogeneity: A unified explanation for language. In Hollyman, and Pawley, (eds), pp. 269309.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2006. Explaining the aberrant Austronesian languages of Southeast Melanesia: 150 years of debate. Journal of the Polynesian Society 115 (3): 215258.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2007. The origins of Early Lapita culture: The testimony of historical linguistics. In Bedford, , Sand, and Connaughton, (eds), pp. 1749.Google Scholar
Pawley, Andrew, 2009. The role of the Solomon Islands in the first settlement of Remote Oceania: Bringing linguistic evidence to an archaeological debate. In Adelaar, Alexander and Pawley, Andrew (eds), Austronesian Historical Linguistics and Culture History: A Festschrift for Robert Blust, pp. 515540. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 601. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Pietrusewsky, Michael and Douglas, Michele T., 1993. Tooth ablation in old Hawai‘i. Journal of the Polynesian Society 102 (3): 255272.Google Scholar
Ray, Sidney Herbert, 1926. A Comparative Study of the Melanesian Island Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Reid, Lawrence A., 1994. Unravelling the linguistic histories of Philippine Negritos. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 443475.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Contact-induced change and the comparative method: Cases from Papua New Guinea. In Durie, Mark and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The Comparative Method Reviewed: Regularity and Irregularity in Language Change, pp. 180217. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2001. Is there an East Papuan phylum? Evidence from pronouns. In Pawley, Andrew, Ross, Malcolm and Tryon, Darrell (eds), The Boy From Bundaberg: Studies in Melanesian Linguistics in Honour of Tom Dutton, pp. 301321. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 514. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2004. The grammaticalization of directional verbs in Oceanic languages. In Bril, Isabelle and Ozanne-Rivierre, Françoise (eds), Complex Predicates in Oceanic Languages: Studies in the Dynamics of Binding and Boundness, pp. 297329. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 2005. Pronouns as a preliminary diagnostic for grouping Papuan languages. In Pawley, Andrew, Attenborough, Robert, Golson, Jack and Hide, Robin (eds), Papuan Pasts: Cultural, Linguistic and Biological Histories of the Papuan-Speaking Peoples, pp. 1565. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 572. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm and Næss, Åshild, 2007. An Oceanic origin for Äiwoo, the language of the Reef Islands? Oceanic Linguistics 46: 456498.Google Scholar
Sand, Christophe, 1996. Le début du peuplement austronésien de la Nouvelle-Calédonie: données archéologiques récentes. Les cahiers de l’archéologie en Nouvelle-Calédonie, vol. 6. Nouméa: Département de l’archéologie, Service Territorial des Musées et du Patrimoine.Google Scholar
Schmitz, Carl A., 1962. Comments on Arthur Capell, ‘Oceanic linguistics today’. Current Anthropology 3: 417420.Google Scholar
Schütz, Albert (ed.), 1977. Fijian Language Studies: Borrowing and Pidginization. Bulletin of the Fiji Museum, vol. 4. Suva: Fiji Museum.Google Scholar
Siegel, Jeff, 2016. Contact-induced grammatical change in Melanesia: Who were the agents of change? Australian Journal of Linguistics 36 (3): 406428.Google Scholar
Siegel, Jeff, Lynch, John and Eades, Diana (eds), 2007. Language Description, History and Development: Linguistic Indulgence in Memory of Terry Crowley. Creole Language Library, vol. 30. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Speiser, Felix, 1946. Versuch einer Siedlungsgeschichte der Südsee. Denkschriften der schweizerischen naturforschenden Gesellschaft, vol. 72: 1.Google Scholar
Speiser, Felix, 1990. Ethnology of Vanuatu: An Early Twentieth-Century Study, translated by Stephenson, D. Q.. Bathurst: Crawford House Press.Google Scholar
Spriggs, Matthew, 1997. The Island Melanesians. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Terrill, Angela, 2002. Systems of nominal classification in East Papuan languages. Oceanic Linguistics 41: 6388.Google Scholar
Terrill, Angela, 2011. Languages in contact: An exploration of stability and change in the Solomon Islands. Oceanic Linguistics 50 (2): 312337.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1982. A Comparative Study in Anêm and Lusi. Pacific Linguistics, vol. B-83. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Thurston, William R., 1994. Renovation and innovation in the languages of north-western New Britain. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 573609.Google Scholar
Tryon, Darrell T., 1982. The Solomons and Vanuatu: Varying responses to diversity. In May, R. J. and Nelson, Hank (eds), Melanesia: Beyond Diversity, pp. 241248. Canberra: Research School of Pacific Studies, Australian National University.Google Scholar
Tryon, Darrell T., 1994. Language contact and contact-induced language change in the Eastern Outer Islands, Solomon Islands. In Dutton, and Tryon, (eds), pp. 611648.Google Scholar
Tryon, Darrell T. and Hackman, B. D., 1983. Solomon Islands Languages: An Internal Classification. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-72. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stephen, 1954. The Indonesian element in Melanesia: A reply. Journal of the Polynesian Society 63: 266273.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stephen, 1978. Reefs-Santa Cruz: Austronesian, but… In Wurm, Stephen and Carrington, Lois (eds), Second International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics: Proceedings, pp. 9691010. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-61. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stephen A., 1982. Papuan Languages of Oceania. Ars Linguistica, vol. 7. Tübingen: Günter Narr.Google Scholar
Wurm, Stephen, 1985. Language contact and special lexical developments. In Pieper, Ursula and Stickel, Gerhard (eds), Studia Linguistica Diachronica et Synchronica: Werner Winter sexagenario anno MCMLXXXIII, pp. 961971. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar

References

Bender, Byron W., et al., 2003. Proto-Micronesian reconstructions, parts I, II. Oceanic Linguistics 42: 1110, 271358.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 1980. More on the origin of glottalic consonants. Lingua 52: 123156.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 1981. Variation of retention rate among Austronesian languages. Paper presented at the Third International Conference on Austronesian Linguistics, Denpasar, Bali.Google Scholar
Blust, Robert, 2000. Chamorro historical phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 39: 83123.Google Scholar
von Chamisso, Adelbert, 1864 [1836]. Reise um die Welt. Berlin: Weidmann.Google Scholar
Costenoble, Hermann, 1940. Die Chamoro-Sprache. The Hague: Martinus Nijhoff.Google Scholar
Elbert, Samuel H., 1972. A Puluwat Dictionary. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-24. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Fritz, Georg, 1911. Die zentralkarolinische Sprache. Berlin: Reimer.Google Scholar
Goodenough, Ward H., 1992. Gradual and quantum changes in the history of Chuukese (Trukese) phonology. Oceanic Linguistics 31: 93114.Google Scholar
Goodenough, Ward H. and Sugita, Hiroshi (eds), 1990. Trukese–English Dictionary, Supplementary Volume: English–Trukese Finderlist. Philadelphia: American Philosophical Society.Google Scholar
Grant, Anthony P., 2002a. Fabric, pattern, shift and diffusion: What change in Oregon Penutian languages can tell historical linguists. In Buszard-Welcher, Laura (ed.), Proceedings of the Meeting of the Hokan-Penutian Workshop, June 17–18, 2000, University of California at Berkeley, report 11: Survey of California and Other Indian Languages, pp. 3356. Berkeley, CA: Department of Linguistics, University of California.Google Scholar
Grant, Anthony P., 2002b. Problems in placing Palauan within Malayo-Polynesian. Unpublished manuscript, University of Manchester.Google Scholar
Grant, Anthony P., 2003. Review of Ruth King, The Lexical Basis of Grammatical Borrowing: A Prince Edward Island Case Study (Amsterdam: John Benjamins, 2000). Word 54 (3): 251256.Google Scholar
Grant, Anthony P., 2014. The ‘language of Tobi’ as presented in Horace Holden’s Narrative: Evidence for restructuring and lexical mixture in a Nuclear Micronesian-based pidgin. In Buchstaller, Isabelle, Holmberg, Anders and Almoaily, Mohammad (eds), Pidgins and Creoles beyond Africa-Europe Encounters, pp. 4156. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Hall, Robert A. Jr, 1945. English loan-words in Micronesian languages. Language 21: 212217.Google Scholar
Holden, Horace, 1836. Narrative of the Shipwreck, Captivity and Sufferings of Horace Holden and Benj. H. Nute. Boston: Russell, Shattuck and Co.Google Scholar
Izui, Hironasuke, 1965. The languages of Micronesia: Their origin and diversity. Lingua 15: 349359.Google Scholar
Jackson, Frederick Henry, 1983. The Internal and External Relationships of the Trukic Languages of Micronesia. PhD dissertation, University of Hawai‘i. Ann Arbor: University Microfilms International.Google Scholar
Jackson, Frederick H. and Marck, Jeffrey C., 1991. Carolinian–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Jensen, John Thayer, 1977. Yapese Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Jensen, John Thayer, Pugram, Leo David and Defeg, Raphael, 1977. Yapese–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Josephs, Lewis S., 1975. Palauan Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Josephs, Lewis S., 1977. Handbook of Palauan Grammar, two volumes. Koror: Bureau of Curriculum and Instruction, Ministry of Education.Google Scholar
Josephs, Lewis S., 1984. The impact of borrowing on Palauan. In Bender, Byron W. (ed.), Studies in Micronesian Linguistics, pp. 81123. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-80. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Lynch, John, Ross, Malcolm and Crowley, Terry, 2002. The Oceanic Languages. Curzon Language Family Series. Richmond, Surrey: Curzon Press.Google Scholar
McManus, , Edwin, S.J., edited by Josephs, Lewis S., 1977. Palauan–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Reid, Lawrence A., 2002. Morphosyntactic evidence for the position of Chamorro in the Austronesian language family. In Bauer, Robert S. (ed.), Collected Papers on Southeast Asian and Pacific Linguistics, pp. 6394. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Rodríguez-Ponga Salamanca, R., 1995. El elemento español en la lengua chamorra (Islas Marianas). Madrid: Servicio de Publicaciones de la Universidad Complutense.Google Scholar
Ross, Malcolm, 1996. Is Yapese Oceanic? In Nothofer, Bernd (ed.), Reconstruction, Classification, Description: Festschrift in Honor of Isidore Dyen, pp. 121166. Hamburg: Abera.Google Scholar
Sakiyama, Osamu, 1982. The characteristics of Nguluwan from the viewpoint of language contact. In Aoyagi, Machiko (ed.), Islanders and their Outside World: A Report of the Cultural Anthropological Research in the Caroline Islands of Micronesia in the Years 1980–1981, pp. 105127. Tokyo: Committee for Micronesian Research, St Paul’s (Rikkyo) University.Google Scholar
Salas Palomo, R. and Stolz, Thomas, 2008. Pro or contra Hispanisms: Attitudes of native speakers of modern Chamoru. In Stolz, Thomas, Bakker, D. and Salas Palomo, R. (eds), Hispanisation: The Impact of Spanish on the Lexicon and Grammar of the Indigenous Languages of Austronesia and the Americas, pp. 237267. Berlin and New York: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Sohn, Ho-Min 1975. Woleaian Reference Grammar. PALI Language Texts. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Sohn, Ho-Min and Bender, Byron W., 1973. A Ulithian Grammar. Pacific Linguistics, vol. C-23. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar
Sohn, Ho-Min and Tawerilmang, Anthony F., 1975. Woleaian–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah Grey, 2000. Linguistic areas and language history. In Gilbers, Dicky, Nerbonne, John and Schaeken, Jos (eds), Proceedings of the Groningen Conference on Languages in Contact, pp. 311327. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Topping, Donald M. (with the assistance of Dungca, Bernadita C.), 1973. Chamorro Reference Grammar. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Topping, Donald M. and Ogo, Pedro M., 1980. Spoken Chamorro. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Topping, Donald M., Ogo, Pedro M. and Dungca, Bernadita C., 1975. Chamorro–English Dictionary. Honolulu: University of Hawai‘i Press.Google Scholar
Walsh, John A. and Harui-Walsh, Eulalia, 1979. Loan words in Ulithian. Anthropological Linguistics 21: 154161.Google Scholar
Zobel, Erik, 2002. The position of Chamorro and Palauan in the Austronesian family tree: Evidence from verb morphosyntax. In Wouk, Fay and Ross, Malcolm (eds), The History and Typology of Western Austronesian Voice Systems, pp. 406434. Pacific Linguistics, vol. 520. Canberra: Australian National University.Google Scholar

References

Andrade, Manuel J., 1933. Quileute. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 149292. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Aoki, Haruo, 1962. Nez Perce and Northern Sahaptin: A binary comparison. International Journal of American Linguistics 28: 172182.Google Scholar
Beck, David, 2000. Grammatical convergence and the genesis of diversity in the Northwest Coast Sprachbund. Anthropological Linguistics 42 (2): 147213.Google Scholar
Bereznak, Catherine, 1995. The Pueblo Region as a Linguistic Area: Diffusion among the Indigenous Languages of the Southwest United States. Unpublished PhD thesis, Louisiana State University.Google Scholar
Blansitt, E. L., 1975. Progressive aspect. Working Papers on Language Universals 18: 134.Google Scholar
Boas, Franz, 1921. Ethnology of the Kwakiutl. Bureau of American Ethnology Annual Report 35, for the Years 1913–1914. Washington.Google Scholar
Boas, Franz, 1947. Kwakiutl Grammar, edited by Yampolsky, Helene Boas. Transactions of the American Philosophical Society, vol. 37.2.Google Scholar
Boas, Franz and Deloria, Ella, 1941. Dakota Grammar. Memoirs of the National Academy of Sciences, vol. XXIII.2. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar
Booker, Karen M., 1980. Comparative Muskogean: Aspects of Proto-Muskogean Verb Morphology. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Kansas.Google Scholar
Booker, Karen M., 1991. Languages of the Aboriginal Southeast: An Annotated Bibliography. Native American Bibliography Series, vol. 15. Metuchen, NJ: Scarecrow Press.Google Scholar
Booker, Karen M., 2005. Muskogean historical phonology. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 246298.Google Scholar
Booker, Karen M., Hudson, Charles and Rankin, Robert, 1992. Place name identification and multilingualism in the sixteenth-century Southeast. Ethnohistory 39: 399451.Google Scholar
Brain, Jeffrey P., Roth, George and de Reuse, Willem J., 2004. Tunica, Biloxi, and Ofo. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 586597.Google Scholar
Bright, William, 1957. The Karok Language. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 13.Google Scholar
Bright, William, 1959. Review of The Yurok language, by R. H. Robins. Language 35: 100104.Google Scholar
Brown, James A., 2004. Exchange and interaction until 1500. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 677685.Google Scholar
Bybee, Joan, Perkins, Revere and Pagliuca, William, 1994. The Evolution of Grammar: Tense, Aspect and Modality in the Languages of the World. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Byington, Cyrus, 1915. A Dictionary of the Choctaw Language, edited by Swanton, John R. and Halbert, Henry. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office. 1973 reprint, Oklahoma City, OK: Oklahoma City Indian Calendar, Inc.Google Scholar
Callaghan, Catherine, 1964. Phonemic borrowing in Lake Miwok. In Bright, William (ed.), Studies in Californian Linguistics, pp. 4653. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 34. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Callaghan, Catherine, 1987. Lake Miwok naturalization of borrowed phonemes. In Joseph, Brian and Zwicky, Arnold (eds), A Festschrift for Ilse Lehiste, pp. 8493. Working Papers in Linguistics, vol. 35. Columbus, OH: Ohio State University Department of Linguistics.Google Scholar
Callaghan, Catherine, 1991. Climbing a low mountain. In Chung, Sandra and Hankamer, Jorge (eds), A Festschrift for William F. Shipley, pp. 4759. Santa Cruz: Syntax Research Center, University of California.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 1997. American Indian Languages: The Historical Linguistics of Native America. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Chafe, Wallace, 2005. Caddo. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 323350.Google Scholar
Conathan, Lisa, 2004. The Linguistic Ecology of Northwestern California: Contact, Functional Convergence and Dialectology. PhD dissertation, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Crawford, James, 1975. Southeastern Indian languages. In Crawford, James M. (ed.), Studies in Southeastern Indian Languages, pp. 1120. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar
Dayley, Jon, 1989. Tümpisa (Panamint) Shoshone Grammar. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 115. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
De Laguna, Frederica, 1990. Tlingit. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 203228.Google Scholar
DeLancey, Scott, 1996. Penutian in the bipartite stem belt: Disentangling areal and genetic correspondences. In Proceedings of the Twenty-Second Annual Meeting of the Berkeley Linguistics Society: Special Session on Historical Topics in Native American Languages, pp. 3754.Google Scholar
Dorsey, James Owen and Swanton, John R., 1912. A Dictionary of the Biloxi and Ofo Languages, Accompanied with Thirty-one Biloxi Texts and Numerous Biloxi Phrases. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 47. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Dunn, John, 1995. Sm’algyax: A Reference Dictionary and Grammar for the Coast Tsimshian Language. Seattle, WA: University of Washington/Sealaska Heritage Foundation.Google Scholar
Einaudi, Paula, 1976. A Grammar of Biloxi. New York: GarlandGoogle Scholar
Elmendorf, William W. and Kroeber, A. L., 1960. The structure of Twana culture. Washington State University Research Studies 28.3: Monographic Supplement 2. Pullman. Reprinted 1992 in Coast Salish and Western Washington Indians IV, Seattle, WA: Washington State University Press.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, Pat-El, Na’ama and Huehnergard, John (eds), 2013. Contact among Genetically Related Languages. Special issue of Journal of Language Contact 6 (2).Google Scholar
Fogelson, Raymond D., 2004a. Cherokee in the East. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 337353.Google Scholar
Fogelson, Raymond D. (ed.), 2004b. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 14: Southeast. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Ford, Richard, 1983. Inter-Indian exchange in the Southwest. In Ortiz, (ed.), pp. 711722.Google Scholar
Frachtenberg, Leo, 1922. Siuslawan (Lower Umpqua). In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 2, pp. 431629. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar
Galloway, Patricia and Jackson, Jason Baird, 2004. Natchez and neighboring groups. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 598615.Google Scholar
Galloway, Patricia and Kidwell, Clara Sue, 2004. Choctaw in the East. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 499519.Google Scholar
Gatschet, Albert S. and Swanton, John R., 1932. A Dictionary of the Atakapa Language, Accompanied by Text Material. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 108. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1941. Tunica. In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, pp. 159204. Bureau of American Ethnology Bulletin, vol. 40.1. New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1946. A grammatical sketch of Tunica. In Linguistic Structures of Native America, pp. 337366. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 6. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1950. Tunica texts. University of California Publications in Linguistics 6 (1): 1174.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1953. Tunica dictionary. University of California Publications in Linguistics 6 (2): 175332.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1967. Language and taxonomy in northwestern California. American Anthropologist 96: 358362.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1969. The Prehistory of Languages. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1970. Consonant symbolism in northwestern California: A problem in diffusion. In Swanson, Earl H. Jr (ed.), Languages and Cultures of Western North America: Essays in Honor of Sven S. Liljeblad, pp. 8689. Pocatello: Idaho State University Press.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1971. Southeastern Indian linguistics. In Hudson, Charles (ed.), Red, White, and Black: Symposium on Indians in the Old South. Southern Anthropological Society Proceedings, vol. 5. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1973. The Southeast. In Sebeok, Thomas (ed.), Linguistics in North America, pp. 12101249. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 10. The Hague: Mouton. Reprinted in 1976 in Sebeok, Thomas (ed.), Native Languages of the Americas, pp. 121152. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1976. The Northern California linguistic area. In Langdon, Margaret and Silver, Shirley (eds), Hokan Studies: Papers from the First Conference on Hokan Languages, pp. 347359. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R., 1979. Southeastern languages. In Campbell, Lyle and Mithun, Marianne (eds), The Languages of Native North America, pp. 299326. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Haas, Mary R. and Hill, James H., 2015. Creek Texts, edited and translated by Martin, Jack B., Mauldin, Margaret McKane and McGirt, Juanita. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Hajda, Yvonne, 1984. Regional social organization in the Greater Lower Columbia. Paper read at the Annual Meeting of the American Anthropological Association, Chicago.Google Scholar
Hardy, Heather and Scancarelli, Janine (eds), 2005. Native Languages of the Southeastern United States. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar
Heaton, Raina, 2013. Active/stative agreement in Tunica. Manuscript, University of Hawai‘i.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd, 1993. Auxiliaries: Cognitive Forces and Grammaticalization. New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Heine, Bernd and Kuteva, Tania, 2005. Language Contact and Grammatical Change. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Heizer, Robert (ed.), 1978. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 8: California. Washington: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2010. Language contact: Reconsideration and reassessment. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 128. Oxford: Blackwell.Google Scholar
Hickey, Raymond, 2012. Early English and the Celtic hypothesis. In Nevalainen, Terttu and Traugott, Elizabeth Closs (eds), The Oxford Handbook on the History of English, pp. 497507. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Hoijer, Harry, 1933. Tonkawa: An Indian language of Texas. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 1148. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Hymes, Dell, 1955. The Language of the Kathlamet Chinook. Unpublished PhD thesis, Indiana University.Google Scholar
Innes, Pamela, 2004. Creek in the West. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 393403.Google Scholar
Jacobs, Melville, 1954. The areal spread of sound features in the languages north of California. In Papers from the Symposium on American Indian Linguistics Held at Berkeley, July 7, 1951. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 10.Google Scholar
Jacobsen, William H., 1969. Origin of the Nootka pharyngeals. International Journal of American Linguistics 35: 125153.Google Scholar
Jacobsen, William H., 1980a. Inclusive/exclusive: A diffused pronominal category in native western North America. In Proceedings of the Chicago Linguistic Society, Papers from the Parasession on Pronouns and Anaphora, pp. 204227.Google Scholar
Jacobsen, William., 1980b. Washo bipartite verb stems. In Klar, Kathryn, Langdon, Margaret and Silver, Shirley (eds), American Indian and Indoeuropean Studies, pp. 85100. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Jany, Carmen, 2009. Chimariko Grammar: Areal and Typological Perspective. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 142.Google Scholar
Johanson, Lars, 2008. Remodeling grammar: Copying, conventionalization, grammaticalization. In Siemund, Peter and Kintana, Noemi (eds), Language Contact and Contact Languages, pp. 6179. Hamburg Studies on Multilingualism, vol. 7. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Kaufman, David, 2013. Positional auxiliaries in Biloxi 1. International Journal of American Linguistics 79 (2): 283299.Google Scholar
Kimball, Geoffrey, 2005. Natchez. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 385453.Google Scholar
Kinkade, M. Dale, 1991. Prehistory of the Native languages of the Northwest Coast. In Great Ocean Conference: The North Pacific to 1600, pp. 37158. Portland: Oregon Historical Society Press.Google Scholar
Kinkade, M. Dale, Elmendorf, William H., Rigsby, Bruce and Aoki, Haruo, 1998. Languages. In Walker, (ed.), 4972.Google Scholar
Kroskrity, Paul, 1982. Language contact and linguistic diffusion: The Arizona Tewa speech community. In Barkin, F., Brandt, E. and Ornstein-Galicia, J. (eds), Bilingualism and Language Contact: Spanish, English, and Native American Languages, pp. 5172. New York: Teachers College Press.Google Scholar
Kuteva, Tania, 2001. Auxiliation: An Enquiry into the Nature of Grammaticalization. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Langdon, Margaret, 1971. Sound symbolism in Yuman languages. In Sawyer, Jesse (ed.), Studies in American Indian Languages, pp. 149174. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 65.Google Scholar
Lipkind, William, 1945. Winnebago Grammar. New York: King’s Crown Press.Google Scholar
Macaulay, Monica, 1992. Inverse marking in Karuk: The function of the suffix -ap. International Journal of American Linguistics 58: 182210.Google Scholar
Macaulay, Monica, 2000. Obviative marking in ergative contexts: The case of Karuk ’îin. International Journal of American Linguistics 66: 464498.Google Scholar
Martin, Jack B., 1994. Modeling language contact in the prehistory of the southeastern U.S. In Kwachka, Patricia (ed.), Perspectives on the Southeast: Linguistics, Archaeology, and Ethnohistory, pp. 1424, 143163. Southern Anthropological Society Proceedings, vol. 27. Athens, GA: University of Georgia Press.Google Scholar
Martin, Jack, 2004. Languages. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 6886.Google Scholar
Martin, Jack B., 2011. A Grammar of Creek (Muskogee). Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar
Matthews, G. Hubert, 1970. Notes on the Proto-Siouan continuants. International Journal of American Linguistics 36: 98109.Google Scholar
May, Stephanie, 2004. Alabama and Koasati. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 407414.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 1991. Active/agentive case marking and its motivations. Language 67: 510546.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 1997. Lexical affixes and morphological typology. In Haiman, John, Bybee, Joan and Thompson, Sandra (eds), Essays on Language Function and Language Type, pp. 357372. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 1999. The Languages of Native North America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2007a. Grammar, contact, and time. Journal of Language Contact, Thema 1: 133155.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2007b. Integrating approaches to diversity: Argument structure on the Northwest Coast. In Matsumoto, Yoshiko, Oshima, David, Robinson, Orrin and Sells, Peter (eds), Diversity in Language, pp. 936. Stanford, CA: CSLI (Center for the Study of Language and Information).Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2008. The emergence of agentive systems. In Donohue, Mark and Wichmann, Søren (eds), The Typology of Semantic Alignment Systems, pp. 297333. Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2012a. Morphologies in contact: Form, meaning, and use in the grammar of reference. In Stolz, Thomas, Vanhove, Martine, Otsuka, Hitomi and Urdzu, Anna (eds), Morphologies in Contact, pp. 1536. Studia Typologica, vol. 10. Berlin: Akademie Verlag.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2012b. Core argument patterns and deep genetic relations: Hierarchical systems in Northern California. In Suihkonen, Pirkko, Comrie, Bernard and Solovyev, Valery (eds), Typology of Argument Structure and Grammatical Relations, pp. 257294. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Mithun, Marianne, 2013. Challenges and benefits of contact among relatives: Morphological copying. Journal of Language Contact 6: 243270.Google Scholar
Munro, Pamela, 1985. Auxiliaries and auxiliarization in Western Muskogean. In Fisiak, Jacek (ed.), Historical Syntax, pp. 333362. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nakayama, Toshihide (ed.), 2003. George Louie’s Nuu-chah-nulth (Ahousaht) Texts with Grammatical Analysis. Endangered Languages of the Pacific Rim, vol. A2–028. Kyoto: Nakanish.Google Scholar
Newman, Stanley, 1944. Yokuts Language of California. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 2. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1971. Diminutive consonant symbolism in Western North America. Language 47 (4): 826848.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
O’Neill, Sean, 2008. Cultural Contact and Linguistic Relativity among the Indians of Northwestern California. Norman, OK: University of Oklahoma Press.Google Scholar
Ortiz, Alfonso (ed.), 1983. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 10: Southwest. Washington: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Parsons, Elsie Clews, 1939. Pueblo Indian Religion. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Quintero, Carolyn, 2004. Osage Grammar. Lincoln, NE: University of Nebraska Press.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 1977. From verb to auxiliary to noun classifier and definite article. Grammaticalization of the Siouan verbs ‘sit’, ‘stand’, ‘lie’. In Brown, R. L. et al. (eds), Proceedings of the 1976 Mid-America Linguistics Conference, pp. 273283. St Paul, MN: Department of Linguistics, University of Minnesota.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 1978. On the origin of the classificatory verbs in Muskogean. Paper presented at the Annual meeting of the American Anthropological Association, Los Angeles.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 1987. Fricative ablaut in Choctaw and Siouan. Paper presented at the Kentucky Foreign Language Conference Session on the Southeast, Lexington.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 1988. Quapaw: Genetic and areal affiliations. In Shipley, William (ed.), In Honor of Mary Haas, pp. 629650. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert, 2004. The history and development of Siouan positionals with special attention to polygrammaticalization in Dhegiha. Sprachtypologie und Universalienforschung (STUF) 2/3: 202227.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 2005. Quapaw. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 454498.Google Scholar
Rankin, Robert L., 2011. The Siouan enclitics: A beginning. Paper prepared for the Comparative Linguistics Workshop, University of Michigan, Ann Arbor.Google Scholar
Reichard, Gladys, 1938. Coeur d’Alene. In Boas, Franz (ed.), 1933–1938, Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 3, pp. 517707. Glückstadt, Hamburg and New York: J. J. Augustin.Google Scholar
Rigsby, Bruce and Silverstein, Michael, 1969. Nez Perce vowels and Proto-Sahaptian vowel harmony. Language 45: 4559.Google Scholar
Sapir, Edward, 1911. Diminutive and augmentative consonantism in Wishram. In Boas, Franz (ed.), Handbook of American Indian Languages, part 1, pp. 638645. Washington, DC: Government Printing Office.Google Scholar
Sapir, Edward, 1929. A study in phonetic symbolism. Journal of Experimental Psychology 12: 225239. Reprinted in 1949 in Mandelbaum, D. G. (ed.), Selected Writings of Edward Sapir, pp. 6172. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Scancarelli, Janine, 2005. Cherokee. In Hardy, and Scancarelli, (eds), pp. 351384.Google Scholar
Sherzer, Joel, 1968. An Areal-Typological Study of the American Indian Languages North of Mexico. PhD dissertation, University of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia.Google Scholar
Sherzer, Joel, 1973. Areal linguistics in North America. In Sebeok, Thomas A. (ed.), Linguistics in North America, pp. 749795. Current Trends in Linguistics, vol. 10. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Sherzer, Joel, 1976. An Areal-Typological Study of American Indian Languages North of Mexico. Amsterdam: North Holland.Google Scholar
Shipley, William, 1963. Maidu Texts and Dictionary. University of California Publications in Linguistics, vol. 33. Berkeley, CA: University of California Press.Google Scholar
Sturtevant, William (ed.), 1988. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 4: History of Indian–White Relations. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Suttles, Wayne (ed.), 1990a. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 7: Northwest Coast. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Suttles, Wayne, 1990b. Introduction. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 115.Google Scholar
Swadesh, Morris, 1933. Chitimacha verbs of derogatory or abusive connotation with parallels from European languages. Language 9: 192201.Google Scholar
Swadesh, Morris, 1939. Chitimacha Grammar. Philadelphia, PA: American Philosophical Society Library.Google Scholar
Swadesh, Morris, 1946. Chitimacha. In Linguistic Structures of Native America, pp. 312336. Viking Fund Publications in Anthropology, vol. 6. New York: Wenner-Gren.Google Scholar
Swanton, John R., 1921. The Tunica language. International Journal of American Linguistics 2: 139.Google Scholar
Swanton, John R., 1929. A sketch of the Atakapa language. International Journal of American Linguistics 5: 121149.Google Scholar
Talmy, Leonard, 1972. Semantic Structures in English and Atsugewi. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of California, Berkeley.Google Scholar
Tarpent, Marie-Lucie, 1987. A Grammar of the Nisgha Language. Unpublished PhD thesis, University of Victoria, BC, Canada.Google Scholar
Thompson, Laurence D., 1972. Language universals, nasals, and the Northwest Coast. In Smith, Estelle (ed.), Studies in Linguistics in Honor of George L. Trager, pp. 441456. Janua Linguarum, Series Maior, vol. 52. The Hague: Mouton.Google Scholar
Thompson, Laurence D. and Kinkade, M. Dale, 1990. Languages. In Suttles, (ed.), pp. 3051.Google Scholar
Walker, Deward E. Jr (ed.), 1998. Handbook of North American Indians, vol. 6: Plateau. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Walker, Willard, 2004. Creek confederacy before removal. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 373392.Google Scholar
Waselkov, Gregory A., 2004. Exchange and interaction since 1500. In Fogelson, (ed.), pp. 686696.Google Scholar
Waterman, T. T. and Kroeber, A. L., 1934. Yurok marriages. University of California Publications in American Archaeology and Ethnology 35: 114.Google Scholar

References

Adelaar, Willem, 2008. Towards a typological profile of the Andean languages. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhoff, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-Evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics, pp. 2333. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999a. Areal diffusion and language contact in the Içana-Vaupés basin, north-west Amazonia. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 384416.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999b. Serial constructions and verb compounding: Evidence from Tariana (North Arawak). Studies in Language 23 (3): 469498.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2001a. Language awareness and correct speech among the Tariana of NW Amazonia. Anthropological Linguistics 43 (4): 411430.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2001b. Areal diffusion, genetic inheritance, and problems of subgrouping: A North Arawak case study. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Areal Diffusion and Genetic Inheritance: Problems in Comparative Linguistics, pp. 167194. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2002. Language Contact in Amazonia. Oxford and New York: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2003. Mechanisms of change in areal diffusion: New morphology and language contact. Journal of Linguistics 39: 129.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2007a. Semantics and pragmatics of grammatical relations in the Vaupés linguistic area. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 237266. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2007b. Classifiers in multiple environments: Baniwa of Içana/Kurripako: A North Arawak perspective. International Journal of American Linguistics 73: 475500.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2012. The Languages of the Amazon. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Arhem, Kaj, 1989. The Makú, the Makuna and the Guiana system: Transformations of social structure in northern lowland South America. Ethnos 54: 522.Google Scholar
Ball, Christopher, 2011. Pragmatic multilingualism in the Upper Xingu speech community. In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 87112.Google Scholar
Basso, Ellen B., 1973. The use of Portuguese relationship terms in Kalapalo (Xingu Carib): Changes in a central Brazilian communicative network. Language in Society 2: 121.Google Scholar
Beier, Christine, Michael, Lev and Sherzer, Joel, 2002. Discourse forms and processes in indigenous lowland South America: An areal-typological perspective. Annual Review of Anthropology 31: 121145.Google Scholar
Birchall, Joshua, 2014. Argument Marking Patterns in South American Languages. PhD dissertation, Radboud Universiteit, Nijmegen.Google Scholar
Bolaños Quinonez, Katherine, 2012. Contact induced categories: A case study of evidentiality in Kakua. Conference presentation, The Nature of Evidentiality. Leiden, 14 June 2014.Google Scholar
Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Gray, Russell et al., 2011. Does lateral transmission obscure inheritance in hunter–gatherer languages? PLoS ONE 6 (9): e25195.Google Scholar
Bowern, Claire, Haynie, Hannah, Sheard, Catherine et al., 2014. Loan and inheritance patterns in hunter–gatherer ethnobiological nomenclature. Journal of Ethnobiology 34 (2): 195227.Google Scholar
Braga, Alzerinda, Cabral, Ana Suelly A. C., Rodrigues, Aryon Dall’Igna and Mindlin, Betty, 2011. Línguas entrelaçadas: Uma situação sui generis de línguas em contato [Intertwined languages: A sui generis situation of languages in contact]. Papia 21 (2): 221230.Google Scholar
Braunstein, José and Miller, Elmer S., 1999. Ethnohistorical introduction. In Miller, Elmer S. (ed.), Peoples of the Gran Chaco, pp. 122. Westport, CT: Bergin & Garvey.Google Scholar
Bruzzi Alves da Silva, Alcionilio, 1977. A Civilação Indígena do Vaupés [The Indigenous Civilization of the Vaupés]. Rome: LAS.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2012. Typological characteristics of South American Indian languages. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 259330.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica, 2010. Who speaks what to whom? Multilingualism and language choice in Misión La Paz. Language in Society 39: 617646.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica, 2012a. Languages of the Chaco and Southern Cone. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 625668.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), 2012b. The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, Kaufman, Terrence and Smith-Stark, Thomas, 1986. Mesoamerica as a linguistic area. Language 62: 530570.Google Scholar
Carlin, Eithne, 2007. Feeling the need: The borrowing of Cariban functional categories into Mawayana (Arawak). In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-Linguistic Perspective, pp. 313332. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Carlin, Eithne, 2011. Nested identities in the southern Guyana-Suriname corner. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 225236.Google Scholar
Carneiro, Robert L., 2000. The evolution of the tipiti: A study in the process of invention. In Feinman, Gary and Manzanilla, Linda (eds), Cultural Evolution: Contemporary Viewpoints, pp. 6191. New York: Kluwer Academic Publishers.Google Scholar
Chacon, Thiago, 2013. Kubeo: Linguistic and cultural interactions in the Upper Rio Negro. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 403440.Google Scholar
Chang, William and Michael, Lev, 2014. A relaxed admixture model of language contact. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 126.Google Scholar
Chernela, Janet, 2013. Toward an East Tukano ethnolinguistics: Metadiscursive practices, identity, and sustained linguistic diversity in the Vaupés basin of Brazil and Colombia. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 197244.Google Scholar
Clastres, Hélène, 1995. The Land-without-Evil: Tupí-Guaraní Prophetism. Urbana and Chicago: University of Illinois Press.Google Scholar
Constenla-Umaña, Adolfo, 1991. Las lenguas del área intermedia: introducción a su estudo areal [The Languages of the Intermediate Area: Introduction to their Areal Study]. San José: Editorial de la Universidad de Costa Rica.Google Scholar
Crevels, Mily and van der Voort, Hein, 2008. The Guaporé-Mamoré region as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas To Areal Linguistics, pp. 151179. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Derbyshire, Desmond, 1987. Morphosyntactic areal characteristics of Amazonian languages. International Journal of American Linguistics 53: 311326.Google Scholar
Derbyshire, Desmond and Payne, Doris, 1990. Noun classification systems of Amazonian languages. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 243271. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), 1999a. The Amazonian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999b. Introduction. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 122.Google Scholar
Dumont, Jean-Paul, 1991. The Headman and I: Ambiguity and Ambivalence in the Fieldworking Experience. Prospect Heights, IL: Waveland Press.Google Scholar
Dunn, Michael, Terrill, Angela, Reesink, Ger, Foley, Robert and Levinson, Stephen, 2005. Structural phylogenetics and the reconstruction of ancient language history. Science 309: 20722075.Google Scholar
Echeverri, Juan Alvaro, 1997. The People of the Center of the World: A Study in Culture, History, and Orality in the Colombian Amazon. PhD dissertation, New School for Social Research, New York.Google Scholar
Edmundson, George, 1904. The Dutch on the Amazon and Negro in the seventeenth century, part II: Dutch trade in the basin of the Rio Negro. The English Historical Review 19 (73): 125.Google Scholar
Edmundson, George, 1922. Introduction. Journal of the Travels and Labours of Father Samuel Fritz in the River of the Amazons Between 1686 and 1723, pp. 331. London: Hakluyt Society.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2005. Areal diffusion and the development of evidentiality: Evidence from Hup. Studies in Language 29 (3): 617650.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2007a. The Vaupés melting pot: Tukanoan influence on Hup. In Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. and Dixon, Robert M. W. (eds), Grammars in Contact: A Cross-linguistic Typology, pp. 267289. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2007b. Birth of a noun classification system: The case of Hup. In Wetzels, W. Leo (ed.), Language Endangerment And Endangered Languages: Linguistic and Anthropological Studies with Special Emphasis on the Languages and Cultures of the Andean–Amazonian Border Area, pp. 107128. The Netherlands: Leiden University.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2008. Grammatical borrowing in Hup. In Matras, Yaron and Sakel, Jeanette (eds), Grammatical Borrowing: A Cross-linguistic Survey, pp. 551565. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2009. Loanwords in Hup, a Nadahup language of Amazonia. In Haspelmath, Martin and Tadmor, Uri (eds), Loanwords in the World’s Languages: A Comparative Handbook. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2012. On form and function in language contact: A case study from the Amazonian Vaupés region. In Léglise, Isabelle and Chamoreau, Claudine (eds), Dynamics of Contact-induced Language Change. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2013. Inheritance, calquing, or independent innovation? Reconstructing morphological complexity in Amazonian numerals. In Epps, , Pat-El, and Huehnergard, (eds), pp. 329357.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2014. Exploring traces of contact between Tupí-Guaraní languages and their neighbors. Talk given 29 May 2014, Amazónicas V, Belém, Brazil.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, 2015. South American languages. In Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Hill, Jane and McConvell, Patrick, Languages of Hunter-Gatherers and their Neighbors: Database. https://huntergatherer.la.utexas.eduGoogle Scholar
Epps, Patience, Bowern, Claire, Hansen, Cynthia, Hill, Jane and Zentz, Jason, 2012. On numeral complexity in hunter–gatherer languages. Linguistic Typology 16: 39107.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience and Neely, Kelsey, 2014. Movimiento y orientación en construcciones verbales: Una perspectiva amazónica [Movement and orientation in verbal constructions: An Amazonian perspective]. In Guerrero, Lilián (ed.), Movimiento y espacio en lenguas de América [Movement and Space in Languages of the Americas]. México: Universidad Nacional Autónoma de México.Google Scholar
Epps, Patience, Pat-El, Na’ama and Huehnergard, John (eds), 2013. Contact Among Genetically Related Languages. Special edition of Journal of Language Contact 6 (2).Google Scholar
Epps, Patience and Stenzel, Kristine (eds), 2013. Upper Rio Negro: Cultural and Linguistic Interaction in Northwestern Amazonia. Rio de Janeiro: Museu do Índio-FUNAI.Google Scholar
Eriksen, Love and Danielsen, Swintha, 2014. The Arawakan matrix. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 152176.Google Scholar
Fausto, Carlos, Franchetto, Bruna and Heckenberger, Michael J., 2008. Language, ritual and historical reconstruction: Towards a linguistic, ethnographical and archaeological account of Upper Xingu Society. In Harrison, David K., Rood, David S. and Dwyer, Aryenne (eds), Lessons from Documented Endangered Languages, pp. 129158. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Floyd, Simeon, 2013. Semantic transparency and cultural calquing in the northwest Amazon. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 271309.Google Scholar
Franchetto, Bruna (ed.), 2011. Alto Xingu: Uma sociedade multilíngue [Upper Xingu: A Multilingual Society]. Rio de Janeiro: Museu do Índio-FUNAI.Google Scholar
Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 1993. Problemas en torno a la comparación de las lenguas Tukano orientales [Problems of comparison in Eastern Tukanoan languages]. In Rodríguez de Montes, Maria Luisa (ed.), Estado actual de la clasificación de las lenguas indígenas de Colombia [Current State of Classification of the Indigenous Languages of Colombia], pp. 235267. Santafé de Bogotá: Instituto Caro y Cuervo.Google Scholar
Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 1996. When animals become ‘rounded’ and ‘feminine’: Conceptual categories and linguistic classification in a multilingual setting. In Gumperz, John J. and Levinson, Stephen C. (eds), Rethinking Linguistic Relativity, pp. 438469. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Guillaume, Antoine, in press. Sistemas complejos de movimiento asociado en las lenguas Takana y Pano: Perspectivas descriptiva, tipológica e histórico-comparativa [Complex systems of associated motion in the Takanan and Panoan languages: Descriptive, typological and historical-comparative perspectives]. In Guillaume, A. and Valenzuela, P. M. (eds), Estudios sincrónicos y diacrónicos sobre lenguas Pano y Takana: fonología, morfología y sintaxis [Synchronic and Diachronic Studies of Panoan and Takanan Languages: Phonology, Morphology and Syntax], special edition of Amerindia.Google Scholar
Guillaume, Antoine and Rose, Françoise, 2010. Sociative causative markers in South American languages: A possible areal feature. In Floricic, Franck (ed.), Essais de typologie et de linguistique générale: Mélanges offerts à Denis Creissels, pp. 383402. Lyon: ENS Éditions.Google Scholar
Guirardello-Damien, Raquel, 2011. Léxico comparativo: Explorando aspectos da história trumai [Lexical comparison: Exploring aspects of Trumai history]. In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 113154.Google Scholar
Haspelmath, Martin, 2004. How hopeless is genealogical linguistics, and how advanced is areal linguistics? Studies in Language 28 (1): 209223.Google Scholar
Haynie, Hannah, Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Hill, Jane and McConvell, Patrick, 2014. Wanderwörter in languages of the Americas and Australia. Ampersand 1: 118.Google Scholar
Heckenberger, Michael and Neves, Eduardo Góes, 2009. Amazonian archaeology. Annual Review of Anthropology 38: 251266.Google Scholar
Hill, Jonathan, 1996. Ethnogenesis in the northwest Amazon: An emerging regional picture. In History, Power, and Identity: Ethnogenesis in the Americas, 1492–1992, pp. 142160. Iowa City: University of Iowa Press.Google Scholar
Hornborg, Alf, 2005. Ethnogenesis, regional integration, and ecology in prehistoric Amazonia: Toward a system perspective. Current Anthropology 46 (4): 589620.Google Scholar
Hornborg, Alf and Eriksen, Love, 2011. An attempt to understand Panoan ethnogenesis in relation to long-term patterns and transformations of regional interaction in western Amazonia. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 129154.Google Scholar
Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan D. (eds), 2011a. Ethnicity in Ancient Amazonia: Reconstructing Past Identities from Archeology, Linguistics, and Ethnohistory. Boulder, CO: University Press of Colorado.Google Scholar
Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan, 2011b. Introduction. In Hornborg, and Hill, (eds), pp. 130.Google Scholar
Howard, Catherine Vaughan, 2001. Wrought Identities: The Waiwai Expeditions In Search of the ‘Unseen Tribes’ of Northern Amazonia. PhD dissertation, University of Chicago.Google Scholar
Jackson, Jean, 1983. The Fish People: Linguistic Exogamy and Tukanoan Identity in Northwest Amazonia. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Krashnoukhova, Olga, 2012. The Noun Phrase in the Languages of South America. PhD dissertation, Radboud Universiteit, Nijmegen.Google Scholar
Lathrap, Donald, 1973. The antiquity and importance of long-distance trade relationships in the moist tropics of pre-Columbian South America. World Archaeology 5 (2): 170186.Google Scholar
Lévi-Strauss, C., 1948. Tribes of the right bank of the Guaporé river. In Steward, J. H. (ed.), Handbook of South American Indians, vol. 3, pp. 370379. Washington, DC: Smithsonian Institution.Google Scholar
Londoño Sulkin, Carlos, 2012. People of Substance: An Ethnography of Morality in the Colombian Amazon. Toronto: University of Toronto Press.Google Scholar
Maldi, Denise, 1991. O complexo cultural do marico: Sociedades indígenas do rio Branco, Colorado e Mequens, afluentes do médio Guaporé [The marico cultural complex: Indigenous societies of the Rio Branco, Colorado, and Mequens]. Boletim do Museu Paraense Emílio Goeldi 7: 209269.Google Scholar
Michael, Lev, Chang, William and Stark, Tammy, 2014. Exploring phonological areality in the circum-Andean region using a naive Bayes classifier. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 2786.Google Scholar
Michael, Lev, Stark, Tammy and Chang, Will (compilers), 2012. South American Phonological Inventory Database v1.1.2. Survey of California and Other Indian Languages Digital Resource. Berkeley, CA: University of California. http://linguistics.berkeley.edu/~saphon/en/Google Scholar
Migliazza, Ernesto, 1985. Languages of the Orinoco-Amazonia region: Current status. In Klein, Harriet E. M. and Stark, Louisa R. (eds), South American Indian Languages: Retrospect and Prospect, pp. 17139. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, 2012. Contacts between indigenous languages in South America. In Campbell, and Grondona, (eds), pp. 235258.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua, van Gijn, Rik, Krasnoukhova, Olga and Müller, Neele, 2015. Linguistic areas, bottom up or top down? The case of the Guaporé-Mamoré region. In Comrie, Bernard and Golluscio, Lucía (eds), Language Contact and Documentation / Contacto Lingüístico y Documentación, pp. 205238. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, et al., 2014. South American Indigenous Language Structures (SAILS) Online. Leipzig: Online Publication of the Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://sails.clld.orgGoogle Scholar
Nordenskiöld, Erland, 1922. Deductions Suggested by the Geographical Distribution of Some Post-Columbian Words Used by the Indians of South America. Göteborg: Elanders Boktryckeri Aktiebolag.Google Scholar
O’Connor, Loretta and Muysken, Pieter (eds), 2014. The Native Languages of South America. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Ospina Bozzi, Ana Maria and Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 2013. Predicados complejos en el Noroeste Amazónico: El caso del Yuhup, el Tatuyo y el Barasana [Complex predicates in the northwest Amazon: The case of Yuhup, Tatuyo, and Barasana]. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 309352.Google Scholar
de Oviedo y Valdés, Gonzalo Fernández, 1851–1855 [1535]. Historia general de las indias [General History of the Indies]. Madrid.Google Scholar
Payne, Doris, 1990. Introduction. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 110. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Rivière, Peter, 1984. Individual and Society in Guiana: A Comparative Study of Amerindian Social Organization. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Rodrigues, Aryon, 2000. Panorama das línguas indígenas da Amazônia. In Queixalós, Francesc and Renault-Lescure, Odile (eds), As línguas amazônicas hoje [Amazonian Languages Today], pp. 1528. São Paulo: Instituto Socioambiental, Museu Parense Emílio Goeldi.Google Scholar
Roth, W. E., 1924. An introductory study of the arts, crafts, and customs of the Guiana Indians. In Thirty-Eighth Annual Report of the Bureau of American Ethnology, pp. 26745.Google Scholar
Rydén, Stig, 1962 . Salt trading in the Amazon Basin: Conclusions suggested by the distribution of Guaraní terms for salt. Anthropos 57 (3/6): 644659.Google Scholar
Seifart, Frank, 2007. The prehistory of nominal classification in Witotoan languages. International Journal of American Linguistics 73: 411445.Google Scholar
Seifart, Frank, 2011. Bora Loans in Resígaro: Massive Morphological and Little Lexical Borrowing in a Moribund Arawakan Language. Cadernos de Etnolingüística, Série Monografias, 2.Google Scholar
Seifart, Frank, 2012. The principle of morphosyntactic subsystem integrity in language contact: Evidence from morphological borrowing in Resígaro (Arawakan). Diachronica 29 (4): 471504.Google Scholar
Seifart, Frank, Fagua, Doris, Gasché, Jürg and Echeverri, Juan Alvaro (eds), 2009. A Multimedia Documentation of the Languages of the People of the Center. Online publication of transcribed and translated Bora, Ocaina, Nonuya, Resígaro, and Witoto audio and video recordings with linguistic and ethnographic annotations and descriptions. Nijmegen: DOBES-MPI.Google Scholar
Seifart, Frank and Payne, Doris, 2007. Nominal classification in the northwest Amazon: Issues in areal diffusion and typological characterization. International Journal of American Linguistics 73 (4): 381387.Google Scholar
Seki, Lucy, 1999. The Upper Xingu as an incipient linguistic area. In Dixon, and Aikhenvald, (eds), pp. 417430.Google Scholar
Seki, Lucy, 2011. Alto Xingu: Uma sociedade multilíngue? In Franchetto, (ed.), pp. 5786.Google Scholar
Sicoli, Mark A. and Holton, Gary, 2014. Linguistic phylogenies support back-migration from Beringia to Asia. PLoS ONE 9 (3): e91722.Google Scholar
Silverstein, Michael, 1981. The limits of awareness. Working Papers in Sociolinguistics 84. Austin, TX: Southwest Educational Development Laboratory.Google Scholar
Sorensen, Arthur P. Jr, 1967. Multilingualism in the Northwest Amazon. American Anthropologist 69: 670684.Google Scholar
Stenzel, Kristine, 2005. Multilingualism in the Northwest Amazon, revisited. Memorias del Congreso de Idiomas Indígenas de Latinoamérica-II, University of Texas at Austin. www.ailla.utexas.org/site/cilla2/Stenzel_CILLA2_vaupes.pdfGoogle Scholar
Stenzel, Kristine, 2008. Kotiria ‘differential object marking’ in cross-linguistic perspective. Amerindia 32: 154181.Google Scholar
Stenzel, Kristine, 2013a. Contact and innovation in Vaupés possession-marking strategies. In Epps, and Stenzel, (eds), pp. 353402.Google Scholar
Stenzel, Kristine, 2013b. Butterflies ‘leaning’ on the doorframe: Expressions of location and position in Kotiria and Wa’ikhana. In Bozzi, Ana Maria Ospina (ed.), Expresión de nociones espaciales en lenguas amazónicas, pp. 85107. Bogotá: Instituto Caro y Cuervo/Universidad Nacional de Colombia.Google Scholar
Stenzel, Kristine and Gomez-Imbert, Elsa, 2009. Contato linguístico e mudança linguística no noroeste amazônico: o caso do Kotiria (Wanano) [Language contact and language change in the northwest Amazon: The case of Kotiria]. Revista da ABRALIN 8: 71100.Google Scholar
Thomason, Sarah G. and Kaufman, Terrence, 1988. Language Contact, Creolization, and Genetic Linguistics. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Vidal, Alejandra and Nercesian, Verónica, 2009. Loanwords in Wichí, a Mataco-Mataguayan language of Argentina. In Haspelmath, Martin and Tadmor, Uri (eds), Loanwords in the World’s Languages: A Comparative Handbook, pp. 10151034. Berlin and New York: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Vidal, Sílvia M., 2000. Kuwé Duwákalumi: The Arawak sacred routes of migration, trade, and resistance. Ethnohistory 47 (3/4): 635667.Google Scholar
Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 1998. Cosmological deixis and Amerindian perspectivism. Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute 4 (3): 469488.Google Scholar
Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 2002. A inconstância da alma selvagem [The Inconstancy of the Savage Soul]. São Paulo (Brazil): Cosac and Naify Edições.Google Scholar
Viveiros de Castro, Eduardo, 2012. Cosmological Perspectivism in Amazonia and Elsewhere. HAU: Journal of Ethnographic Theory, Masterclass Series, vol. 1.Google Scholar
van der Voort, Hein, 2005. Kwaza in comparative perspective. International Journal of American Linguistics 71: 365412.Google Scholar
Whiffen, Thomas 1915. The North-West Amazons: Notes of Some Months Spent Among Cannibal Tribes. London: Constable.Google Scholar
Zuñiga, Fernando, 2007. The discourse–syntax interface in northwestern Amazonia: Differential object marking in Makú and some Tucanoan languages. In Wetzels, W. Leo (ed.), Language Endangerment and Endangered Languages: Linguistic and Anthropological Studies with Special Emphasis on the Languages and Cultures of the Andean–Amazonian Border Area, pp. 209227. Leiden: University of Leiden.Google Scholar

References

Adelaar, Willem (with Muysken, Pieter), 2004. The Languages of the Andes. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Adelaar, Willem, 2008. Towards a typological profile of the Andean languages. In Lubotsky, Alexander, Schaeken, Jos and Wiedenhof, Jeroen (eds), Evidence and Counter-Evidence: Essays in Honour of Frederik Kortlandt, vol. 2: General Linguistics, pp. 2333. Amsterdam: Rodopi.Google Scholar
Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 2002. Language Contact in Amazonia. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Birchall, Joshua, 2014a. Verbal argument marking patterns in South American languages. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 223249.Google Scholar
Birchall, Joshua, 2014b. Argument Realization in the Languages of South America. Doctoral dissertation, Radboud University, Nijmegen.Google Scholar
Bowern, Claire, Epps, Patience, Gray, Russell et al., 2011. Does lateral transmission obscure inheritance in hunter–gatherer languages? PLoS ONE 6 (9): e25195.Google Scholar
Brackelaire, Vincent and Azanha, Gilberto, 2006. Últimos pueblos indígenas aislados en América Latina: Reto a la supervivencia [Last isolated indigenous peoples in Latin America: The challenge of their Survival]. In Lenguas y Tradiciones Orales de la Amazonía: ¿Diversidad en Peligro? [Languages and Oral Traditions of Amazonia: Diversity in Peril?], pp. 313367. La Habana: Casa de las Américas.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, Kaufman, Terrence and Smith-Stark, Thomas C., 1986. Meso-America as a linguistic area. Language 62 (3): 530570.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2012a. Classification of the indigenous languages of South America. In Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 59166. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, 2012b. Typological characteristics of South American indigenous languages. In Campbell, Lyle and Grondona, Verónica (eds), The Indigenous Languages of South America: A Comprehensive Guide, pp. 259330. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Campbell, Lyle, this volume, Chapter 2. Why is it so hard to define a linguistic area?Google Scholar
Chang, Will and Michael, Lev, 2014. A relaxed admixture model of contact. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 126.Google Scholar
Constenla-Umaña, Adolfo, 1991. Las Lenguas del Area Intermedia: Introducción a su Estudio Areal [The Languages of the Intermediate Area: Introduction to Their Areal Study]. San José: Editorial de la Universidad de Costa Rica.Google Scholar
Crevels, Mily and van der Voort, Hein, 2008. The Guaporé-Mamoré region as a linguistic area. In Muysken, Pieter (ed.), From Linguistic Areas to Areal Linguistics, pp. 151180. Amsterdam: John Benjamins.Google Scholar
Dahl, Östen, Gillam, J. Christopher, Anderson, David G., Iriarte, José and Copé, Silvia M., 2012. Linguistic diversity zones and cartographic modeling: GIS as a method for understanding the prehistory of lowland South America. In Hornborg, Alf and Hill, Jonathan David (eds), Ethnicity in Ancient Amazonia: Reconstructing Past Identities from Archaeology, Linguistics, and Ethnohistory, pp. 211224. Boulder, CO: University Press of Colorado.Google Scholar
Derbyshire, Desmond C. and Pullum, Geoffrey K., 1986. Introduction. In Derbyshire, Desmond C. and Pullum, Geoffrey K. (eds), Handbook of Amazonian Languages, vol. 1, pp. 128. Berlin: Mouton de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y., 1999. Other small families and isolates. In Dixon, Robert M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), The Amazonian Languages, pp. 341381. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Dunne, Thomas and Mertes, Leal Anne Kerry, 2007. Rivers. In Veblen, Thomas T., Young, Kenneth R. and Orme, Anthony R. (eds), The Physical Geography of South America, pp. 7690. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Eriksen, Love, 2011. Nature and Culture in Prehistoric Amazonia. PhD Dissertation, Lund University.Google Scholar
Evans, Nicholas and Levinson, Stephen C., 2009. The myth of language universals: Language diversity and its importance for cognitive science. Behavioral and Brain Sciences 32 (5): 429492.Google Scholar
van Gijn, Rik, 2014a. The Andean foothills and adjacent Amazonian fringe. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 102125.Google Scholar
van Gijn, Rik, 2014b. Subordination strategies in South America: Nominalization. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 274297.Google Scholar
Greenberg, Joseph H., 1987. Language in the Americas. Stanford, CA: Stanford University Press.Google Scholar
Hammarström, Harald and O’Connor, Loretta, 2013. Dependency-sensitive typological distance. In Borin, Lars and Saxena, Anju (eds), Approaches to Measuring Linguistic Differences, pp. 337360. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Hammarström, Harald and Güldemann, Tom, 2014. Quantifying geographical determinants of large-scale distributions of linguistic features. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 87115.Google Scholar
van de Kerke, Simon and Muysken, Pieter, 2014. The Andean matrix. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 126151.Google Scholar
Krasnoukhova, Olga, 2012. The Noun Phrase in the Languages of South America. Doctoral dissertation, Radboud University, Nijmegen.Google Scholar
Krasnoukhova, Olga, 2014. The noun phrase: Focus on demonstratives, redrawing the semantic map. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 250273.Google Scholar
Michael, Lev, Chang, Will and Stark, Tammy, 2014. Exploring phonological areality in the circum-Andean region using a Naive Bayes Classifier. Language Dynamics and Change 4 (1): 2786.Google Scholar
Müller, Neele, 2014. Language internal and external factors in the development of the desiderative in South American indigenous languages. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 203222.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, 2010. Scenarios for language contact. In Hickey, Raymond (ed.), The Handbook of Language Contact, pp. 265281. Malden, MA: Wiley-Blackwell.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, 2012. Contacts between indigenous languages in South America. In Grondona, Veronica and Campbell, Lyle (eds), Handbook of South American Historical Linguistics, pp. 235258. Berlin: de Gruyter Mouton.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua et al., 2014. The languages of South America: Deep families, areal relationships, and language contact. In O’Connor, and Muysken, (eds), pp. 299322.Google Scholar
Muysken, Pieter, Hammarström, Harald, Birchall, Joshua, van Gijn, Rik, Krasnoukhova, Olga and Müller, Neele, 2015. Linguistic areas, bottom up or top down? The case of the Guaporé-Mamoré. In Comrie, Bernard and Golluscio, Lucia (eds), Language Contact and Documentation, pp. 205238. Berlin: de Gruyter.Google Scholar
Nettle, Daniel, 1996. Language diversity in West Africa: An ecological approach. Journal of Anthropological Archaeology 15 (4): 403438.Google Scholar
Nettle, Daniel, 1999. Linguistic Diversity. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1990. Linguistic diversity and the first settlement of the New World. Language 66 (3): 475521.Google Scholar
Nichols, Johanna, 1992. Linguistic Diversity in Space and Time. Chicago: University of Chicago Press.Google Scholar
Nordhoff, Sebastian, Hammarström, Harald, Forkel, Robert and Haspelmath, Martin, 2013. Glottolog 2.1. Leipzig: Max Planck Institute for Evolutionary Anthropology. http://glottolog.orgGoogle Scholar
O’Connor, Loretta and Muysken, Pieter (eds), 2014. The Native Languages of South America: Origins, Development, Typology. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press.Google Scholar
Orme, Anthony R., 2007. The tectonic framework of South America. In Veblen, Thomas T., Young, Kenneth R. and Orme, Anthony R. (eds), The Physical Geography of South America, pp. 322. Oxford: Oxford University Press.Google Scholar
Payne, Doris, 1990. Morphological characteristics of Amazonian languages. In Payne, Doris (ed.), Amazonian Linguistics: Studies in Lowland South American Languages, pp. 213241. Austin, TX: University of Texas Press.Google Scholar
Seki, Lucy, 1999. The Upper Xingú as an incipient linguistic area. In Dixon, R. M. W. and Aikhenvald, Alexandra Y. (eds), The Amazonian Languages. Cambridge: Cambridge University Press, pp. 417430.Google Scholar
Tessmann, Günter, 1930. Die Indianer Nordost-Perus: Grundlegende Forschungen für eine systematische Kulturkunde. Hamburg: Friedrichsen, de Gruyter and Co.Google Scholar
Torero, Alfredo, 2002. Idiomas de los Andes: Lingüística e Historia [Languages of the Andes: Linguistics and History]. Lima: IFEA and Editorial Horizonte.Google Scholar

Save book to Kindle

To save this book to your Kindle, first ensure [email protected] is added to your Approved Personal Document E-mail List under your Personal Document Settings on the Manage Your Content and Devices page of your Amazon account. Then enter the ‘name’ part of your Kindle email address below. Find out more about saving to your Kindle.

Note you can select to save to either the @free.kindle.com or @kindle.com variations. ‘@free.kindle.com’ emails are free but can only be saved to your device when it is connected to wi-fi. ‘@kindle.com’ emails can be delivered even when you are not connected to wi-fi, but note that service fees apply.

Find out more about the Kindle Personal Document Service.

Available formats
×

Save book to Dropbox

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Dropbox.

Available formats
×

Save book to Google Drive

To save content items to your account, please confirm that you agree to abide by our usage policies. If this is the first time you use this feature, you will be asked to authorise Cambridge Core to connect with your account. Find out more about saving content to Google Drive.

Available formats
×